D H SECURITY RANSPORTATION SECURITY ADMINISTRATION ... · american recovery & reinvestment act of...

AMERICAN RECOVERY & REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009

DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY—TRANSPORTATION SECURITY ADMINISTRATION

TICKETING ‘B’ INLINE BAGGAGE SCREENING

AT

ST. PETERSBURG~CLEARWATER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA

ARRA 2009 DHS/TSA PROJECT NO. HSTS04-10-H-REC104 DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY REMAG NO. 09-686

AIRPORT CONTRACT NO. AP-68 PURCHASING DEPARTMENT BID NO. 090-0398-CP

JUNE 17, 2010

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2

THE LPA GROUP INCORPORATED

SUITE 400 ● 4503 WOODLAND CORPORATE BOULEVARD ● TAMPA, FL 33614 PHONE (813) 889-3892 ● FAX (813) 889-3893

FLORIDA LICENSE # AA00003054 LPA PROJECT NO. 0178 0017 AR

ST. PETERSBURG - CLEARWATER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LPA PN: AR178017 AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009 JUNE 17, 2010 TICKETING ‘B’ INLINE BAGGAGE SCREENING

TABLE OF CONTENTS ITB –PURCHASING CONSTRUCTION TOC – 1

AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009 TICKETING ‘B’ INLINE BAGGAGE SCREENING

PROJECT MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................... 5 01143 AIRPORT PROJECT WORK PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 18 APPENDIX 01143.1 – FAA ADVISORY CIRCULAR: “OPERATIONAL SAFETY ON

AIRPORTS DURING CONSTRUCTION” .................................................................................. 25 01210 ALLOWANCES ............................................................................................................................. 3 01230 ALTERNATES ............................................................................................................................... 3 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES .......................................................................... 6 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES .......................................................................................................... 5 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ............................................................... 10 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION................................................................. 8 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ...................................................................................... 3 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 11 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 8 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .......................................................................... 8 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 8 01600A - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ............................................................................. 3 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 10 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ......................................................................................................... 7 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................... 5 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................. 3 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .............................................................................. 7 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ........................................................................................ 5

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION ................................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE ...................................................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY ........................................................................................ NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 5 - METALS 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL .................................................................................................................. 7 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS .............................................................................................................. 6 05730 ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL ............................................................................................. 4

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY .............................................................................................. 4

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM .................................................................................... 5 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................. 5 07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS .................................................................. 8 07901 JOINT SEALANTS ........................................................................................................................ 3


TABLE OF CONTENTS ITB –PURCHASING CONSTRUCTION TOC – 2

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ................................................................................................... 6 08710 DOOR HARDWARE ................................................................................................................... 19

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 GYPSUM BOARD ......................................................................................................................... 6 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .............................................................................................. 3 09852 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS ......................................................................................... 1 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING ................................................................................................................. 7 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING .................................................................................................................. 9

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ............................................................................................ 5

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS ............................................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION .......................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14540 BAGGAGE CONVEYORS .......................................................................................................... 55

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 14 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................................... 18 15700 TEST AND BALANCE .................................................................................................................. 5

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................. 8 16110 RACEWAYS. ................................................................................................................................. 4 16120 WIRES AND CABLES .................................................................................................................. 3 16131 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES .................................................................................................. 2 16133 CABINETS ..................................................................................................................................... 1 16134 OUTLET BOXES ........................................................................................................................... 2 16140 WIRING DEVICES ........................................................................................................................ 3 16155 MOTOR STARTERS ..................................................................................................................... 1 16160 PANELBOARDS ........................................................................................................................... 3 16170 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS ................................................................................... 1 16181 FUSES ............................................................................................................................................ 1 16182 CIRCUIT BREAKER ..................................................................................................................... 1 16450 GROUNDING ................................................................................................................................ 2 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ..................................................................................................... 2 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES ................................................................................................................. 2 16501 LAMPS ........................................................................................................................................... 1 16721 VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ...................................................................... 28

END OF VOLUME 2

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


SUMMARY 01100 - 1

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work under separate contracts. 4. Owner-furnished products 5. Use of premises. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section “Airport Project Work Procedures” for limitations and procedures governing work on the Airport.

2. Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner’s facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 – DHS/TSA Ticketing ‘B’ – Inline Baggage Screening Project

ARRA 2009 TSA Project No. HSTS04-10-H-REC104 TSA REMAG No. 09086

1. Project Location: St. Petersburg-Clearwater International Airport 14700 Terminal Boulevard

Clearwater, Florida 33763.

B. Owner: County Comission of Pinellas County, Florida – St Petersburg-Clearwater International Airport

1. Owner’s Representative: John Holt, Airport Engineer

C. Architect: THE LPA GROUP INCORPORATED Florida License Number AA00003054 Suite 400, 4503 Woodland Corporate Boulevard, Tampa, Florida 33614 Phone: (813) 889-3892 Fax: (813) 889-3893 Contact: William “Chip” A. Hayward, AIA, Project Manager Florida Architect License Number 0011007


SUMMARY 01100 - 2

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The construction work includes furnishing labor, materials, and equipment in accordance with the project plans and specifications. Work includes installation and integration of new baggage conveying equipment, relocation and reconfiguration of existing baggage conveying equipment, coordination and integration of baggage conveying equipment with baggage screening devices to be provided by others for a complete baggage handling system; cutting and patching of existing wall to incorporate new opening; miscellaneous custom metal fabrication; alteration and change of hardware to existing hollow metal doors and frames; mechanical exhaust system; electrical work for baggage handling system, minor power relocation, lighting, and extension of data/communications lines; acoustical wall treatment; and acoustical panel ceiling.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.4 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.\

B. Preceding Work: Owner has awarded separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.

1. American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 – Federal Aviation Administration Grant – Terminal Area Improvements: A separate contract has been awarded to Ajax Building Corporation for upgrades to Airside and Landside doors, replacement of two hydraulic elevators; interior finishes for wallcovering and floors; airside aircraft parking apron rehabilitation; terminal roofing replacement; sidewalk rehabilitation; interior millwork at Ticketing ‘A’; baggage conveyor replacement; landside primary corridor interior finish replacement; and interior millwork at Gates 7-10.

C. Concurrent Work – Under Contract: Owner has awarded separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1. Terminal Area Improvements – Concession Tenant Area Upfits: A separate contract has been awarded to Ajax Building Corporation for interior improvements for a food and beverage concessionaire space at Gates 2-6.

D. Concurrent Work – Owner Performed: Owner will perform work using his own forces for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.


SUMMARY 01100 - 3

1. Pinellas County Public Works –Upgrade of Domestic and Fire Fighting Water Supply Infrastructure to Terminal Area and Terminal Building

2. Pinellas County Public Works – Roadway Improvements at entrances along Roosevelt Boulevard

3. Work by Tenants – Transportation Security Administration will award a contract for the installation and connection of baggage screening devices within the area of the Contractor’s work.

4. Work by Tenants – Transportation Security Administration will award a separate contract for the acceptance testing of the inline baggage screening system; Contractor testing and Owner/Tenant testing shall be coordinated and scheduled prior to Final Completion of the Work.

1.5 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Construction Drawings.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and

available to Owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of roads, apron and driveways, and of security gates and entrances.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.

1.6 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner’s day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than seven days’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations.


SUMMARY 01100 - 4

B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.

3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Checked baggage screening equipment: Owner will coordinate with tenant (Transportation Security Administration) to furnish baggage screening equipment, generally as shown and identified in the Drawings. Actual equipment to be provided may change depending on schedule and availability. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and Tenant to confirm schedule for installation of equipment and service connections needed. Contractor shall coordinate with, and assist as reasonable, Owner and/or Tenant’s separate Contractors for installation, integration, and calibration of screening equipment, data communication systems, and access control system.

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC’s “MasterFormat” numbering system.

1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words


SUMMARY 01100 - 5

shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words “shall,” “shall be,” or “shall comply with,” depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01100


AIRPORT PROJECT WORK PROCEDURES 01143 - 1

SECTION 01143 – AIRPORT PROJECT WORK PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1. Refer also to Section 01100 “Summary” 2. Refer also to Phasing and Staging Plans in the drawings

1.2 INTRODUCTION – AIRPORT OPERATIONS

A. The safety of the Airport patrons and personnel and of the Contractor’s personnel is paramount throughout construction. Except where stricter requirements are indicated, the Contractor shall follow the safety guidelines referenced in the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) [www.faa.gov] Advisory Circular (AC) No. 150/5370, latest edition, “Operational Safety on Airports During Construction”.

B. This project may include Contractor operations within active Air Operations Areas (AOA). The Airport will conduct normal aircraft operations during the course of this project, subject to certain restrictions called out in this section or elsewhere in the specifications. Therefore, to provide for the security and safety of Airport users and the Contractor’s forces, as well as to minimize interruptions to aircraft operations, the Contractor shall limit his work within the areas designated and conduct his operations as specified.

C. This project will include work in and around Transportation Security Administration (TSA) [www.tsa.gov] work and office areas. Work shall be installed, and be conducted, in accordance with latest TSA guidelines and in coordination with the local Federal Security Director’s office and the local TSA representative. The current "Recommended Security Guidelines for Airport Planning, Design, and Construction" were revised June 15, 2006 and are available through the TSA website.

D. Unauthorized crossing of the AOA is prohibited.

1. Any fines or assessments levied against the Sponsor (Owner) as a result of intrusions in the AOA or other violations by the Contractor’s personnel or those of his subcontractors and suppliers will be passed on to the Contractor and assessed against the Contract Amount on the next Application for Payment.

2. In addition to any fines assessed to the individual and the Sponsor, the Contractor will be subject to a fine per incident, assessed by the Sponsor.

a. For the first incident, the individual and firm will be fined $2,500. b. For the second incident, the individual and firm will be fined $5,000.



c. For the third incident, the individual, and possibly the associated firm, may be prohibited from the Secured Area, from the Work area, or from the Airport property, at the sole discretion of the Sponsor.

E. Construction Scheduling and Coordination: The Work will be conducted so as to provide the least possible interference with the Owner’s daily operations. Prior to commencing Work on-site, the Contractor shall submit, and secure approval from the Owner, a complete schedule for the project, identifying any expected periods of potential conflict.

F. Coordinate Construction Activities with Airport Operations and Security Plan:

1. Provide and/or secure the following:

a. Safety Plan Report b. Quality Assurance Plan Report c. Security badges/training

2. Reports under this heading shall be prepared in compliance with Airport Operations Department requirements.

G. Contractor may contact the AIRPORT ENGINEER for requirements and clarifications related to this topic.

1.3 AIRPORT SAFETY

A. Contractor shall obtain, have knowledge of, and incorporate the following safety provisions into the construction project:

1. Operational Safety on Airports During Construction – AC-150/5370, latest edition, (attached as Appendix 1).

2. Airport Safety Self-Inspection – AC-150/5200, latest edition. 3. Painting, Marking, and Lighting of Vehicles Used on an Airport – AC 150/5210, latest

edition. 4. Consideration of Improvement of Airport Safety – FAR, PART 139.

B. Contractor shall comply with all Airport security regulations that may be established to protect airport operations.

1. Additional notes on the Phasing and Staging drawings and in the general requirements sections of these Contract Documents provide a level of safety and security requirements and guidelines.

2. The Contractor shall incorporate the Airport guidelines and requirements into his Construction Safety and Security Plan, and attain Owner’s approval in advance of mobilizing Contractor’s forces on the Airport premises.

3. Failure to comply with the Contractor’s Safety and Security Plan, or violation of any Airport safety and security regulations and protocols, will result in disciplinary action. At a minimum, violations will result in temporary restriction of an individual’s access to secure areas of the Airport. Disciplinary actions may, as relates to the type and nature of the violation, and at the Airport’s sole discretion, include:



a. Verbal reprimand and temporary revocation of access privileges b. Temporary revocation of access privileges and mandatory re-training in Security

Class and Airport Safety and Security procedures c. Permanent restriction of access privileges d. Permanent loss of access privileges e. Restriction from worksite f. Restriction and removal from Airport property(ies) g. Fines, as defined elsewhere in this document or in the security plan

C. All actions of the Contractor’s employees, subcontractors and suppliers are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. All employees, subcontractors and suppliers must be educated regarding related work and the safety requirements of the aircraft operations area and public safety adjacent to the construction area.

D. Observe and/or follow all safety related instructions by any Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), Transportation Security Administration, and Airport personnel at all times.

1. In case of emergency, the Contractor shall make every effort to remove the equipment and personnel from affected area(s) and abide by decisions made by the Owner or his/her representative.

a. To the best of his ability, the Contractor shall immediately comply with directives from representatives of the FAA and Transportation Security Administration. Contractor will then promptly notify first the designated Airport Operations representative and second the Owner’s project representative of the incident.

b. See General Conditions and other parts of this Section for additional information in case of emergencies and other unforeseeable conditions beyond the Control of the Contractor or the Owner, which may include acts of God or the public enemy, acts of government, hurricanes, fires, floods, or safety and security incidences and changes in national transportation safety and security procedures.

E. The Contractor shall cooperate with the airport users, through the Owner, in scheduling his operations to provide adequate clearances for safe access, circulation and exit of passengers; loading and unloading of baggage, and maneuvering, taxiing, and parking of aircraft and ground equipment.

F. Work will be carried on in such a manner as to leave the portion of the building open to airport users free from hazards at all times.

1. All walk surfaces shall be kept clean and free of dirt, stone, and debris. 2. Mud tracked into portions of the building that are in use shall be cleaned immediately. 3. Waste and loose material capable of causing harm to the public shall not be tolerated.

G. Vehicular Markings: Contractor vehicles and equipment shall be marked with checkered flags and lighted with flashing beacons to comply with requirements of FAA AC 150/5210, latest edition.



H. Taxiway Safety Zones:

1. Limitations: When necessary to accomplish construction in areas adjacent to taxiways, the construction equipment, vehicles, and men are authorized to operate without interruption within the project limits, except within the following areas and as specified otherwise:

a. Distance from active taxiway or apron taxilane centerline: Within 129.5 feet.

2. Request for Facility Closures: Construction activities on taxiways or within the above-restricted areas shall only be performed at times when the taxiways are closed to aircraft. Closure of a taxiway or any portion thereof must be requested in writing by the Contractor through the Engineer. This request must indicate the areas needed and a schedule of operations and time(s) required for operations within the area. The Owner reserves the right, however, to shift any approved closure periods to alleviate aircraft congestion or when inclement weather conditions dictate.

3. Equipment Operation Restrictions: Contractor may be permitted to operate trenching machines and other equipment in Taxiway Safety Zones provided all of the following conditions are satisfied:

a. The equipment operator and/or crew foreman monitors the ATC ground frequency continuously, using a two-way radio transceiver.

b. All equipment shall be cleared from the Taxiway Safety Zones during aircraft operations (landings, take-offs, and taxiing).

c. All equipment within the Taxiway Safety Zones is manned and being used. No unnecessary or parked equipment will be allowed within the Taxiway Safety Zones.

d. All excavated trenches and holes shall be backfilled, tamped and leveled to match existing grades before workmen leave the site at the end of each workday.

4. Stockpiles: Stockpiled materials shall not be permitted within the taxiway safety zones. 5. Grading Requirements: All construction within a restricted area shall be performed in

such a manner that, at the end of the closure period, it will leave the safety area with no abrupt grade changes and with no trenches with depth or width greater than 3”.

I. Obstructions to Navigation:

1. Violation of Safety Zone Surfaces: Penetration of equipment, vehicles, materials, or men into the safety zones and approach surfaces requires the preparation and distribution of Notices of Airmen (NOTAMs) in advance to the actual penetration.

2. Scheduling: When part of the work in this project is in violation of FAR Part 77, the clearance distance requirements from runway and taxiway edges shall be incorporated into the construction sequence schedule. At no time shall the construction limits of the area under construction violate the safety zones without prior notification to and approval by the Engineer.

J. Coordination and Communication: Work within and adjacent to active AOAs shall be coordinated with the Owner prior to commencement of the activity. Work crews in these areas



shall be accompanied by the construction superintendent who shall be in constant radio contact with ATC.

K. Safety and security can be discussed with the Contractor or his/her representative at the Pre-Construction Conference and at progress meetings at the job site.

1.4 AIRPORT SECURITY

A. Secured Area Requirements: As part of the Airport Security Plan, the Contractor will be required to adhere to all FAA and TSA security requirements and all construction personnel working in, or having access to, secure areas (AOA side of the Secured Area, see Phasing and Staging Plans for limits) will be required to obtain and wear badges issued by the Owner and comply with provisions of the Airport Security Plan.

1. Badges will be required for certain construction personnel. The Contractor’s superintendent and supervisors, all approved equipment escort personnel, and other select personnel shall be trained, certified and badged for operations within the Secured Area as defined with the current approved Airport Security Plan.

2. Obtain necessary clearances and identification badges for construction personnel through the Airport Operations Department (See Special Conditions, “Airport Security Provisions”). The badges shall be returned at project completion.

3. Applications for clearance check and other required forms should be turned into Airport Operations. A photo identification badge will be issued for each approved application.

a. There will be a processing fee of Forty-One Dollars ($41.00) for fingerprint and background check prior to issuing each initial badge.

b. The badge remains property of the Owner. There is a Twelve Dollar ($12.00) charge for the initial badge itself.

c. There will be a Forty Dollar ($40.00) nonrefundable replacement fee for lost badges.

d. A non-refundable fee of Seventy-Five Dollars ($75.00) fee will be assessed if a badge holder does not return badge at the completion of the project, or upon request of Airport Operations, or if a badge holder fails to report a lost badge in a timely manner.

4. Each badge holder will be required to comply with the security rules and regulations of St. Petersburg~Clearwater International Airport.

a. The Airport could suffer severe fines or penalties as a result of security violations. b. The Contractor will be responsible for these fines or penalties for any security

violations that are his responsibility. c. In addition to fines assessed by the FAA or TSA for security violations, the

Contractor, and the responsible individual, will be assessed a fine for each violation, as described elsewhere in this Section.

B. The Contractor shall provide security within the construction area and shall keep all unauthorized personnel out.



C. Contractor should confine all construction personnel to within the construction limits during each phase of the work.

D. Contractor security measures will be discussed and reviewed at the Pre-Construction Conference.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:

A. General Safety and Accident Prevention: The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, and regulations governing safety, health, and sanitation; shall provide barricades; and shall take any other needed actions, on his own responsibility, that are reasonably necessary to protect the life and health of employees on the job, the safety of airport users, and the safety of moving and parked aircraft, and other property during the performance of the work.

1. Safety Officer: The Contractor is required to designate a Safety Officer who will be the liaison between the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer and the Owner in all safety related matters for the duration of the project. The Safety Officer shall be on call 24 hours per day for emergency maintenance of airport hazard lighting, barricades, and other safety features.

a. The Safety Officer’s duties shall include accident prevention.

B. Portions of the airport shall be occupied during construction. The general Contractor shall comply with the following life safety issues. Failure to list all life safety issues does not relieve the Contractors from complying with federal, state, and local codes, the contractual agreement between the Contractor and Owner, and other governing bodies, which have jurisdiction on this project. The following are interim life safety code issues which are specific to this project and must be addressed:

1. Insure all exits provide free and unobstructed egress. The Airport Engineer shall receive written notification and shall respond with approval if alternative exits must be designated.

2. Ensure fire alarm, detection and suppression systems are not impaired. A temporary, but equivalent, system shall be provided, installed and tested prior to any existing fire system being impaired.

3. Ensure temporary construction partitions are smoke tight and built of non-combustible materials. The locations of partitions shall be coordinated with the Airport Engineer. Surfaces exposed to public view shall be gypsum board, taped, and painted. Construction side surfaces may be gypsum board or fire treated plywood at Contractor’s option.

4. Provide temporary walkway enclosures as required when access is needed thru a construction area. Enclosures shall be designed by a structural Engineer for the potential construction loads in that area.

5. Smoking shall be prohibited in all areas of the building. Only in designated areas outside the airport shall smoking be allowed.

6. Develop and enforce storage, housekeeping and debris removal procedures that reduce the flammable and combustible fire load to the lowest level necessary for daily operations.

7. Secure all tools and construction materials during breaks and non-construction hours.



C. Protection of Utilities: The Contractor shall be responsible for field marking and protecting all utilities within the construction limits.

D. Storage of Equipment, Vehicles, and Materials: All equipment, vehicles, and materials must be stored in the designated storage or staging area or in areas acceptable to the Architect / Engineer.

E. Limitations on Construction Methods:

1. No open flames or burning will be allowed on Airport property. Burning of debris will not be allowed on airport property

2. Stockpiled material shall be constrained in a manner to prevent displacement by jet blast, propeller blast, or wind.

F. Prior to commencing the work, Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approvals, including building construction permits, required for the project.

G. Contractor to submit a safety security plan for approval within ten days of receipt of Letter of Intent to Award, but in no case later than the Pre-Construction Conference.

1.6 PHASING AND SEQUENCING

A. The Contractor shall schedule his work activities in accordance with requirements of the Phasing Plans, and these Specifications unless otherwise approved by the Owner.

B. Existing easements to other properties shall be maintained at all times. Areas outside the project limits are designated as restricted areas. The Contractor’s forces are prohibited from entering restricted areas at any time, unless specifically authorized by the Airport Operations office.

1. Construction stakeout shall be performed by Contractor in accordance with the specifications. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all measurements that may be required to lay out the construction.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for visiting the site to become familiar with the existing conditions. The documents shall serve to aid the Contractor in his evaluation of the sequences and extents of construction; but shall not be held to be all-inclusive. Any apparent conflicts or deficiencies must be submitted to the Architect, in writing, prior to bidding.

D. Owner/Tenants/Vendors shall be responsible for the removal of their furnishings and equipment unless noted otherwise.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for relocation of fixed furnishings, airport equipment, and security equipment necessary for the progress of the Work. Coordinate requirements with Owner or Tenant as applicable.

1.7 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.



1. Limits: Confine construction operations to staging areas, and areas identified for each phase of construction elsewhere in the Construction Documents.

a. Restricted Areas: Secure Identification Display Areas, Secured Area, and Aircraft Operations Area:

1) Access to some areas of the Project Work Area is restricted to cleared personnel. Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of his own forces, of all subcontractors and subcontractors’ forces, and suppliers.

2) Contractor is responsible for making himself and his forces on site aware of the Airport Security Program as it relates to access to the Airport Operations Area.

3) Perform work in a manner so as to limit construction activities in restricted areas of the Airport. Contractor’s approved Superintendent shall be present for any construction activity that is expected to occur in the Secured Area.

2. The Owner will endeavor to cooperate with the Contractor’s operations when the Contractor has notified the Airport Engineer in advance of need for changes in operations in order to accommodate construction operations. Conduct the work so as to cause the least interference with the Owner’s operations.

3. The following existing facilities may not be used by construction personnel:

a. Public elevators. b. Toilet facilities. c. Parking lots, except as designated in the staging plans. d. Public telephones e. Public waiting areas

4. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site. c. Delivery vehicles, construction vehicles and other construction related hauling

vehicles are restricted to the hauling/travel routes identified on the Site Phasing Plan, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the Airport Engineer.

d. The area immediately adjacent to the Area of Work is limited. Coordinate transportation of workers and equipment from the Staging Area to this area in order to limit the number of vehicles present. Limit total number of vehicles in this area to the space available, and as approved in advance by the Airport Engineer. Only authorized work vehicles, as described elsewhere in this document, will be allowed access to the Secured Area. No personal vehicles will be allowed in the staging areas within the Secured Area.

e. Storage areas will be available on site.



5. Signs: Provide signs adequate to direct visitors. Do not install, or allow to be installed, signs other than specified sign(s) and signs identifying the principal entities involved in the project.

B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.

C. Emergency Preparedness / Special Event Conditions: The Contractor shall fully participate with the County in reasonable measures to protect the general public, the County and the Airport, their employees, the Contractor and his employees, and his forces, equipment, and materials from damages from unforeseeable causes beyond the control of the Owner or the Contractor, including but not limited to: unusual weather events, acts of God, acts of public enemies, acts of government, fires, floods, discovery of pre-existing hazardous materials or hazardous conditions, epidemics, quarantine or public-health regulations, and strikes or lockouts.

1. In the event of an emergency affecting the safety or security of the public, Airport tenants, Airport employees, Contractor or subcontractor employees, the Project, other property or individuals, then the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization, shall act to prevent and reduce injury, damage, or loss.

a. Upon observation of conditions, acts or events indicating risk to safety or security anywhere on Airport property, Contractor shall immediately notify Airport Operations and Airport Engineer.

2. The Contractor and representatives of primary subcontractors, to include at a minimum the Superintendent, Safety Coordinator, and Security Coordinator, shall attend and take part in bi-annual emergency preparedness planning meetings organized by the Airport.

3. In the event of foreseeable (at least 24-hours advance warning) uncontrollable conditions that may impact the Airport (e.g., approaching hurricane), the Contractor is responsible for securing the Project Area to reduce risk of damage to persons or property, to the satisfaction of the Owner. Upon notice from the Airport Engineer or other authority having jurisdiction of impending hazardous conditions, the Contractor shall:

a. Enclose any in-progress openings in the building envelope with weather-proof temporary partitions.

b. Cover exposed substrates or incomplete exterior finishes securely with anchored water-resistant coverings.

c. Secure unused materials in containers and/or trailers and remove from areas in, on, or adjacent to construction or existing buildings.

d. Remove all equipment or materials that are likely to become air- or water-borne, to include staging materials and temporary facilities, from, on or adjacent to the AOA.

e. Remove cranes, hoists, and other mobile equipment over ten feet tall from the site, or to covered storage, if allowed by the Airport Engineer.

f. Remove all non-essential vehicles from the Site, and secure off-site under Contractor’s care and control.

g. When practical, completely demobilize staging area on the Airside of permanent fences and relocate to other staging areas on the Landside, non-secure side of Airport buildings and security fence.



h. When practical, remove equipment and materials to secured storage off-site, approved per other parts of these specifications.

i. Cover, secure, and anchor any equipment and materials in the non-secure staging area that cannot practically be relocated to secured storage off-site.

j. Secure the Work and Site as is most practicable, and in the best interests of the public, the Project, the Owner, and Contractor.

k. Provide the Airport Engineer with emergency contact information for key personnel.

l. Evacuate non-essential personnel to safer locations.

4. Contractor is fully responsible for the safety and security of the Project throughout Construction. In any special event, should the Contractor fail to remove forces, equipment, and materials under his control from the Owner property, or to secure the same and the Work to the satisfaction of the Airport Engineer, and in the opinion of the Airport Engineer those forces equipment, or materials shall be at risk of injury, damage or loss, or of causing injury, damage, or loss to the Owner or others; then the Owner may, or may not, choose to remove, relocate, or secure the Work by whatever means the Owner deems in the best interest of the Owner and the Project.

a. The Contractor agrees in a special event that he has abandoned any property not secured to the satisfaction of the Airport Engineer.

b. Should the Owner be required to secure items under the control of the Contractor, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for actual costs incurred in securing the Work, to include, but not limited to, labor, oversight, use of equipment, rental of equipment, cost of fuels, storage fees, material, utilities, and incidentals.

c. The Owner assumes no responsibility for damage or loss of Contractor property, equipment, materials or parts of the Work not secured by the Contractor, or necessitated to be secured or relocated in the interests of public safety or security.

D. Cleanliness of Site: Contractor shall be responsible for keeping aircraft operations areas, movement areas, ground service routes, work open to or visible from public areas, tenant operations areas, work areas used or accessed by others, haul route, and staging areas in an orderly and clean condition.

1. Areas on or adjacent to aircraft operations shall be kept clean and free of loose debris that may pose a hindrance to airport operations. Contractor shall police area on a regular basis, provide adequate containers for anticipated debris, and remove loose debris and containers to storage away from aircraft operations area and security fence on a more-than-daily basis. Further requirements are noted elsewhere in the contract documents, the drawings and project manual.

1.8 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public.

B. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner’s operations.



C. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.

3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.

1.9 COORDINATION WITH DAILY OPERATIONS

A. Occupied areas include all areas in which the Owner’s regular operations will be going on or to which the Owner requires access during the construction period, whether conducted by the Owner or his tenants, clientele, or the public.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Construction related activities, in general, shall proceed during

normal working hours, unless the work will interfere with operating procedures of the

Airport. When this interference occurs, the Contractor shall arrange his activities and work

schedule to be performed during non-operating hours of the area of the Airport affected. Some areas of the Airport are in operation for fewer hours each day than the overall operating hours, and the Contractor shall have the option of working those areas which are not in operation when the construction activities cause neither interference nor safety or security problems to the users of the Airport. Contractor may, upon approval of the Owner, choose to conduct construction activities during off hours. Owner requires that an authorized representative of Airport Operations be present on-Airport during Contractor Activities. Work in public areas, and work impacting airline or tenant operations areas, shall be coordinated with the Airport and respective tenants not less than thirty (30) days in advance of anticipated work in those areas.

1. Normal Operating Hours: The Airport is generally in operation between the hours of 6:00 am and 12:00 (midnight), seven days per week. Precise work hours shall be coordinated with Airport at Pre-Construction Conference, and may be adjusted, if needed, at monthly meetings thereafter.

a. Peak Passenger Activity Hours: Peak activity, based on recent historical records, generally occurs between 6:00 pm and 10:00 pm; times are subject to change, based on scheduled airport and airline activity. Contractor shall arrange activities to have minimal impact on the traveling public and airport and airline operations.



2. Off-Hours: Off hours are generally defined between as being between 12:00 (midnight) and 6:00 am in most areas.

a. Contractor shall limit and restrict Work during off-hours. Contractor shall coordinate with Airport not less than fifteen days in advance of performing any off-hours work, and shall be responsible for reimbursing the Owner for additional costs incurred to provide staff during non-normal hours.

b. The Contractor shall pay to the County, as reimbursement of costs incurred by the county, the sum of four-hundred dollars ($400.00) for each night, or portion thereof, of off-hour work the Contractor works.

3. Coordination with Aircraft Operations: Contractor shall coordinate his activities and work to minimize impacts to the traveling public, Airport, and airline operations. Activity at the Airport is traditionally seasonal, and more passengers are anticipated during the winter and spring.

a. A copy of a sample weekly flight schedule will be provided at the Pre-Construction conference for Contractor’s information only and is subject to change.

b. The Owner will coordinate with the Contractor at least monthly during regularly scheduled coordination meetings, regarding known airline flight schedule changes one month ahead.

C. Limit access through occupied areas to those days and times which the Airport Engineer approves.

D. The Contractor shall review the phasing plans and shall submit his plan for providing safe and secure passageway for users of the Airport during construction activities. Any access or egress routes which are required exits in accordance with applicable building codes shall be maintained at all times during the construction of any given area.

E. When the following must be modified, provide alternate facilities acceptable to the Airport Engineer:

1. Entrances which must remain open. 2. Doors and gates which are part of the Airport’s security (Secured Area) demarcation. 3. Utilities which must remain in operation. 4. Informational signage to direct the movement of passengers.

F. Scheduling: Contractor shall review and coordinate Construction Schedule with Owner.

1. Submit a comprehensive preliminary construction schedule for review at the Pre-Construction Conference. Refer to other sections of these general requirements for additional information.

2. Changes to the approved construction schedule will not be allowed unless approved by the Airport Engineer in writing. A construction schedule with project sequencing and coordination timetables for construction adjacent to or within aircraft operation areas must be approved before any work commences.



3. Changes to Security Operations: Notify Architect / Engineer in writing at least forty-five calendar days in advance of any proposed changes affecting the Secured Area, including any changes to the security fence, any gates or doors opening to the Secured Area, access control devices at doors and gates on the line of demarcation, modifications to staging areas in the Secured Area, modifications to Security Operations such as using a guard at a gate rather than existing access control. Proposed changes, including temporary changes, to the Airport Security Plan must be approved and filed with the authorizing agencies not less than thirty days prior to the change taking affect. Contractor shall be liable for any delays in prosecuting his work resulting from failure to provide sufficient notice.

4. Notify Architect / Engineer at least seven days in advance of any proposed changes to the construction schedule for approval.

5. Notify airport Owner and Architect at least ten calendar days in advance of mobilizing to the project staging area.

6. At times and days to be determined at the Pre-Construction Conference, monthly meetings shall be held involving the Contractor’s superintendent, the Architect and the Airport Engineer; weekly meetings may be held involving the construction superintendent and the Owner’s designate representative.

7. The Contractor shall be responsible for informing in writing the airport of the construction schedule for the approaching two weeks’ construction activity.

8. All subcontractors shall supply the above information to the general Contractor for inclusion in their report. Any storage of materials, access or egress problems, traffic flow or normal airport operations which are to be affected must be protected and/or agreed upon by the Airport Engineer. All costs shall be incurred by the Contractor.

1.10 UTILITIES

A. Utilities are located within the construction area. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and Architect to identify utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting utility owners and locating all existing utilities within the work area. Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with utility location, protection, and for required repairs due to failure to comply with these requirements.

B. Information concerning underground utilities and service lines may be obtained from the utility companies, Owner, FAA, or the national weather service. The Owner and the Architect do not guarantee their accuracy. The Contractor is advised to determine the exact locations from the available sources of information, or provide his own means of detection.

1. Agencies / utility companies with service on the airport are as follows:

a. Federal Aviation Administration b. National Weather Service c. Gas, Electric d. Domestic Water e. Sewer f. Cable Television g. Telephone Service

C. Contractor shall notify airport personnel, utility companies, FAA personnel, and weather bureau personnel before excavating in any area.



D. In all construction areas, all FAA cables will be marked by FAA prior to construction. Contractor is to protect cables during construction. Contractor shall notify FAA supervisor in advance of construction activity to allow the FAA sufficient time to locate and mark existing field cable and to avoid unscheduled facility outages. Any FAA equipment/cable that is damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired as approved by the FAA supervisor / representative. All cable splice/repairs shall meet FAA specifications and be accomplished to the satisfaction of the FAA representative. Qualified workmen regularly engaged in that type of work shall perform all cable work. If an existing cable cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the FAA, new cable of like kind shall be installed.

E. Maintain existing surface and pipe storm drainage, unless otherwise noted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BARRICADES

A. Barricades shall be constructed and installed as described in other sections of the specifications and as shown on the drawings, and in accordance with the current version of AC No. 150/5370 “Operational Safety on Airports During Construction” and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD).

B. Maintain barricades throughout construction.

1. Inspect barricades in place at least twice daily to ensure correct placement and functional flags and light.

2. Immediately correct any damage or disrepair, or replace barricade.

C. Furnish and maintain all barricades lights.

1. Supply all batteries and lamps for barricade lights necessary for Project.

D. Remove and relocate barricades as directed by the Engineer/Architect and/or the Airport Engineer during construction in accordance with referenced guidelines.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall have a general supervisor on the job at all times during construction activity.

B. The Owner will designate a representative who will issue all notices to airmen (NOTAMs) with the Federal Aviation Administration.

C. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner’s representative with the necessary information on construction conditions (apron closure, tie-ins to existing movement areas, etc.) so that the Airport can advise flight control to issue NOTAMs in accordance with established criteria.



D. The Contractor shall make reasonable effort to coordinate with separate Contractors working in the same area or adjacent areas. Specific overlap areas are noted elsewhere in the contract documents, the drawings and project manual.

3.2 CONTRACTOR OPERATIONS ON SITE

A. The Contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to create no hindrance, hazard, or obstacle to vehicular or aircraft traffic using the airport.

1. The Contractor shall control his operations and the operations of his subcontractors and all suppliers so as to provide for the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft in the aircraft operations areas of the airport. This area shall be accessible to the Contractor on a limited basis.

2. Aircraft always have right of way in operating areas. 3. The Contractor shall not enter or encroach upon an aircraft parking area or operational

taxiway without first obtaining permission from the Owner or FAA, as allowed under the Security Plan.

B. Damage to aircraft, ground equipment, or facilities resulting from hauling or storage of material or other activities in connection with the execution of the contract work, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor in as good or better condition as originally found.

C. All construction traffic shall enter and exit the project area through access points, as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Airport Operations representative. Access to the work: will be via the access routes shown on the plans or as directed by the Airport Engineer.

1. The Contractor shall identify access routes with suitable signs, barricades and similar equipment.

2. Contractor will be responsible for security of construction access gates in accordance with the Airport Security Plan.

3. Contractor to provide temporary gate and fencing at perimeter of project areas as needed, and is to be responsible for security, maintenance, and restoration of areas.

4. Gates to airfield operating areas (AOA) or security identification display areas (SIDA) must be locked at all times or manned at all times by badged employees of the Contractor.

D. Use of Contractor Vehicles on airport property:

1. Contractor’s vehicles used on the Airside portion of the premises must be clearly marked. 2. All vehicles operated on existing pavements to remain shall be rubber tired. 3. All vehicles of the Contractor’s forces shall be parked in designated areas only. 4. In the event the Contractor must service his equipment on airport property, all oil and

fluids removed from the equipment must be collected and disposed of in accordance with local, state and federal environmental laws. If a hazardous or regulated material is spilled, it must be cleaned up by the Contractor and promptly reported to the airport.

E. Haul Route: Existing roads used as part of the haul road shall be restored to their original condition after completion of the project, unless noted otherwise. The Contractor will be responsible for daily clean up operations of debris that may be on the haul road.



1. The existing airport pavements, access roads, and haul routes may not be capable of supporting certain types of construction equipment. Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall fully satisfy himself as to the ability of the existing airport pavements to satisfactorily sustain the type of equipment he plans to use. Contractor shall size the equipment used for construction accordingly. As part of the Work, the Contractor shall repair any damage caused by hauling or any other construction activity to existing pavement.

2. It is of specific importance that all aircraft operating areas be kept free of debris due to potential aircraft damage. The Contractor shall police the construction and adjacent site area regularly to assure that no debris creates an endangerment to aircraft. Contractor shall maintain these pavements clean throughout the project.

3. Except where designated on plans or as authorized by Architect or Airport Engineer, Contractor will not be allowed to use any of the existing runways, taxiways, or apron as part of the haul road.

4. The Contractor shall restore any project access route, staging area, waste area, stockpile area and all haul roads to the original condition, including topsoil and seeding, at job completion.

F. The Contractor’s staging area has been shown on the plans for information purposes only. The actual size and location will be determined at the Pre-Construction Conference.

1. All construction material and equipment shall be located and stored in the designated staging area(s) only.

2. The Contractor will be responsible for the daily cleanup and regular disposal of trash and debris created by his work or personnel. Trash and debris must be disposed of offsite.

3. The Contractor will be responsible for the storage and security of his material and equipment and shall erect storage facilities and fencing as necessary. The Contractor’s storage and staging area shall be in the general location(s) shown on drawing.

G. Contractor shall control dust at an acceptable level. The Contractor may be required to keep a water supply at the project site during heavy equipment usage areas.

H. Stockpiled material shall be constrained in a manner to prevent movement resulting from aircraft engine blast or wind.

3.3 COMMUNICATIONS AND CONTROLS

A. Contractor shall maintain communication with Airport Operations at all times during construction activity or access in the Aircraft Operations Area (AOA).

1. All access to or through Aircraft Movement Areas shall be by appropriate badged escorting individuals and shall be coordinated in advance with Airport Operations, Airport Engineer, and the Engineer/Architect. Vehicles in the Movement Areas shall maintain open communication with the Superintendent and Airport Operations.

2. Approaching, intruding upon, or crossing the taxiways and runways is strictly prohibited.

B. Contractor shall protect existing runway and taxiway lights, signs, and NAVAIDS.



1. Any unplanned, unapproved, or accidental shutdown or interruption of service to any lighting circuit or navigational aid requires immediate notification to the airport operations department and the Architect and shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. The cost of materials and labor required to repair the lighting circuit shall be borne by the Contractor.

C. Safety Devices and Barricades: Existing aprons, taxiways and runways outside the limits of construction shall be separated from construction areas with barricades as shown on the phasing plans and as directed by the Airport Engineer.

1. Place all barricades and temporary markings at locations as directed by the Airport Engineer and the Engineer/Architect. Exact locations will vary depending on aircraft operations, construction schedule and construction operations.

2. Mark and light all open trenches in accordance with FAA AC 150/5210, latest edition. 3. Contractors shall locate and maintain all airfield safety devices. Contractor should

provide for daily check of required lights and replacement of batteries to ensure correct operations.

D. When the Contract requires the maintenance of vehicular traffic on an existing road, street, or highway during the Contractor’s performance of work that is otherwise provided for in the contract, plans, and specifications, the Contractor shall keep such road, street, or highway open to all traffic and shall provide such maintenance as may be required to accommodate traffic. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, flagmen, and other traffic control devices in reasonable conformity with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control

Devices for streets and highways unless otherwise specified herein.

E. If the Contractor is given approval to work at night, he shall provide lights at the work site. Type, direction, number and location of lights shall be submitted not less than ten days in advance for review and approval by the Airport Engineer. Where lighting affects the aircraft apron, it shall be accomplished in a manner to create no hindrance to aircraft, aircraft operations, or the aircraft control tower. Upon notification of any conflict, contractor shall adjust lighting in the field as directed by the Airport Engineer or the Engineer/Architect.

F. Appropriately mark or light all equipment to be operated on the airside area in accordance with FAA AC 150/5210, latest edition. Maximum height of equipment shall be 35 feet depending on the location within Contractor’s work limits shown on safety and sequencing plans unless approved by the FAA, and Airport Engineer. Use of any equipment exceeding this height at any time, will only be during daylight VFR conditions.

G. All vehicles used on the airfield shall meet airport requirements for marking and lighting all equipment.

1. Vehicles shall be marked with rotating yellow beacons and 3 by 3 orange and white flags in accordance with FAA AC 150/5210, latest edition, in addition to company logos and markings identifying each piece of equipment.

a. Advisory Circular may be obtained from the FAA (www.faa.gov).



3.4 SECURITY GATES AND FENCING:

A. Responsibility for Security: The Contractor has the responsibility for maintaining control of the access gates or any other entrance to the AOA within the project work area.

1. The Contractor’s method of maintaining security shall be set forth in his Security Plan. Deviations or variations from the Contractor’s Security Plan must be approved by the Owner, in advance, in writing.

2. Any change, including temporary changes, in operation of existing gates or doors requires advance coordination with the Airport Engineer.

3. The Contractor shall maintain existing gates and access routes in current operation, unless specifically noted otherwise in other parts of the contract documents, drawings, and specifications; or as authorized in writing by the Airport Engineer.

4. The Contractor may utilize a gate guard or install an automatic operated gate controller with limited access with numeric keypad.


U.S. Department

of Transportation

Federal Aviation

Administration

Advisory Circular

Subject: OPERATIONAL SAFETY ON AIRPORTS DURING CONSTRUCTION

Date: 1/17/03

Initiated by: AAS-300

AC No: 150/5370-2E

Change:

1. THE PURPOSE OF THIS ADVISORY

CIRCULAR (AC).

Aviation safety is the primary consideration at airports, especially during construction. This AC sets forth guidelines for operational safety on airports during construction. It contains major changes to the following areas: “Runway Safety Area,” paragraph 3-2; “Taxiway Safety Areas/Object-Free Areas,” paragraph 3-3; “Overview,” paragraph 3-4; “Marking Guidelines for Temporary Threshold,” paragraph 3-5; and “Hazard Marking and Lighting,” paragraph 3-9.

2. WHAT THIS AC CANCELS.

This AC cancels AC 150/5370-2D, Operational Safety

on Airports During Construction, dated May 31, 2002.

3. READING MATERIAL RELATED TO THIS

AC.

Appendix 1 contains a list of reading materials on airport construction, design, and potential safety hazards during construction, as well as instructions for ordering these documents. Many of them, including this AC, are available on the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Web site.

4. WHO THIS AC AFFECTS.

This AC assists airport operators in complying with 14 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), part 139, Certification and Operation: Land Airports Serving Certain Air Carriers, and with the requirements of airport construction projects receiving funds under the Airport Improvement Program or from the Passenger Facility Charge Program. While the FAA does not require noncertificated airports without grant agreements to adhere to these guidelines, we recommend that they do so as it will help these airports maintain a desirable level of operational safety during construction.

5. ADDITIONAL BACKGROUND

INFORMATION.

Appendix 2 contains definitions of terms used in this AC. Appendix 3 provides airport operators with boilerplate format and language for developing a safety plan for an airport construction project. Appendix 4 is a sample Notice to Airmen form.

6. HAZARD LIGHTING IMPLEMENTATION

TIME LINE.

Supplemental hazard lighting must be red in color by October 1, 2004. See paragraph 3-9 for more information.

DAVID L. BENNETT

Director, Office of Airport Safety and Standards

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

iii

CONTENTS

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................. 1 1-1. Overview. .................................................................................................................................................................1 1-2. Who Is Responsible for Safety During Construction. ..............................................................................................1

CHAPTER 2. SAFETY PLANS ................................................................................................................................ 3

Section 1. Basic Safety Plan Considerations....................................................................................................... 3

2-1. Overview. .................................................................................................................................................................3 2-2. Safety Plan Checklist................................................................................................................................................3

Section 2. Safety and Security Measures............................................................................................................. 4

2-3. Overview. .................................................................................................................................................................4 2-4. Vehicle Operation and Marking and Pedestrian Control. .........................................................................................4 2-5. Construction Employee Parking Areas.....................................................................................................................5 2-6. Construction Vehicle Equipment Parking. ...............................................................................................................5 2-7. Radio Communication Training. ..............................................................................................................................5 2-8. Fencing and Gates. ...................................................................................................................................................5

Section 3. Notification of Construction Activities ................................................................................................ 5

2-9. General. ....................................................................................................................................................................5 2-10. Assuring Prompt Notifications. ................................................................................................................................6 2-11. Notices to Airmen (NOTAMs).................................................................................................................................6 2-12. Aircraft Rescue and Fire Fighting (ARFF) Notification...........................................................................................6 2-13. Notification to the FAA............................................................................................................................................6 2-14. Work Scheduling and Accomplishment. ..................................................................................................................6

CHAPTER 3. SAFETY STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES...................................................................................... 7

Section 1. Runway and Taxiway Safety Areas, Obstacle-Free Zones, and Object-Free Areas ...................... 7

3-1. Overview. .................................................................................................................................................................7 3-2. Runway Safety Area (RSA)/Obstacle-Free Zone (OFZ)..........................................................................................7 3-3. Taxiway Safety Areas/Object-Free Areas. ...............................................................................................................7

Section 2. Temporary Runway Thresholds .......................................................................................................... 8

3-4. Overview. .................................................................................................................................................................8 3-5. Marking Guidelines for Temporary Threshold.........................................................................................................8 3-6. Lighting Guidelines for Temporary Threshold.........................................................................................................9

Section 3. Other Construction Marking and Lighting Activities ...................................................................... 10

3-7. Overview. ...............................................................................................................................................................10 3-8. Closed Runway and Taxiway Marking and Lighting. ............................................................................................10 3-9. Hazard Marking and Lighting ................................................................................................................................10 3-10. Construction Near Navigational Aids (NAVAIDs). ...............................................................................................11 3-11. Construction Site Access and Haul Roads..............................................................................................................11 3-12. Construction Material Stockpiling..........................................................................................................................11 3-13. Other Limitations on Construction. ........................................................................................................................11 3-14. Foreign Object Debris (FOD) Management. ..........................................................................................................12

Section 4. Safety Hazards and Impacts .............................................................................................................. 12

3-15. Overview. ...............................................................................................................................................................12

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

iv

Appendices

APPENDIX 1. RELATED READING MATERIAL................................................................................................... A-1

APPENDIX 2. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THE AC .................................................................................. A-2

APPENDIX 3. AIRPORT CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLANNING GUIDE.............................................................. A-3

APPENDIX 4. SAMPLE NOTAM............................................................................................................................ A-7

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

1

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

1-1. OVERVIEW.

Hazardous practices and marginal conditions created by construction activities can decrease or jeopardize operational safety on airports. To minimize disruption of normal aircraft operations and to avoid situations that compromise the airport’s operational safety, the airport operator must carefully plan, schedule, and coordinate construction activities. While the guidance in this AC is primarily used for construction operations, some of the methods and procedures described may also enhance day-to-day maintenance operations.

1-2. WHO IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SAFETY

DURING CONSTRUCTION.

An airport operator has overall responsibility for construction activities on an airport. This includes the predesign, design, preconstruction, construction, and inspection phases. Additional information on these responsibilities can be found throughout this AC.

a. Airport operator’s responsibilities—

(1) Develop internally or approve a construction safety plan developed by an outside consultant/contractor that complies with the safety guidelines in Chapter 2, “Safety Plans,” and Appendix 3, “Airport Construction Safety Planning Guide,” of this AC.

(2) Require contractors to submit plans indicating how they intend to comply with the safety requirements of the project.

(3) Convene a meeting with the construction contractor, consultant, airport employees, and, if appropriate, tenant sponsor to review and discuss project safety before beginning construction activity.

(4) Ensure contact information is accurate for each representative/point of contact identified in the safety plan.

(5) Hold weekly or, if necessary, daily safety meetings to coordinate activities.

(6) Notify users, especially aircraft rescue and fire fighting (ARFF) personnel, of construction activity and conditions that may adversely affect the operational safety of the airport via Notices to Airmen (NOTAMs) or other methods, as appropriate. Convene a meeting for review and discussion if necessary.

(7) Ensure that construction personnel know of any applicable airport procedures and of changes to those procedures that may affect their work.

(8) Ensure that construction contractors and subcontractors undergo training required by the safety plan.

(9) Develop and/or coordinate a construction vehicle plan with airport tenants, the airport traffic control tower (ATCT), and construction contractors. Include the vehicle plan in the safety plan. See Chapter 2, section 2, of this AC for additional information.

(10) Ensure tenants and contractors comply with standards and procedures for vehicle lighting, marking, access, operation, and communication.

(11) At certificated airports, ensure that each tenant’s construction safety plan is consistent with 14 CFR part 139, Certification and Operations: Land Airports Serving Certain Air Carriers.

(12) Conduct frequent inspections to ensure construction contractors and tenants comply with the safety plan and that altered construction activities do not create potential safety hazards.

(13) Resolve safety deficiencies immediately.

(14) Ensure construction access complies with the security requirements of 49 CFR part 1542, Airport Security.

(15) Notify appropriate parties when conditions exist that invoke provisions of the safety plan (e.g., implementation of low-visibility operations).

b. Construction contractor’s responsibilities—

(1) Submit plans to the airport operator on how to comply with the safety requirements of the project.

(2) Have available a copy of the project safety plan.

(3) Comply with the safety plan associated with the construction project and ensure that construction personnel are familiar with safety procedures and regulations on the airport.

(4) Provide a point of contact who will coordinate an immediate response to correct any construction-related activity that may adversely affect the operational safety of the airport.

(5) Provide a safety officer/construction inspector familiar with airport safety to monitor construction activities.

(6) Restrict movement of construction vehicles to construction areas by flagging and barricading, erecting temporary fencing, or providing escorts, as appropriate.

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

2

(7) Ensure that no construction employees, employees of subcontractors or suppliers, or other persons enter any part of the air operations areas (AOAs) from the construction site unless authorized.

c. Tenant’s responsibilities if planning

construction activities on leased property—

(1) Develop a safety plan, and submit it to the airport operator for approval prior to issuance of a Notice to Proceed.

(2) Provide a point of contact who will coordinate an immediate response to correct any

construction-related activity that may adversely affect the operational safety of the airport.

(3) Ensure that no tenant or construction employees, employees of subcontractors or suppliers, or any other persons enter any part of the AOA from the construction site unless authorized.

(4) Restrict movement of construction vehicles to construction areas by flagging and barricading or erecting temporary fencing.

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

3

CHAPTER 2. SAFETY PLANS

Section 1. Basic Safety Plan Considerations

2-1. OVERVIEW.

Airport operators should coordinate safety issues with the air carriers, FAA Airway Facilities, and other airport tenants before the design phase of the project. The airport operator should identify project safety concerns, requirements, and impacts before making arrangements with contractors and other personnel to perform work on an airport. These safety concerns will serve as the foundation for the construction safety plan and help maintain a high level of aviation safety during the project.

The airport operator should determine the level of complexity of the safety plan that is necessary for each construction project and its phases. The safety plan may be detailed in the specifications included in the invitation for bids, or the invitation for bid may specify that the contractor develop the safety plan and the airport operator approve it. In the latter case, the invitation for bid should contain sufficient information to allow the contractor to develop and determine the costs associated with the safety plan. In either case, safety plan costs should be incorporated into the total cost of the project. The airport operator has final approval authority and responsibility for all safety plans.

Coordination will vary from formal predesign conferences to informal contacts throughout the duration of the construction project.

Details of a specified safety plan, or requirements for a contractor-developed safety plan, should be discussed at the predesign and preconstruction conferences and should include the following, as appropriate:

a. Actions necessary before starting construction, including defining and assigning responsibilities.

b. Basic responsibilities and procedures for disseminating instructions about airport procedures to the contractor’s personnel.

c. Means of separating construction areas from aeronautical-use areas.

d. Navigational aid (NAVAID) requirements and weather.

e. Marking and lighting plan illustrations.

f. Methods of coordinating significant changes in airport operations with all the appropriate parties.

2-2. SAFETY PLAN CHECKLIST.

To the extent applicable, the safety plan should address the following:

a. Scope of work to be performed, including proposed duration of work.

b. Runway and taxiway marking and lighting.

c. Procedures for protecting all runway and taxiway safety areas, obstacle-free zones (OFZs), object-free areas (OFAs), and threshold citing criteria outlined in AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design, and as described in this AC. This includes limitations on equipment height and stockpiled material.

d. Areas and operations affected by the construction activity, including possible safety problems.

e. NAVAIDs that could be affected, especially critical area boundaries.

f. Methods of separating vehicle and pedestrian construction traffic from the airport movement areas. This may include fencing off construction areas to keep equipment operators in restricted areas in which they are authorized to operate. Fencing, or some other form of restrictive barrier, is an operational necessity in some cases.

g. Procedures and equipment, such as barricades (identify type), to delineate closed construction areas from the airport operational areas, as necessary.

h. Limitations on construction.

i. Required compliance of contractor personnel with all airport safety and security measures.

j. Location of stockpiled construction materials, construction site parking, and access and haul roads.

k. Radio communications.

l. Vehicle identification.

m. Trenches and excavations and cover requirements.

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

4

n. Procedures for notifying ARFF personnel if water lines or fire hydrants must be deactivated or if emergency access routes must be rerouted or blocked.

o. Emergency notification procedures for medical and police response.

p. Use of temporary visual aids.

q. Wildlife management.

r. Foreign object debris (FOD) control provisions.

s. Hazardous materials (HAZMAT) management.

t. NOTAM issuance.

u. Inspection requirements.

v. Procedures for locating and protecting existing underground utilities, cables, wires, pipelines, and other underground facilities in excavation areas.

w. Procedures for contacting responsible representatives/points of contact for all involved parties. This should include off-duty contact information so an immediate response may be coordinated to correct any construction-related activity that could adversely affect the operational safety of the airport. Particular care should be taken to ensure that appropriate Airways Facilities personnel are identified in the event that an unanticipated utility outage or cable cut occurs that impacts FAA NAVAIDs.

x. Vehicle operator training.

y. Penalty provisions for noncompliance with airport rules and regulations and the safety plan (e.g., if a vehicle is involved in a runway incursion).

z. Any special conditions that affect the operation of the airport and will require a portion of the safety plan to be activated (e.g., low-visibility operations, snow removal).

Section 2. Safety and Security Measures

2-3. OVERVIEW.

Airport operators are responsible for closely monitoring tenant and construction contractor activity during the construction project to ensure continual compliance with all safety and security requirements. Airports subject to 49 CFR part 1542, Airport Security, must meet standards for access control, movement of ground vehicles, and identification of construction contractor and tenant personnel. In addition, airport operators should use safety program standards, as described in Chapter 3 of this AC, to develop specific safety measures to which tenants and construction contractors must adhere throughout the duration of construction activities.

General safety provisions are contained in AC 150/5370-10, Standards for Specifying Construction of

Airports, paragraphs 40-05, “Maintenance of Traffic”; 70-08, “Barricades, Warning Signs, and Hazard Markings”; and 80-04, “Limitation of Operations.” At any time during construction, aircraft operations, weather, security, or local airport rules may dictate more stringent safety measures. The airport operator should ensure that both general and specific safety requirements are coordinated with airport tenants and ATCT personnel. The airport operator should also include these parties in the coordination of all bid documents, construction plans, and specifications for on-airport construction projects.

2-4. VEHICLE OPERATION AND MARKING

AND PEDESTRIAN CONTROL.

Vehicle and pedestrian access routes for airport construction projects must be controlled to prevent inadvertent or unauthorized entry of persons, vehicles, or animals onto the AOA. This includes aircraft movement and nonmovement areas. The airport operator should develop and coordinate a construction vehicle plan with airport tenants, contractors, and the ATCT. The safety plan or invitation for bid should include specific vehicle and pedestrian requirements.

The vehicle plan should contain the following items:

a. Airport operator’s rules and regulations for vehicle marking, lighting, and operation.

b. Requirements for marking and identifying vehicles in accordance with AC 150/5210-5, Painting,

Marking, and Lighting of Vehicles Used on an Airport.

c. Description of proper vehicle operations on movement and nonmovement areas under normal, lost communications, and emergency conditions.

d. Penalties for noncompliance with driving rules and regulations.

e. Training requirements for vehicle drivers to ensure compliance with the airport operator’s vehicle rules and regulations.

f. Provisions for radio communication training for construction contractor personnel engaged in construction activities around aircraft movement areas. Some drivers,

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

5

such as construction drivers under escort, may not require this training.

g. Escort procedures for construction vehicles requiring access to aircraft movement areas. A vehicle in the movement area must have a working aviation-band, two-way radio unless it is under escort. Vehicles can be in closed areas without a radio if the closed area is properly marked and lighted to prevent incursions and a NOTAM regarding the closure is issued.

h. Monitoring procedures to ensure that vehicle drivers are in compliance with the construction vehicle plan.

i. Procedures for, if appropriate, personnel to control access through gates and fencing or across aircraft movement areas.

2-5. CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEE PARKING

AREAS.

Designate in advance vehicle parking areas for contractor employees to prevent any unauthorized entry of persons or vehicles onto the airport movement area. These areas should provide reasonable contractor employee access to the job site.

2-6. CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

PARKING.

Construction employees must park and service all construction vehicles in an area designated by the airport operator outside the runway safety areas and OFZs and never on a closed taxiway or runway. Employees should also park construction vehicles outside the OFA when not in use by construction personnel (e.g., overnight, on weekends, or during other periods when construction is not active). Parking areas must not obstruct the clear line of sight by the ATCT to any taxiways or runways under air traffic control nor obstruct any runway visual aids, signs, or navigational aids. The FAA must also study those areas to determine effects on 14 CFR part 77, Objects Affecting Navigable Airspace, surfaces (see paragraph 2-13 for further information).

2-7. RADIO COMMUNICATION TRAINING.

The airport operator must ensure that tenant and construction contractor personnel engaged in activities involving unescorted operation on aircraft movement

areas observe the proper procedures for communications, including using appropriate radio frequencies at airports with and without ATCTs. Training of contractors on proper communication procedures is essential for maintaining airport operational safety. When operating vehicles on or near open runways or taxiways, construction personnel must understand the critical importance of maintaining radio contact with airport operations, ATCT, or the Common Traffic Advisory Frequency, which may include UNICOM, MULTICOM, or one of the FAA Flight Service Stations (FSS), as directed by airport management.

Vehicular traffic crossing active movement areas must be controlled either by two-way radio with the ATCT, escort, flagman, signal light, or other means appropriate for the particular airport. Vehicle drivers must confirm by personal observation that no aircraft is approaching their position when given clearance to cross a runway. In addition, it is the responsibility of the escort vehicle driver to verify the movement/position of all escorted vehicles at any given time.

Even though radio communication is maintained, escort vehicle drivers must also familiarize themselves with ATCT light gun signals in the event of radio failure (see the FAA safety placard “Ground Vehicle Guide to Airport Signs and Markings”). This safety placard may be ordered through the Runway Safety Program Web site at http://www.faarsp.org or obtained from the Regional Airports Division Office.

2-8. FENCING AND GATES.

Airport operators and contractors must take care to maintain a high level of safety and security during construction when access points are created in the security fencing to permit the passage of construction vehicles or personnel. Temporary gates should be equipped so they can be securely closed and locked to prevent access by animals and people (especially minors). Procedures should be in place to ensure that only authorized persons and vehicles have access to the AOA and to prohibit “piggybacking” behind another person or vehicle. The Department of Transportation (DOT) document DOT/FAA/AR-00/52, Recommended Security Guidelines for Airport Planning and Construction, provides more specific information on fencing. A copy of this document can be obtained from the Airport Consultants Council, Airports Council International, or American Association of Airport Executives.

Section 3. Notification of Construction Activities

2-9. GENERAL.

In order to maintain the desired levels of operational safety on airports during construction activities, the safety

plan should contain the notification actions described below.

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

6

2-10. ENSURING PROMPT NOTIFICATIONS.

The airport operator should establish and follow procedures for the immediate notification of airport users and the FAA of any conditions adversely affecting the operational safety of an airport.

2-11. NOTICES TO AIRMEN (NOTAMS).

The airport operator must provide information on closed or hazardous conditions on airport movement areas to the FSS so it can issue a NOTAM. The airport operator must coordinate the issuance, maintenance, and cancellation of NOTAMs about airport conditions resulting from construction activities with tenants and the local air traffic facility (control tower, approach control, or air traffic control center. Refer to AC 150/5200-28, Notices to

Airmen (NOTAMs) for Airport Operators, and Appendix 4 in this AC for a sample NOTAM form. Only the FAA may issue or cancel NOTAMs on shutdown or irregular operation of FAA-owned facilities. Only the airport operator or an authorized representative may issue or cancel NOTAMs on airport conditions. (The airport owner/operator is the only entity that can close or open a runway.) The airport operator must file and maintain this list of authorized representatives with the FSS. Any person having reason to believe that a NOTAM is missing, incomplete, or inaccurate must notify the airport operator.

2-12. AIRCRAFT RESCUE AND FIRE

FIGHTING (ARFF) NOTIFICATION.

The safety plan must provide procedures for notifying ARFF personnel, mutual aid providers, and other emergency services if construction requires shutting off or otherwise disrupting any water line or fire hydrant on the airport or adjoining areas and if contractors work with hazardous material on the airfield. Notification procedures must also be developed for notifying ARFF and all other emergency personnel when the work performed will close or affect any emergency routes. Likewise, the procedures must address appropriate notifications when services are restored.

2-13. NOTIFICATION TO THE FAA.

For certain airport projects, 14 CFR part 77 requires notification to the FAA. In addition to applications made for Federally funded construction, 14 CFR part 157, Notice of Construction, Alteration, Activation, and

Deactivation of Airports, requires that the airport operator notify the FAA in writing whenever a non-Federally funded project involves the construction of a new airport; the construction, realigning, altering, activating, or abandoning of a runway, landing strip, or associated taxiway; or the deactivation or abandoning of an entire airport. Notification involves submitting FAA Form 7480-1, Notice of Landing Area Proposal, to the nearest FAA Regional Airports Division Office or Airports District Office.

Also, any person proposing any kind of construction or alteration of objects that affect navigable airspace, as defined in 14 CFR part 77 must notify the FAA. This includes construction equipment and proposed parking areas for this equipment (i.e., cranes, graders, etc.). FAA Form 7460-1, Notice of Proposed Construction or Alteration, can be used for this purpose and submitted to the FAA Regional Airports Division Office or Airports District Office. (See AC 70/7460-2, Proposed Construction or Alteration of Objects that May Affect the

Navigable Airspace.)

If construction operations require a shutdown of an airport owned NAVAID from service for more than 24 hours or in excess of 4 hours daily on consecutive days, we recommend a 45-day minimum notice prior to facility shutdown. Coordinate work for a FAA owned NAVAID shutdown with the local FAA Airways Facilities Office. In addition, procedures that address unanticipated utility outages and cable cuts that could impact FAA NAVAIDs must be addressed.

2-14. WORK SCHEDULING AND

ACCOMPLISHMENT.

Airport operators—or tenants having construction on their leased properties—should use predesign, prebid, and preconstruction conferences to introduce the subject of airport operational safety during construction (see AC 150/5300-9, Predesign, Prebid, and Preconstruction

Conferences for Airport Grant Projects). The airport operator, tenants, and construction contractors should integrate operational safety requirements into their planning and work schedules as early as practical. Operational safety should be a standing agenda item for discussion during progress meetings throughout the project. The contractor and airport operator should carry out onsite inspections throughout the project and immediately remedy any deficiencies, whether caused by negligence, oversight, or project scope change.

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

7

CHAPTER 3. SAFETY STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES

Section 1. Runway and Taxiway Safety Areas, Obstacle-Free Zones, and Object-Free Areas

3-1. OVERVIEW.

Airport operators must use these safety guidelines when preparing plans and specifications for construction activities in areas that may interfere with aircraft operations. The safety plan should recognize and address these standards for each airport construction project. However, the safety plan must reflect the specific needs of a particular project, and for this reason, these safety guidelines should not be incorporated verbatim into project specifications. For additional guidance on meeting safety and security requirements, refer to the planning guide template included in Appendix 3 of this AC.

3-2. RUNWAY SAFETY AREA (RSA)/

OBSTACLE-FREE ZONE (OFZ).

A runway safety area is the defined surface surrounding the runway prepared or suitable for reducing the risk of damage to airplanes in the event of an undershoot, overshoot, or excursion from the runway (see AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design). Construction activities within the standard RSA are subject to the following conditions:

a. Runway edges.

(1) No construction may occur closer than 200 feet (60m) from the runway centerline unless the runway is closed or restricted to aircraft operations, requiring an RSA that is equal to the RSA width available during construction, or 400 feet, whichever is less (see AC 150/5300-13, Tables 3-1 through 3-3).

(2) Personnel, material, and/or equipment must not penetrate the OFZ, as defined in AC 150/5300-13.

(3) The airport operator must coordinate the construction activity in the RSA as permitted above with the ATCT and the FAA Regional Airports Division Office or appropriate Airports District Office and issue a local NOTAM.

b. Runway ends.

(1) An RSA must be maintained of such dimensions that it extends beyond the end of the runway a distance equal to that which existed before construction activity, unless the runway is closed or restricted to aircraft operations for which the reduced RSA is adequate (see AC 150/5300-13). The temporary use of declared distances and/or partial runway closures may help provide the necessary RSA.

In addition, all personnel, materials, and/or equipment must remain clear of the applicable threshold siting surfaces, as defined in Appendix 2, “Threshold Siting Requirements,” of AC 150/5300-13.1 Consult with the appropriate FAA Regional Airports Division Office or Airports District Office to determine the appropriate approach surface required.

(2) Personnel, material, and/or equipment must not penetrate the OFZ, as defined in AC 150/5300-13.

(3) The safety plan must provide procedures for ensuring adequate distance for blast protection, if required by operational considerations.

(4) The airport operator must coordinate construction activity in this portion of the RSA with the ATCT and the FAA Regional Airports Division Office or appropriate Airports District Office and issue a local NOTAM.

c. Excavations.

(1) Construction contractors must prominently mark open trenches and excavations at the construction site with red or orange flags, as approved by the airport operator, and light them with red lights during hours of restricted visibility or darkness.

(2) Open trenches or excavations are not permitted within 200 feet (60m) of the runway centerline and at least the existing RSA distance from the runway threshold while the runway is open. If the runway must be opened before excavations are backfilled, cover the excavations appropriately. Coverings for open trenches or excavations must be of sufficient strength to support the weight of the heaviest aircraft operating on the runway.

3-3. TAXIWAY SAFETY AREAS/OBJECT-

FREE AREAS.

a. Unrestricted construction activity is permissible adjacent to taxiways when the taxiway is restricted to aircraft such that the available taxiway safety area is equal

1If a full safety area cannot be obtained through declared distances and partial closures, or other methods such as alternate runway use, construction activity may operate in the RSA as long as conditions cited in paragraph 3-1b(2) thru (4) are met. In addition, various surfaces outlined in AC 150/5300-13 and Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) must be protected through an aeronautical study.

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

8

to at least ½ of the widest wingspan of the aircraft expected to use the taxiway and the available taxiway object-free area is equal to at least .7 times the widest wingspan plus 10 feet. (See AC 150/5300-13 for guidance on taxiway safety and object-free areas.)

Construction activity may be accomplished closer to a taxiway, subject to the following restrictions:

(1) The activity is first coordinated with the airport operator.

(2) Appropriate NOTAMs are issued.

(3) Marking and lighting meeting the provisions of paragraph 3-9 are implemented.

(4) Adequate clearance is maintained between equipment and materials and any part of an aircraft. If such clearance can only be maintained if an aircraft does not have full use of the entire taxiway width (with its

main landing gear at the edge of the pavement), then it will be necessary to move personnel and equipment for each passing aircraft. In these situations, flag persons will be used to direct construction equipment, and wing walkers may be necessary to guide aircraft. Wing walkers should be airline/aviation personnel rather than construction workers.

b. Construction contractors must prominently mark open trenches and excavations at the construction site, as approved by the airport operator, and light them with red lights during hours of restricted visibility or darkness

c. Excavations and open trenches may be permitted up to the edge of a structural taxiway and apron pavement provided the dropoff is marked and lighted per paragraph 3-9, “Hazard Marking and Lighting.”

Section 2. Temporary Runway Thresholds

3-4. OVERVIEW.

Construction activity in a runway approach area may result in the need to partially close a runway or displace the existing runway threshold. In either case, locate the threshold in accordance with Appendix 2 of AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design. Objects that do not penetrate these surfaces may still be obstructions to air navigation and may affect standard instrument approach procedures. Coordinate these objects with the FAA’s Regional Airports Office or appropriate Airports District Office, as necessary. Refer to the current edition of AC 150/5300-13 for guidance on threshold siting requirements. The partial runway closure, the displacement of the runway threshold, as well as closures of the complete runway and other portions of the movement area also requires coordination with appropriate ATCT personnel and airport users.

Caution regarding partial runway closures: When filing a NOTAM for a partial runway closure, clearly state to FSS personnel that the portion of pavement located prior to the threshold is not available for landing and departing traffic. In this case, the threshold has been moved for both landing and takeoff purposes (this is different than a displaced threshold).

Example NOTAM: “North 1,000 feet of Runway 18/36 is closed; 7,000 feet remain available on Runway 18 and Runway 36 for arrivals and departures.” There may be situations where the portion of closed runway is available for taxiing only. If so, the NOTAM must reflect this condition.

Caution regarding displaced thresholds: Implementation of a displaced threshold affects runway length available for aircraft landing over the displacement. Depending on the reason for the displacement (to provide obstruction clearance or RSA),

such a displacement may also require an adjustment in the landing distance available and accelerate-stop distance available in the opposite direction. If project scope includes personnel, equipment, excavation, etc. within the RSA of any usable runway end, we do not recommend a displaced threshold unless arrivals and departures toward the construction activity are prohibited. Instead, implement a partial closure.

3-5. MARKING GUIDELINES FOR

TEMPORARY THRESHOLD.

Ensure that markings for temporary displaced thresholds are clearly visible to pilots approaching the airport to land. When construction personnel and equipment are located close to any threshold, a temporary visual NAVAID, such as runway end identifier lights (REIL), may be required (even on unlighted runways) to define the new beginning of the runway clearly. A visual vertical guidance device, such as a visual approach slope indicator (VASI), pulse light approach slope indicator (PLASI), or precision approach path indicator (PAPI), may be necessary to assure landing clearance over personnel, vehicles, equipment, and/or above-grade stockpiled materials. If such devices are installed, ensure an appropriate descriptive NOTAM is issued to inform pilots of these conditions. The current edition of AC 150/5340-1, Standards for Airport Markings, describes standard marking colors and layouts. In addition, we recommend that a temporary runway threshold be marked using the following guidelines:

a. Airport markings must be clearly visible to pilots; not misleading, confusing, or deceptive; secured in place to prevent movement by prop wash, jet blast, wing vortices, or other wind currents; and constructed of

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

9

materials that would minimize damage to an aircraft in the event of inadvertent contact.

(1) Pavement markings for temporary closed portions of the runway should consist of yellow chevrons to identify pavement areas that are unsuitable for takeoff/landing (see AC 150/5340-1). If unable to paint the markings on the pavement, construct them from any of the following materials: double-layered painted snow fence, colored plastic, painted sheets of plywood, or similar materials. They must be properly configured and secured to prevent movement by prop wash, jet blast, or other wind currents.

(2) It may be necessary to remove or cover runway markings, such as runway designation markings and aiming point markings, depending on the length of construction and type of activity at the airport.

(3) When threshold markings are needed to identify the temporary beginning of the runway that is available for landing, use a white threshold bar of the dimensions specified in AC 150/5340-1.

(4) If temporary outboard elevated or flush threshold bars are used, locate them outside of the runway pavement surface, one on each side of the runway. They should be at least 10 feet (3m) in width and extend outboard from each side of the runway so they are clearly visible to landing and departing aircraft. These threshold bars are white. If the white threshold bars are not discernable on grass or snow, apply a black background with appropriate material over the ground to ensure the markings are clearly visible.

(5) A temporary threshold may also be marked with the use of retroreflective, elevated markers. One side of such markers is green to denote the approach end of the runway; the side that is seen by pilots on rollout is red. See AC 150/5345-39, FAA Specification L-

853, Runway and Taxiway Retroreflective Markers.

(6) At 14 CFR part 139 certificated airports, temporary elevated threshold markers must be mounted with a frangible fitting (see 14 CFR part 139.309). However, at noncertificated airports, the temporary elevated threshold markings may either be mounted with a frangible fitting or be flexible. See AC 150/5345-39.

b. The application rate of the paint to mark a short-term temporary runway threshold may deviate from the standard (see Item P-620, “Runway and Taxiway Painting,” in AC 150/5370-10, Standards for Specifying

Construction of Airports), but the dimensions must meet the existing standards, unless coordinated with the appropriate offices.

c. When a runway is partially closed, the distance remaining signs for aircraft landing in the opposite direction should be covered or removed during the construction.

3-6. LIGHTING GUIDELINES FOR

TEMPORARY THRESHOLD.

A temporary runway threshold must be lighted if the runway is lighted and it is the intended threshold for night landings or instrument meteorological conditions. We recommend that temporary threshold lights and related visual NAVAIDs be installed outboard of the edges of the full-strength pavement with bases at grade level or as low as possible, but not to exceed 3 inches (7.6cm) above ground. When any portion of a base is above grade, place properly compacted fill around the base to minimize the rate of gradient change so aircraft can, in an emergency, cross at normal landing or takeoff speeds without incurring significant damage (see AC 150/5370-10). We recommend that the following be observed when using temporary runway threshold lighting:

a. Maintain threshold and edge lighting color and spacing standards as described in AC 150/5340-24, Runway and Taxiway Edge Lighting System. Battery-powered, solar, or portable lights that meet the criteria in AC 150/5345-50, Specification for Portable

Runway Lights, may be used. These systems are intended primarily for visual flight rules (VFR) aircraft operation but may be used for instrument flight rules (IFR) aircraft operations, upon individual approval from the Flight Standards Division of the applicable FAA Regional Office.

b. When the runway has been partially closed, disconnect edge and threshold lights with associated isolation transformers on that part of the runway at and behind the threshold (i.e., the portion of the runway that is closed). Alternately, cover the light fixture in such a way as to prevent light leakage. Avoid removing the lamp from energized fixtures because an excessive number of isolation transformers with open secondaries may damage the regulators and/or increase the current above its normal value.

c. Secure, identify, and place any temporary exposed wiring in conduit to prevent electrocution and fire ignition sources.

d. Reconfigure yellow lenses (caution zone), as necessary. If the runway has centerline lights, reconfigure the red lenses, as necessary, or place the centerline lights out of service.

e. Relocate the visual glide slope indicator (VGSI), such as VASI and PAPI; other airport lights, such as REIL; and approach lights to identify the temporary threshold. Another option is to disable the VGSI or any equipment that would give misleading indications to pilots as to the new threshold location. Installation of temporary visual aids may be necessary to provide adequate guidance to pilots on approach to the affected runway. If the FAA owns and operates the VGSI,

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

10

coordinate its installation or disabling with the local Airway Facilities Systems Management Office.

f. Issue a NOTAM to inform pilots of temporary lighting conditions.

Section 3. Other Construction Marking and Lighting Activities

3-7. OVERVIEW.

Ensure that construction areas, including closed runways, are clearly and visibly separated from movement areas and that hazards, facilities, cables, and power lines are identified prominently for construction contractors. Throughout the duration of the construction project, verify that these areas remain clearly marked and visible at all times and that marking and lighting aids remain in place and operational. Routine inspections must be made of temporary construction lighting, especially battery-powered lighting since weather conditions can limit battery life.

3-8. CLOSED RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY

MARKING AND LIGHTING.

Closed runway markings consist of a yellow “X” in compliance with the standards of AC 150/5340-1, Standards for Airport Markings. A very effective and preferable visual aid to depict temporary closure is the lighted “X” signal placed on or near the runway designation numbers. This device is much more discernible to approaching aircraft than the other materials described. If the lighted “X” is not available, construct the marking of any of the following materials: double-layered painted snow fence, colored plastic, painted sheets of plywood, or similar materials. They must be properly configured and secured to prevent movement by prop wash, jet blast, or other wind currents. In addition, the airport operator may install barricades, traffic cones, activate stop bars, or other acceptable visual devices at major entrances to the runways to prevent aircraft from entering a closed portion of runway. The placement of even a single reflective barricade with a “do not enter” sign on a taxiway centerline can prevent an aircraft from continuing onto a closed runway. If the taxiway must remain open for aircraft crossings, barricades or markings, as described above or in paragraph 3-9, should be placed on the runway.

a. Permanently closed runways.

For runways and taxiways that have been permanently closed, disconnect the lighting circuits. For runways, obliterate the threshold marking, runway designation marking, and touchdown zone markings, and place “X’s” at each end and at 1,000-foot (300-m) intervals. For taxiways, place an “X” at the entrance of the closed taxiway.

b. Temporarily closed runway and taxiways.

For runways that have been temporarily closed, place an “X” at the each end of the runway. With taxiways, place an “X” at the entrance of the closed taxiway.

c. Temporarily closed airport.

When the airport is closed temporarily, mark the runways as closed and turn off the airport beacon.

d. Permanently closed airports

When the airport is closed permanently, mark the runways as permanently closed, disconnect the airport beacon, and place an “X” in the segmented circle or at a central location if no segmented circle exists.

3-9. HAZARD MARKING AND LIGHTING.

Provide prominent, comprehensible warning indicators for any area affected by construction that is normally accessible to aircraft, personnel, or vehicles. Using appropriate hazard marking and lighting may prevent damage, injury, traffic delays, and/or facility closures. Hazard marking and lighting must restrict access and make specific hazards obvious to pilots, vehicle drivers, and other personnel. Barricades, traffic cones (weighted or sturdily attached to the surface), or flashers are acceptable methods used to identify and define the limits of construction and hazardous areas on airports.

Provide temporary hazard marking and lighting to prevent aircraft from taxiing onto a closed runway for takeoff and to identify open manholes, small areas under repair, stockpiled material, and waste areas. Also consider less obvious construction-related hazards and include markings to identify FAA, airport, and National Weather Service facilities cables and power lines; instrument landing system (ILS) critical areas; airport surfaces, such as RSA, OFA, and OFZ; and other sensitive areas to make it easier for contractor personnel to avoid these areas.

The construction specifications must include a provision requiring the contractor to have a person on call 24 hours a day for emergency maintenance of airport hazard lighting and barricades. The contractor must file the contact person’s information with the airport.

a. Nonmovement areas.

Indicate construction locations on nonmovement areas in which no part of an aircraft may enter by using barricades that are marked with diagonal, alternating orange and white stripes. Barricades may be supplemented with alternating

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

11

orange and white flags at least 20 by 20 inches (50 by 50 cm) square and made and installed so they are always in an extended position, properly oriented, and securely fastened to eliminate jet engine ingestion. Such barricades may be many different shapes and made from various materials, including railroad ties, sawhorses, jersey barriers, or barrels. During reduced visibility or night hours, supplement the barricades with red lights, either flashing or steady-burning, which should meet the luminance requirements of the State Highway Department (yellow lights are not acceptable after October 1, 2004). The intensity of the lights and spacing for barricade flags and lights must adequately and without ambiguity delineate the hazardous area.

b. Movement areas.

Use orange traffic cones; red lights, either flashing or steady-burning, which should meet the luminance requirements of the State Highway Department (yellow lights are not acceptable after October 1, 2004); collapsible barricades marked with diagonal, alternating orange and white stripes; and/or signs to separate all construction/maintenance areas from the movement area. All barricades, temporary markers, and other objects placed and left in safety areas associated with any open runway, taxiway, or taxilane must be as low as possible to the ground; of low mass; easily collapsible upon contact with an aircraft or any of its components; and weighted or sturdily attached to the surface to prevent displacement from prop wash, jet blast, wing vortex, or other surface wind currents. If affixed to the surface, they must be frangible at grade level or as low as possible, but not to exceed 3 inches (7.6cm) above the ground. Do not use nonfrangible hazard markings, such as concrete barriers and/or metal-drum-type barricades, in aircraft movement areas. Do not use railroad ties on runways.

Use highly reflective barriers with flashing or steady-burning red lights to barricade taxiways leading to closed runways. Evaluate all operating factors when determining how to mark temporary closures that can last from 10 to 15 minutes to a much longer period of time. However, we strongly recommend that, even for closures of relatively short duration, major taxiway/runway intersections be identified with barricades spaced no greater than 20 feet (6m) apart. Mark the barricades with a flashing or steady-burning red light. At a minimum, use a single barricade placed on the taxiway centerline.

3-10. CONSTRUCTION NEAR NAVIGATIONAL

AIDS (NAVAIDS).

Construction activities, materials/equipment storage, and vehicle parking near electronic NAVAIDs require special consideration since they may interfere with signals essential to air navigation. Evaluate the effect of construction activity and the required distance and direction from the NAVAID for each construction project. Pay particular attention to stockpiling material, as well as

to movement and parking of equipment that may interfere with line of sight from the ATCT or with electronic emissions. Interference from construction may require NAVAID shutdown or adjustment of instrument approach minimums for IFR. This condition requires that a NOTAM be filed. Construction activities and materials/equipment storage near a NAVAID may also obstruct access to the equipment and instruments for maintenance. Before commencing construction activity, parking vehicles, or storing construction equipment and materials near a NAVAID, consult with the nearest FAA Airway Facilities Office.

3-11. CONSTRUCTION SITE ACCESS AND

HAUL ROADS.

Determine the construction contractor’s access to the construction sites and haul roads. Do not permit the construction contractor to use any access or haul roads other than those approved. Construction contractors must submit specific proposed routes associated with construction activities to the airport operator for evaluation and approval as part of the safety plan before beginning construction activities. These proposed routes must also provide specifications to prevent inadvertent entry to movement areas. Pay special attention to ensure that ARFF right of way on access and haul roads is not impeded at any time and that construction traffic on haul roads does not interfere with NAVAIDs or approach surfaces of operational runways.

3-12. CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL

STOCKPILING.

Stockpiled materials and equipment storage are not permitted within the RSA and OFZ of an operational runway. The airport operator must ensure that stockpiled materials and equipment adjacent to these areas are prominently marked and lighted during hours of restricted visibility or darkness. This includes determining and verifying that materials are stored at an approved location to prevent foreign object damage and attraction of wildlife.

3-13. OTHER LIMITATIONS ON

CONSTRUCTION.

Contractors may not use open-flame welding or torches unless adequate fire safety precautions are provided and the airport operator has approved their use. Under no circumstances should flare pots be used within the AOA at any time. The use of electrical blasting caps must not be permitted on or within 1,000 feet (300m) of the airport property (see AC 150/5370-10, Standards for Specifying Construction of Airports).

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

12

3-14. FOREIGN OBJECT DEBRIS (FOD)

MANAGEMENT.

Waste and loose materials, commonly referred to as FOD, are capable of causing damage to aircraft landing gears, propellers, and jet engines. Construction contractors must

not leave or place FOD on or near active aircraft movement areas. Materials tracked onto these areas must be continuously removed during the construction project. We also recommend that airport operators and construction contractors carefully control and continuously remove waste or loose materials that might attract wildlife.

Section 4. Safety Hazards and Impacts

3-15. OVERVIEW.

The situations identified below are potentially hazardous conditions that may occur during airport construction projects. Safety area encroachments, unauthorized and improper ground vehicle operations, and unmarked or uncovered holes and trenches near aircraft operating surfaces pose the most prevalent threats to airport operational safety during airport construction projects. Airport operators and contractors should consider the following when performing inspections of construction activity:

a. Excavation adjacent to runways, taxiways, and aprons.

b. Mounds of earth, construction materials, temporary structures, and other obstacles near any open runway, taxiway, or taxilane; in the related object-free area and aircraft approach or departure areas/zones; or obstructing any sign or marking.

c. Runway resurfacing projects resulting in lips exceeding 3 inches (7.6cm) from pavement edges and ends.

d. Heavy equipment (stationary or mobile) operating or idle near AOAs, in runway approaches and departures areas, or in OFZs.

e. Equipment or material near NAVAIDs that may degrade or impair radiated signals and/or the monitoring of navigational and visual aids. Unauthorized or improper vehicle operations in localizer or glide slope critical areas, resulting in electronic interference and/or facility shutdown.

f. Tall and especially relatively low-visibility units (i.e., equipment with slim profiles)—cranes, drills, and similar objects—located in critical areas, such as OFZs and approach zones.

g. Improperly positioned or malfunctioning lights or unlighted airport hazards, such as holes or excavations, on any apron, open taxiway, or open taxilane or in a related safety, approach, or departure area.

h. Obstacles, loose pavement, trash, and other debris on or near AOAs. Construction debris (gravel,

sand, mud, paving materials, etc.) on airport pavements may result in aircraft propeller, turbine engine, or tire damage. Also, loose materials may blow about, potentially causing personal injury or equipment damage.

i. Inappropriate or poorly maintained fencing during construction intended to deter human and animal intrusions into the AOA. Fencing and other markings that are inadequate to separate construction areas from open AOAs create aviation hazards.

j. Improper or inadequate marking or lighting of runways (especially thresholds that have been displaced or runways that have been closed) and taxiways that could cause pilot confusion and provide a potential for a runway incursion. Inadequate or improper methods of marking, barricading, and lighting of temporarily closed portions of AOAs create aviation hazards.

k. Wildlife attractants—such as trash (food scraps not collected from construction personnel activity), grass seeds, or ponded water—on or near airports.

l. Obliterated or faded markings on active operational areas.

m. Misleading or malfunctioning obstruction lights. Unlighted or unmarked obstructions in the approach to any open runway pose aviation hazards.

n. Failure to issue, update, or cancel NOTAMs about airport or runway closures or other construction-related airport conditions.

o. Failure to mark and identify utilities or power cables. Damage to utilities and power cables during construction activity can result in the loss of runway/taxiway lighting; loss of navigational, visual, or approach aids; disruption of weather reporting services; and/or loss of communications.

p. Restrictions on ARFF access from fire stations to the runway-taxiway system or airport buildings.

q. Lack of radio communications with construction vehicles in airport movement areas.

r. Objects, regardless of whether they are marked or flagged, or activities anywhere on or near an airport

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

13

that could be distracting, confusing, or alarming to pilots during aircraft operations.

s. Water, snow, dirt, debris, or other contaminants that temporarily obscure or derogate the visibility of runway/taxiway marking, lighting, and pavement edges. Any condition or factor that obscures or diminishes the visibility of areas under construction.

t. Spillage from vehicles (gasoline, diesel fuel, oil, etc.) on active pavement areas, such as runways, taxiways, ramps, and airport roadways.

u. Failure to maintain drainage system integrity during construction (e.g., no temporary drainage provided when working on a drainage system).

v. Failure to provide for proper electrical lockout and tagging procedures. At larger airports with multiple maintenance shifts/workers, construction contractors should make provisions for coordinating work on circuits.

w. Failure to control dust. Consider limiting the amount of area from which the contractor is allowed to strip turf.

x. Exposed wiring that creates an electrocution or fire ignition hazard. Identify and secure wiring, and place it in conduit or bury it.

y. Site burning, which can cause possible obscuration.

z. Construction work taking place outside of designated work areas and out of phase.

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

A-1

APPENDIX 1. RELATED READING MATERIAL

1. Obtain the latest version of the following free publications from the FAA on its Web site at http://www.faa.gov/arp/. In addition, these ACs are available by contacting the U.S. Department of Transportation, Subsequent Distribution Office, SVC-121.23, Ardmore East Business Center, 3341 Q 75th Avenue, Landover, MD 20785.

a. AC 150/5200-28, Notices to Airmen (NOTAM)

for Airport Operators. Provides guidance for the use of the NOTAM System in airport reporting.

b. AC 150/5200-30, Airport Winter Safety and

Operations. Provides guidance to airport owners/operators on the development of an acceptable airport snow and ice control program and on appropriate field condition reporting procedures.

c. AC 150/5200-33, Hazardous Wildlife Attractants

On or Near Airports. Provides guidance on locating certain land uses having the potential to attract hazardous wildlife to public-use airports.

d. AC 150/5210-5, Painting, Marking, and Lighting of Vehicles Used on an Airport. Provides guidance, specifications, and standards for painting, marking, and lighting vehicles operating in the airport air operations areas.

e. AC 150/5220-4, Water Supply Systems for

Aircraft Fire and Rescue Protection. Provides guidance for the selection of a water source and standards for the design of a distribution system to support aircraft rescue and fire fighting service operations on airports.

f. AC 150/5340-1, Standards for Airport Markings. Contains FAA standards for markings used on airport runways, taxiways, and aprons.

g. AC 150/5340-14B, Economy Approach Lighting

Aids. Describes standards for the design, selection, siting, and maintenance of economy approach lighting aids.

h. AC 150/5340-18, Standards for Airport Sign

Systems. Contains FAA standards for the siting and installation of signs on airport runways and taxiways.

i. AC 150/5345-28, Precision Approach Path

Indicator (PAPI) Systems. Contains the FAA standards for PAPI systems, which provide pilots with visual glide slope guidance during approach for landing.

j. AC 150/5380-5, Debris Hazards at Civil

Airports. Discusses problems at airports, gives information on foreign objects, and explains how to eliminate such objects from operational areas.

k. AC 70/7460-2, Proposed Construction or Alteration of Objects that May Affect the Navigable

Airspace. Provides information to persons proposing to erect or alter an object that may affect navigable airspace and explains the need to notify the FAA before construction begins and the FAA’s response to those notices, as required by 14 CFR part 77.

2. Obtain copies of the following publications from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Send a check or money order made payable to the Superintendent of Documents in the amount stated with your request. The Government Printing Office does not accept C.O.D. orders. In addition, the FAA makes these ACs available at no charge on the Web site at http://www.faa.gov/arp/.

a. AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design. Contains FAA standards and recommendations for airport design, establishes approach visibility minimums as an airport design parameter, and contains the object-free area and the obstacle free-zone criteria. ($26. Supt. Docs.) SN050-007-01208-0.

b. AC 150/5370-10, Standards for Specifying

Construction of Airports. Provides standards for construction of airports. Items covered include earthwork, drainage, paving, turfing, lighting, and incidental construction. ($18. Supt. Docs.) SN050-007-0821-0.

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

A-2

APPENDIX 2. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THE AC

1. AIR OPERATIONS AREA (AOA). Any area of the airport used or intended to be used for the landing, takeoff, or surface maneuvering of aircraft. An air operations area includes such paved or unpaved areas that are used or intended to be used for the unobstructed movement of aircraft in addition to its associated runways, taxiways, or aprons.

2. CONSTRUCTION. The presence and movement of construction-related personnel, equipment, and materials in any location that could infringe upon the movement of aircraft.

3. CERTIFICATED AIRPORT. An airport that has been issued an Airport Operating Certificate by the FAA under the authority of 14 CFR part 139, Certification and Operation: Land Airports Serving Certain Air Carriers, or its subsequent revisions.

4. FAA FORM 7460-1, NOTICE OF PROPOSED

CONSTRUCTION OR ALTERATION. The form submitted to the FAA Regional Air Traffic or Airports Division Office as formal written notification of any kind of construction or alteration of objects that affect navigable airspace, as defined in 14 CFR part 77, Objects Affecting Navigable Airspace (see AC 70/7460-2, Proposed Construction or Alteration of Objects that May

Affect the Navigable Airspace, found at http://www.faa.gov/arp/).

5. FAA FORM 7480-1, NOTICE OF LANDING

AREA PROPOSAL. Form submitted to the FAA Airports Regional Division Office or Airports District Office as formal written notification whenever a project without an airport layout plan on file with the FAA involves the construction of a new airport; the construction, realigning, altering, activating, or abandoning of a runway, landing strip, or associated taxiway; or the deactivation or abandoning of an entire airport (found at http://www.faa.gov/arp/).

6. MOVEMENT AREA. The runways, taxiways, and other areas of an airport that are used for taxiing or hover taxiing, air taxiing, takeoff, and landing of aircraft, exclusive of loading ramps and aircraft parking areas (reference 14 CFR part 139).

7. OBSTRUCTION. Any object/obstacle exceeding the obstruction standards specified by 14 CFR part 77, subpart C.

8. OBJECT-FREE AREA (OFA). An area on the ground centered on the runway, taxiway, or taxilane centerline provided to enhance safety of aircraft operations by having the area free of objects except for those objects that need to be located in the OFA for air navigation or aircraft ground maneuvering purposes (see AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design, for additional guidance on OFA standards and wingtip clearance criteria).

9. OBSTACLE-FREE ZONE (OFZ). The airspace below 150 feet (45m) above the established airport elevation and along the runway and extended runway centerline that is required to be clear of all objects, except for frangible visual NAVAIDs that need to be located in the OFZ because of their function, in order to provide clearance protection for aircraft landing or taking off from the runway and for missed approaches (refer to AC 150/5300-13 for guidance on OFZs).

10. RUNWAY SAFETY AREA (RSA). A defined surface surrounding the runway prepared or suitable for reducing the risk of damage to airplanes in the event of an undershoot, overshoot, or excursion from the runway, in accordance with AC 150/5300-13.

11. TAXIWAY SAFETY AREA. A defined surface alongside the taxiway prepared or suitable for reducing the risk of damage to an airplane unintentionally departing the taxiway, in accordance with AC 150/5300-13.

12. THRESHOLD. The beginning of that portion of the runway available for landing. In some instances, the landing threshold may be displaced.

13. DISPLACED THRESHOLD. The portion of pavement behind a displaced threshold that may be available for takeoffs in either direction or landing from the opposite direction.

14. VISUAL GLIDE SLOPE INDICATOR (VGSI).

This device provides a visual glide slope indicator to landing pilots. These systems include precision approach path indicators (PAPIs), visual approach slope indicators (VASIs), and pulse light approach slope indicators (PLASIs).

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

A-3

APPENDIX 3. AIRPORT CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLANNING GUIDE

Aviation Safety Requirements During Construction

PURPOSE. This appendix provides airport operators

with boilerplate format and language for developing a

safety plan for an airport construction project. Adapt this appendix, as applicable, to specific conditions found on

the airport for which the plan is being developed.

Consider including a copy of this safety plan in the construction drawings for easy access by contractor

personnel. Plans should contain the following:

1. GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

Throughout the construction project, the following safety and operational practices should be observed:

!" Operational safety should be a standing agenda item during progress meetings throughout the construction project.

!" The contractor and airport operator must perform onsite inspections throughout the project, with immediate remedy of any deficiencies, whether caused by negligence, oversight, or project scope change.

!" Airport runways and taxiways should remain in use by aircraft to the maximum extent possible.

!" Aircraft use of areas near the contractor’s work should be controlled to minimize disturbance to the contractor’s operation.

!" Contractor, subcontractor, and supplier employees or any unauthorized persons must be restricted from entering an airport area that would be hazardous.

!" Construction that is within the safety area of an active runway, taxiway, or apron that is performed under normal operational conditions must be performed when the runway, taxiway, or apron is closed or use-restricted and initiated only with prior permission from the airport operator.

!" The contracting officer, airport operator, or other designated airport representative may order the contractor to suspend operations; move personnel, equipment, and materials to a safe location; and stand by until aircraft use is completed.

2. CONSTRUCTION MAINTENANCE AND

FACILITIES MAINTENANCE.

Before beginning any construction activity, the contractor must, through the airport operator, give notice [using the

Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) System] of proposed location, time, and date of commencement of construction. Upon completion of work and return of all such areas to standard conditions, the contractor must, through the airport operator, verify the cancellation of all notices issued via the NOTAM System. Throughout the duration of the construction project, the contractor must—

a. Be aware of and understand the safety problems and hazards described in AC 150/5370-2, Operational Safety on Airports During Construction.

b. Conduct activities so as not to violate any safety standards contained in AC 150/5370-2 or any of the references therein.

c. Inspect all construction and storage areas as often as necessary to be aware of conditions.

d. Promptly take all actions necessary to prevent or remedy any unsafe or potentially unsafe conditions as soon as they are discovered.

3. APPROACH CLEARANCE TO RUNWAYS.

Runway thresholds must provide an unobstructed approach surface over equipment and materials. (Refer to Appendix 2 in AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design, for guidance in this area.)

4. RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY SAFETY AREA

(RSA AND TSA).

Limit construction to outside of the approved RSA, as shown on the approved airport layout plan—unless the runway is closed or restricted to aircraft operations, requiring a lesser standard RSA that is equal to the RSA available during construction (see AC 150/5370-2 for exceptions). Construction activity within the TSA is permissible when the taxiway is open to aircraft traffic if adequate wingtip clearance exists between the aircraft and equipment/material; evacuations, trenches, or other conditions are conspicuously marked and lighted; and local NOTAMs are in effect for the activity (see AC 150/5300-13 for wingtip clearance requirements). The NOTAM should state that, “personnel and equipment are working adjacent to Taxiway____.”

a. Procedures for protecting runway edges.

!" Limit construction to no closer than 200 feet (60m) from the runway centerline—unless the runway is closed or restricted to aircraft operations, requiring a lesser standard RSA

AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

A-4

that is equal to the RSA available during construction.

!" Prevent personnel, material, and/or equipment, as defined in AC 150/5300-13, Paragraph 306, “Obstacle Free Zone (OFZ),” from penetrating the OFZ.

!" Coordinate construction activity with the Airport Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) and FAA Regional Airports Division Office or Airports District Office, and through the airport operator, issue an appropriate NOTAM.

Complete the following chart to determine the area that must be protected along the runway edges:

Runway Aircraft Approach Category*

A, B, C, or D

Airplane Design Group*

I, II, III, or IV

RSA Width in Feet Divided by 2*

_________ _________ _________ _________

_________ _________ _________ _________

_________ _________ _________ _________

_________ _________ _________ _________

*See AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design, to complete the chart for a specific runway.

b. Procedures for protecting runway ends.

!" Maintain the RSA from the runway threshold to a point at least the distance from the runway threshold as existed before construction activity—unless the runway is closed or restricted to aircraft operations, requiring an RSA that is equal to the RSA length available during construction in accordance with AC 150/5300-13. This may involve the use of declared distances and partial runway closures (see AC 150/5370-2 for exceptions).

!" Ensure all personnel, materials, and/or equipment are clear of the applicable threshold siting criteria surface, as defined in Appendix 2, “Threshold Siting Requirements,” of AC 150/5300-13.

!" Prevent personnel, material, and/or equipment, as defined in AC 150/5300-13, from penetrating the obstacle-free zone.

!" Ensure adequate distance for blast protection is provided, as needed.

!" Coordinate construction activity with the ATCT and FAA Regional Airports Division Office or Airports District Office, and through the airport operator, issue an appropriate NOTAM.

!" Provide a drawing showing the profile of the appropriate surfaces of each runway end where construction will take place. Where operations by turbojet aircraft are anticipated, review takeoff procedures and jet blast characteristics of aircraft and incorporate safety measures for construction workers in the contract documents.

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

A-5

Complete the following chart to determine the area that must be protected before the runway threshold:

*See AC 150/5300-13, Airport Design, to complete the chart for a specific runway.

5. MARKING AND LIGHTING FOR

TEMPORARY THRESHOLDS.

Marking and lighting for a temporary threshold is____/is not____ required. The airport owner or contractor, as specified in the contract, will furnish and maintain markings for temporary thresholds. Precision approach path indicators (PAPIs) or runway end identification lights (REIL) are____/are not____ required. The airport owner or contractor, as specified in the contract, will furnish and install all temporary lighting. Include appropriate items per AC 150/5370-2, Chapter 3, “Safety Standards and Guidelines.” If marking and lighting for the temporary threshold is not required, delete this

section of the safety plan. If visual aids and/or markings

are necessary, provide details. (Include applicable 14 CFR part 77 surfaces in the contract documents.)

6. CLOSED RUNWAY MARKINGS AND

LIGHTING.

The following must be specified for closed runways. Closed runway marking are ____/are not____ required. Closed runway markings will be as shown on the plans____/as furnished by the airport owner____/other____ (specify). Barricades, flagging, and flashers are____/are not____required at Taxiway____ and Runway____and will be supplied by the airport ____/other____(specify).

7. HAZARDOUS AREA MARKING AND

LIGHTING.

Hazardous areas on the movement area will be marked with barricades, traffic cones, flags, or flashers (specify). These markings restrict access and make hazards obvious to aircraft, personnel, and vehicles. During periods of low visibility and at night, identify hazardous areas with red flashing or steady-burning lights (specify). The hazardous area marking and lighting will be supplied by

the airport operator/contractor, as specified in the contract, and will be depicted on the plans.

8. TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND MARKING.

Airport markings, lighting, and/or signs will be altered in the following manner (specify) during the period from _____ to ______. The alterations are depicted on the plans.

9. VEHICLE OPERATION MARKING AND

CONTROL.

Include the following provisions in the construction contract, and address them in the safety plans:

a. When any vehicle, other than one that has prior approval from the airport operator, must travel over any portion of an aircraft movement area, it will be escorted and properly identified. To operate in those areas during daylight hours, the vehicle must have a flag or beacon attached to it. Any vehicle operating on the movement areas during hours of darkness or reduced visibility must be equipped with a flashing dome-type light, the color of which is in accordance with local or state codes.

b. It may be desirable to clearly identify the vehicles for control purposes by either assigned initials or numbers that are prominently displayed on each side of the vehicle. The identification symbols should be at minimum 8-inch (20-cm) block-type characters of a contrasting color and easy to read. They may be applied either by using tape or a water-soluble paint to facilitate removal. Magnetic signs are also acceptable. In addition, vehicles must display identification media, as specified in the approved security plan. (This section should be revised to conform to the airport operator’s

requirements.)

Runway End Number

Airplane Design Group*

I, II, III, or IV

Aircraft Approach Category*

A, B, C, or D

Minimum Safety Area Prior to the Threshold*

Minimum Unobstructed Approach Slope

_______ _________ _________ ______: FEET ____: 1 to (threshold)




AC 150/5370-2E 1/17/03

A-6

c. Employee parking shall be ___________________________________ (specify location), as designated by the airport manager_____/ project engineer______/other______ (specify).

d. Access to the job site shall be via___________ (specify route), as shown on the plans______/designated by the engineer______/designated by the superintendent______/designated by the airport manager______/other______ (specify).

e. At 14 CFR part 139 certificated and towered airports, all vehicle operators having access to the movement area must be familiar with airport procedures for the operation of ground vehicles and the consequences of noncompliance.

f. If the airport is certificated and/or has a security plan, the airport operator should check for guidance on the additional identification and control of construction equipment.

10. NAVIGATIONAL AIDS.

The contractor must not conduct any construction activity within navigational aid restricted areas without prior approval from the local FAA Airway Facilities sector representative. Navigational aids include instrument landing system components and very high-frequency omnidirectional range, airport surveillance radar. Such restricted areas are depicted on construction plans.

11. LIMITATIONS ON CONSTRUCTION.

Additional limitations on construction include—

a. Prohibiting open-flame welding or torch cutting operations unless adequate fire safety precautions are provided and these operations have been authorized by the airport operator (as tailored to conform to local

requirements and restrictions).

b. Prominently marking open trenches, excavations, and stockpiled materials at the construction and lighting these obstacles during hours of restricted visibility and darkness.

c. Marking and lighting closed, deceptive, and hazardous areas on airports, as appropriate.

d. Constraining stockpiled material to prevent its movement as a result of the maximum anticipated aircraft blast and forecast wind conditions.

12. RADIO COMMUNICATIONS.

Vehicular traffic located in or crossing an active movement area must have a working two-way radio in contact with the control tower or be escorted by a person in radio contact with the tower. The driver, through personal observation, should confirm that no aircraft is approaching the vehicle position. Construction personnel may operate in a movement area without two-way radio communication provided a NOTAM is issued closing the area and the area is properly marked to prevent incursions. Two-way radio communications are ____/are not____required between contractors and the Airport Traffic Control Tower______/FAA Flight Service Station_____/Airport Aeronautical Advisory Stations (UNICOM/CTAF)______. Radio contact is _______/is not_____ required between the hours of ____and _____. Continuous monitoring is required _____/or is required only when equipment movement is necessary in certain areas_____. (This section may be tailored to suit the specific vehicle and safety requirements of the airport

sponsor.)

13. DEBRIS.

Waste and loose material must not be placed in active movement areas. Materials tracked onto these areas must be removed continuously during the work project.

1/17/03 AC 150/5370-2E

A-7

APPENDIX 4. SAMPLE NOTAM

_______________ AIRPORT

FAA NOTAM # __________________________________ DATE: _____________________

AIRPORT I.D. # __________________________________ TIME: ______________________

NOTAM TEXT:

NOTIFICATON:

# # # # TOWER _____________ ____________ _____________ _____________

PHONE # INITIALS TIME CALLED IN BY

# # # # FSS _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________


AIRLINES

____________________ _____________________

____________________ _____________________

____________________ _____________________

CANCELLED:

NOTIFICATON:

# # # # TOWER _____________ ____________ _____________ _____________


# # # # FSS _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________


AIRLINES

____________________ _____________________

____________________ _____________________

____________________ _____________________


ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1

SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Testing and inspecting allowances.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders for allowances.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.



B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.

1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.

B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES

A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.

1. Contractor’s Quality Control Testing and Inspecting are not part of the Testing and Inspecting Allowance, and are included in the Contract Sum.

2. Owner’s optional Quality Assurance Testing and Inspecting are covered by the Testing and Inspecting Allowance.

3. Owner’s Special Inspections and Testing are not part of the Testing and Inspecting Allowance. Required Special Inspections will be procured separately by the Owner.

B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

C. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No. 1: Owner-Directed Adjustment to Project Conditions: Include a Lump-Sum allowance of $25,000 (twenty-five thousand dollars), to be used as directed by Owner to adjust conditions in the field for differing existing conditions or tenant-requested changes during the progress of the Work.

B. Allowance No. 2: Testing and Inspection – Owner Directed: Include a Lump-Sum allowance of $10,000 (ten thousand dollars), to be used as directed by Architect or Owner. Owner shall employ a testing agency acceptable to the General Contractor; testing agency shall be named after Notice-to-Proceed. This allowance does not include Contractor’s Quality Control testing or Quality Assurance testing specified under other technical specification sections (Division 02- Division 16).

C. Allowance No. 3: Modification of Existing Screening Tables: Include a Lump-Sum allowance of $6,000 (six thousand dollars) for field modification of six existing screening tables to match tables at passenger screening checkpoint ‘B’, with double swinging action, white gloss powder coat finish.



ALTERNATES 01230 - 1

SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 01: Additive Alternate – Conveyor (Power) Turn to Contingency Baggage Screening Device. Base bid includes a (+/- 5’ long) transport conveyor belt, a gravity roller bed conveyor table, and a roller ball table leading to the contingency screening device. This additive alternate includes a longer (+/- 6’ long) transport conveyor belt and a conveyor (power) turn leading to the screening intake belt, adds a movable roller bed table at the outfeed belt to baggage make-up, and includes the relocation and integration of a pole-mounted start-stop button. See drawings for layout diagram and approximate sizes of equipment.

B. Alternate No. 02: Additive Alternate – Replace One Ticket Counter / Check-In Conveyor and Back Guard with Two Bi-Directional Conveyor Units. Base bid calls for the ticket counter / check-in conveyor belt to be re-configured and refurbished and for one unit to be reworked and the stainless steel back guard modified for new opening in wall. Additive alternate is to remove one existing unit and replace with two conveyor units with bi-directional belts and integral stainless steel back guard and plate trim to coordinate with door opening in wall at this conveyor. See drawings for layout diagram and additional information.

C. Alternate No. 03: Additive Alternate – Reconfigure Existing Motors and Relocate Existing Belts toward Plan West. Base bid includes removal, refurbishment, and relocation of an existing transport belt conveyor and a conveyor (power) turn into the baggage handling system layout, and one section of access ladder on the maintenance side of the queue conveyors. This additive alternate includes removing or fully replacing two conveyor (power) turns, the transport belt conveyor, removing and reconfiguring the motors and drives to locate the drives toward the maintenance area to allow shifting the conveyor layout towards the west, adding a section of ticket counter / check-in belt conveyor from the existing ticket counter belt to the relocated conveyor turn, and adding a fixed section of access ladder on the personnel side of the queue conveyors. See drawings for layout diagram and additional information.

D. Alternate No. 04: Additive Alternate – High Speed Diverter Alternate. Base bid includes a single or dual paddle high sortation diverter over a conveyor belt of approximately 10’-6” following a conveyor (power) turn and leading to a perpendicular take-away belt. Additive alternate is for a high-speed diverter over a shorter transport belt (nominally 7’-2”) leading to a conveyor (power) turn and adjustments to the take-away belt and the sloped transport belt to the merge unit.

E. Alternate No. 05: Additive Alternate – Owner-Directed Baggage Handling Programming After Initial Acceptance. Base bid includes layout and programming of the entire baggage handling system through the motor control panel to achieve the sequence of operations and throughput described in other sections of these specifications. This alternate shall provide for up to 60 (sixty) hours of software programming within 12 months following final acceptance, as directed and approved in advance in writing by the Owner, for upgrades and modifications to the baggage handling system motor control panel programming.



F. Alternate No. 06: Additive Alternate – Hollow Metal Door and Frame for Equipment Installation Route. Base bid includes removal and reinstallation, and modification to hardware, on pair of doors and frame. This Alternate is for removal of existing door and frame, salvage of existing hardware, and providing new doors and frame of similar size, with infill metal panels in place of existing lites, and with hardware configured as shown on drawings and specified in Division 08.



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1

SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances.

2. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 15 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.



d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or forms provided by Owner.

1.5 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.



B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 15 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 15 days after such authorization.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on the form included in the Project Manual in the Appendix to the General Conditions.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE / FIELD DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 or the form included at end of Part 3. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.



1. Forms: Sample forms, as listed in articles above, are attached following this Part.

2. Forms are samples only, and may be modified by agreement during or after the pre-Construction Conference.




ST. PETERSBURG-CLEARWATER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT TICKETING ‘B’ INLINE BAGGAGE SCREENING

INFORMATION NOTICE No. IN –

DATE:

FROM:

TO:

SUBJECT:

SPECIFICATION NO:

DRAWING REFERENCE:

DESCRIPTION:

Architect or Construction Manager Company Name:

Signature:

If this notice causes any cost or time impact to your work, do not proceed; submit a Change Proposal (CP) for changes in Contract Sum and/or Time within fifteen (15) days. If this response indicates no change to the Work or a minor change to the Work consistent with the Contract Documents, indicate your acceptance of this notice

in the space indicated below and return a copy prior to proceeding.

Accepted By: Date:

cc: ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE




CHANGE PROPOSAL No. CP –

DATE:

NOTICE OR REQUEST: IN or IR No.

SUBJECT:

DESCRIPTION OF PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS:

REFERENCE: list any attached documents

Within fifteen (15) days of receiving a related Information Notice or Response to Information Request,

submit an itemized proposal for changes in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time for the proposed

modifications, or within two (2) days of notice of changed conditions, notify the Architect in writing of the

date on which you anticipate submitting a Change Proposal.

THIS IS NOT A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE. THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER.

DO NOT CONSIDER THIS AS INSTRUCTION OR DIRECTION TO EITHER STOP WORK IN

PROGRESS OR TO EXECUTE THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS.

NO PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR WORK WHICH IS NOT PRIOR APPROVED IN WRITING.

Adjust Contract Sum for this change ( Increase / Decrease ) . . . . . . . . . . . . .$

Adjust Contract Time for this change ( Increase / Decrease calendar days ) . . .

Signed by: Date:

Print Name and Title

(CONTRACTOR)





CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE / FIELD DIRECTIVE No. CCD –

SUBJECT:

WORK IN PROCESS CHANGE AUTHORIZATION NO.:

MAKE THE FOLLOWING MODIFICATIONS TO THE CONTRACT:

Payment for work related to this Construction Change Directive will be: � LUMP SUM $__________________________ � UNIT PRICE $________________. ____ / _____________________ (Unit) � TIME AND MATERIALS � OTHER _____________________________________________________

Contract time will be as follows:

Signed by: (ARCHITECT) Date:

(OWNER) Date:

Construction shall proceed immediately with this Work upon receipt of this CCD–_________, if signed by the Owner and the Architect.

Signed by: (CONTRACTOR) Date:

Contractor signature indicates agreement with payments and time modifications.

cc: ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE BUILDING OFFICIAL* * If required


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances.

2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 21 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.



3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.



a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 5 (five) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.



4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. a. Sample form is included in the Appendix to General Conditions.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled.



8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).


1. Division 1 Section "Summary " for a description of the division of Work among separate contracts.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.

3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.



2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.



3. Number of Copies: Submit seven opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy.

a. Submit seven copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain three copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.

B. Key Personnel Names: Atl least 15 calendar days to starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three business days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.



e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations.



s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning.



12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at monthly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access.



7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Architect or Owner will record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project identification and tracking numbers. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 10. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature. 12. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A, or other industry-standard form approved as equal by Architect.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.



D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project identification numbers. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Name and address of Architect. 5. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 6. RFI description. 7. Date the RFI was submitted. 8. Date Architect's response was received. 9. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Change Proposal Request, as appropriate.




INFORMATION REQUEST No. IR –

SUBJECT:

SPECIFICATION REF.:

DRAWING REF.:

DESCRIPTION:

PROPOSED SOLUTION:

COMPANY NAME:

Submitted by: Date:

RESPONSE:

Signed by: Architect

Date:

Signed by: Construction Manager

Date:

If this response causes any cost or time impact to your work, do not proceed; submit a Change Proposal (CP) for changes in Contract Sum and/or Time within fifteen (15) days. If this response indicates no change to the Work or a minor change to the Work consistent with the Contract Documents, indicate your acceptance of this response

in the space indicated below and return a copy prior to proceeding.

Accepted by : Date: Contractor Signature



CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and

distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction

photographs. 5. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.



B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

G. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

H. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

B. Submittals Schedule: Submit seven copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit seven opaque copies.

1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit seven opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.



E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit four copies at monthly intervals.

F. Material Location Reports: Submit four copies at monthly intervals.

G. Field Condition Reports: Submit seven copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.

H. Special Reports: Submit seven copies at time of unusual event.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion.



1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

a. Door Hardware and Access Control Devices b. Roofing Accessories c. Wall Coverings d. Inbound and Outbound Baggage Conveyors and Accessories e. Lighting Fixtures f. Fire and Smoke Detection, Alarm, and Annunciation Systems

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.

a. General Testing Guidelines: General Testing Procedures will be developed by separate testing Contractor hired by TSA. Testing procedures will be developed following submission of the Baggage Conveyor shop drawings, and may take 30-45 days to return to the Contractor. Testing Procedures may require programming modifications for acceptance of the system.

b. Site Specific Testing Plan: Site Specific Testing Plan will be developed by separate testing Contractor hired by TSA. Site Specific Testing Plan and procedures will be developed based on approved Baggage Conveyor shop drawings, and will be delivered to the Owner not less than thirty days from the date Contractor establishes for completion of the Baggage Conveyor system and completion of Contractor’s quality control testing.

c. Site Specific Testing for Initial/Final Acceptance: Onsite testing by separate testing Contractor hired by TSA will be required prior to acceptance of the system, and a minimum of two weeks shall be included for initial testing of the integrated baggage conveyor system. Testing Contractor requires not less than thirty days notice to schedule testing.



2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Commissioning. j. Tests and inspections. k. Adjusting. l. Curing. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

4. Other Constraints: Separate and Identify Work by project elements and areas within the Terminal Area.

a. Project elements are headings of work described in the Bid Submittal Form and Instructions to Bidders.

b. Named work areas in the Terminal Area include, but are not limited to:

1) Airside – Aircraft Operations Area 2) Airside – Aircraft Parking Positions (each of 1 – 11) 3) Airside – Ground Service Equipment lanes and service areas 4) Landside – Departures Curbfront along Ticketing ‘A’5) Landside – Departures Curbfront along Ticketing ‘B’6) Landside – Arrivals Curbfront along Gates 9 – 12 7) Landside – Arrivals Curbfront along Baggage Claim 8) Landside – Terminal Curbfront Commercial Vehicle Waiting 9) Landside – Short Term Parking 10) Landside – Long Term Parking 11) Terminal Building – Ticketing ‘A’ (each floor or level) 12) Terminal Building – Gates 2 – 6 / Restaurant and Lounge (each floor or

level) 13) Terminal Building – Federal Inspection Station (each floor or level)



14) Terminal Building – Ticketing ‘B’ (each floor or level) 15) Terminal Building – Gates 9 – 12/ Wick Wing (each floor or level) 16) Terminal Building – Baggage Claim (one level)

c. Show expected Busy Periods for Airline Activities, as defined by Owner at Preconstruction Conference

1) Thanksgiving peak – Friday, November 12 to Sunday, December 5 2) Christmas peak – Friday, December 17 to Sunday, January 16 3) Spring break – March 1 to May 31

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion, and the following interim milestones:

1. Begin and end dates for phases of work within named work areas 2. Erection and removal of temporary fencing and temporary partitions in public areas 3. Closing and opening of each aircraft parking position 4. Limiting access to public landside entrances 5. Erection and removal of temporary partitions impacting circulation corridors 6. Baggage Conveyors – each and by area in terminal building:

a. first date out of service for repair and/or demolition b. earliest expected date for improved conveyor to return to full service c. latest expected date for improved conveyor to return to full service

7. Limiting passenger access or closing airline ticket offices, passenger holding rooms, and other tenant spaces

8. Begin and end dates for any overhead work in public areas

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule at least fourteen days prior to date established for the Pre-Construction Conference.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90

days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within ten (10) days of receiving comments from the Architect. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.



B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in five percent increments within time bar.

2.5 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.

C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within 24 hours of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. Distribute copy of special reports to Architect and Resident Project Representative.



B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 1

SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final Completion construction photographs.


1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before

selective demolition operations commence. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record

Documents at Project closeout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs.

B. Construction Photographs: Submit digital copies, or three prints at Contractor’s option, of each photographic view within five days of taking photographs.

1. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.

2. Optional Format for Printed Submittals: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade photographic paper, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder.

3. Identification: Include digital information ‘tag’ linked to each image, or on back of each print provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information:

a. Name of Project.



b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows.

1.5 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Optional Photographic Film: 35 mm, medium speed (ISO 100-200).

B. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

B. Optional Film Images:

1. Date Stamp: Date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.



2. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of progress photographs in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs same as for those submitted to Architect.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at

Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color, digital photographs of Project site and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.

1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 24 color, digital photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 24 color, digital photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will direct photographer for desired vantage points.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.

3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

4. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.

5. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements.

6. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 7. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 8. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals. 9. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 10. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those

Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.



1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 28 days for initial review of each submittal.

a. Safety and Security Plans b. Phasing and Staging Plans c. Door Hardware and Access Control Devices d. Inbound and Outbound Baggage Conveyors and Accessories e. Lighting Fixtures f. Data and Communication – wiring and conduits

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 4 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.



b. Project Identification Numbers – to include project number assigned by Federal Aviation Administration or Department of Transportation, State Department of Transportation, Pinellas County Purchasing Department, Pinellas County Building Development Review Services, Airport Contract Number, Architect’s project number and/or respective Engineer’s project number.

c. Date. d. Name and address of Architect. e. Name and address of Contractor. f. Name and address of subcontractor. g. Name and address of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

j. Number and full title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. l. Remarks.



m. Signature of transmitter.

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Exceptions."

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "No Exceptions" taken by Architect.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.



g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit not less than seven copies of Product Data, unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will keep three copies for most submittals, four copies for submittals involving consulting engineering or design professionals, and will return two copies with comments, and any additional copies without comments attached. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.



1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. e. Project name. f. Proposed location, or use, in project.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's

property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

1) Submit one full set to the office of the Architect.2) Submit one full set on-site to the designated Owner’s Representative.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit not less than three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:



1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will return two copies.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.

G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two copies.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit seven copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."



C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."



N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.



U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

V. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section “Photographic Documentation."

W. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.

1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal without comment.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.



3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. “No Exceptions” – Architect has reviewed the submittal and approved that it generally conforms to the referenced specification(s) and drawings.

2. “Exceptions Noted” – Architect has reviewed the submittal and observed discrepancies in conformance to the referenced specification(s) and drawings; Architect’s comments shall be incorporated prior to fabrication. Contractor shall modify and re-submit number of corrected copies requested as record documents.

3. “Revise and Resubmit” –The submittal was found to be unacceptable, and the Architect has noted discrepancies with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall respond to the noted discrepancies and shall revise the submittal to conform to the specification(s) and drawings before proceeding further.

4. “Rejected” – The submittal is unacceptable. Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and prepare a submittal that conforms to the specifications and drawings.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of

required tests and inspections. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction

disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.



B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of three previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.



1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.



D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.



2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect twenty-one (21) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow twenty-one (21) days for initial review and fifteen (15) days for each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor is responsible for quality control testing and inspection to insure the quality of his means and methods of construction will produce the specified quality of work, and for any tests and inspections required by regulatory agencies. Costs for these services shall be included in the contract sum.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. The Contractor shall submit for Engineer’s approval a Quality Control (QC) Plan delineating his methods for each item requiring inspections, tests, and similar services.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.



4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting:

1. Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

2. Retest Responsibility: Where results of required inspections, tests, or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, then retests are the responsibility of the Contractor, and shall be deducted from monies due the Contractor on his monthly pay request, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. Retesting of work revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original work.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.



5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 45 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.



2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.


A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.



1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when approved in writing from the Architect, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

1. Coring or drilling holes in existing paving shall not be allowed.

C. Lumber: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry.”

D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.

E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Field Secure Storage Trailer: Mobile units with lockable entrances located as directed by Owner for storage of materials, equipment, and tools.



B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.

1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.

C. Self-Contained Toilet Units – For Contractor forces: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.

D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work only in locations designated in drawings. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. Water Service: Use of Owner’s existing water service facilities will be permitted as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.

B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.

3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water drinking-water units.

a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.



C. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner’s existing power source as directed by electric company officials.

D. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install at least one telephone line for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including:

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor’s Safety Officer mobile phone or pager. d. Airport Operations Department. e. Superintendent’s mobile phone. f. Contractor’s home office. g. Architect’s office. h. Engineer’s office. i. Owner’s Representative Office. j. Airline station managers. k. Principal subcontractors’ field and home offices.

3. Provide an answering machine or a voice-mail service on superintendent’s telephone.

4. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone and portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access only in areas designated in drawings.

2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.

3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.



2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 3. Coordinate with Owner during progress of construction to coordinate with roadway

improvement projects adjacent to temporary facilities and staging areas. 4. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional requirements for aircraft and

vehicular traffic control requirements.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner’s existing employee parking areas for construction personnel. Parking fees for spaces in the public parking lots will not be allowed as a cost of the Work nor as a reimbursable expense of performing the Work.

D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where directed by Owner or Architect to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. See Phasing and Staging drawings for additional information. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.

1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Engage an experienced sign painter or fabricator to apply graphics. 3. Signs shall be sized appropriate for required message and intended audience (i.e.,

vehicular or pedestrian traffic). Location identification (Parking, Bag Claim, Public Entrance, etc.) and vehicular signage text shall use sans serif text with minimal character height of at least 3-inch.

4. Coordinate signage to be similar to existing Airport signage program. 5. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 6. Exterior signs:

a. Construct of exterior-type Grade B-B plywood at least ½” thick. b. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. c. For signs to remain more than 90 days, mount posts in poured concrete footings,

where directed by Owner. d. Paint sign panels and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over

exterior primer. Allow for up to three colors for signs.

7. Project Identification Sign

a. Message shall be as directed by Architect. b. Allow for sign up to 8’ x 8’ (2440 mm x 2440 mm), securely anchored on not less

than three posts. c. Allow for up to three colors for Project Identification sign. d. As requested by Architect, provide company logos and identification information

for Contractor and major subcontractors and suppliers for incorporation into Project Sign.

8. Funding Notification Sign

a. Allow for two exterior signs to be located in the field as directed by Owner or Architect.

b. Message shall be as directed by Owner at the Pre-Construction Conference. c. Allow for signs up to 8' x 8' (2440 mm x 2440 mm), securely anchored on not less

than three posts (4” x 4” minimum pressure treated lumber mounted at least half the height extending below grade, or otherwise securely supported and anchored).



d. Allow for at least six colors for Funding Notification sign. Colors shall be color matched to Owner’s sample(s).

e. As requested by Owner or participating funding agency, the sign shall include exact reproductions of the logos of the participating funding agencies (up to four). These signs shall, at a minimum, prominently display the two recovery logos (Recovery.gov and TSA). The signs will also contain text explaining that the project is funded, fully or in part, with ARRA funds. These signs shall be used only to publicize ARRA funding of an airport project. Sample logos will be provided by the Owner at the Pre-Construction Conference. No other logos or messages than those approved by the Owner shall be permitted on these signs, nor shall other construction signs be displayed immediately adjacent to these signs.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Comply with Division 1 Section “Airport Project Work Procedures” for policing of debris, hourly, and daily removal of loose material, waste, and potential debris.

2. Comply with Division 1 Section “Execution Requirements” for progress cleaning requirements.

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered “tools and equipment” and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.

B. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose portion of Project site determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations, roughly in areas indicated on Phasing and Staging Drawings for each phase.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with two sets of keys.

3. Set fence posts at eight feet on center maximum. 4. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and

other construction operations.

C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.



D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

1. Comply with Division 1 Section “Airport Project Work Procedures”.

E. Covered Walkways: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkways for passage of persons. Coordinate with doors, stairways, entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Construct covered walkways using framing at minimum of 24 inch on center. 2. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect. 3. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch thick

exterior plywood.

F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

G. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood or rated gypsum wallboard on construction side.

2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 4. Protect air-handling equipment. 5. Weather strip openings. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 7. Paint public side of temporary partitions similar to final, or existing, finishes.

H. Temporary Rated Partitions and Enclosures: Where indicated in the drawings, or where directed by authorities having jurisdiction, construct temporary rated partitions and assemblies to supplement current existing and in-progress phases of final rated assemblies.

1. Construct rated partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch non-combustible framing, 5/8-inch fire-rated gypsum wallboard with joints taped on both sides. Specific assemblies may require two layers of fire-rated gypsum wallboard on both sides, with offset joints taped and finished to provide sufficient resistance to transfer of flame and smoke.

2. Vertical assemblies (floors) of any rating and horizontal assemblies (walls) of any rating greater than one-hour may require deeper nominal framing and/or mineral wool insulation to satisfy requirements of authority having jurisdiction.

3. Seal joints and perimeter, connection to existing or permanent conditions to remain. Coordinate with sealant provider or manufacturer for compatibility of sealants with substrates and finishes to remain.



I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.

1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above.

a. Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-

protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 4. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. Prohibit smoking in construction

areas. Smoking is prohibited at all times inside the terminal building, in covered areas under and around the terminal building, at all times and all locations on the airside and in the aircraft operations area.

5. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

7. Comply with requirements of Division 1 Section “Airport Project Work Procedures”.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.


1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract

closeout. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.



C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 15 days after date of Pre-Construction Conference, submit three copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period.

4. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of Pre-Construction Conference, submit five copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use form as defined by Owner. Sample included at end of section.



2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Schedule: Per General Conditions, Substitution Requests must be received not less than thirty day from date of Notice-of-Award.

4. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within ten days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.



7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will coordinate selection with Owner.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.



6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

a. Where Work is to match existing products or installations, Architect has endeavored to identify requirements in other Sections of the Specifications or on the Drawings. Contractor shall identify and highlight any deviation or modifications from named products or manufacturers in Completed Product List.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.



a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.



2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.



01600A-1 Substitution Request Form

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

Substitution Request Number: Date: / /

General Contractor:

Project Name:

Project Location:

Architect’s Project No.:

Specification Section:

Paragraph Number:

Original Product Specified:

Proposed Product Substitution:

General reason for not giving priority to Specified Items:

Answer the following questions: Circle One

• Are extensive revisions to contract documents required? Yes No

• Proposed changes are in keeping with general intent of Contract Documents? Yes No

• Substitution affects other materials or systems? (If yes, attach complete data)

Yes No

• Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of structure or MEP work? (If yes, attach complete data)

Yes No

• Comparison of two products is attached to demonstrate equality of products? (Original specified item versus proposed substitution)

Yes No

• The following data is furnished herewith for evaluation of the substitution:

� Catalog Data Sheets � Drawings � Reports

� Samples � Test Data � Other

• Are there any schedule impacts if the original product specified is used? (If yes, please indicate the number of calendar days: )

Yes No

• Scheduled delivery date of original product: / / .

• Scheduled delivery date of proposed substitution: / / . Days saved )

• Is the original product acceptable to local building officials? (If no, please fill in data below)

Yes No

Contact at Building Department:

Phone: ( ) - Ext. Fax: ( ) - -

• Are there any savings that will accrue to the Owner for use of the proposed substitution? (If yes, please indicate amount: $ )

Yes No

• Are there any life cycle costs savings that will accrue to the Owner for use of the proposed substitution? (If yes, please indicate amount: $ )

Yes No

• Are there any additional costs that will be incurred by the Owner? (If yes, identify cost impact: $ )

Yes No

• Are there any additional costs that will be incurred by other trade contractors? Yes No

(If yes, identify total cost impact: $ ) • Is the specified product or material compatible with other products or materials

scheduled or specified to be installed? Yes No • Is the proposed substitution compatible with other materials scheduled or specified to be

installed? Yes No


• Can the specified product or material be installed and coordinated with the installation of other products or materials specified to be installed? Yes No

• What is the warranty period for the originally specified product? Labor (Yrs) Material (Yrs)

• What is the warranty period for the proposed substitution? Labor (Yrs) Years (Yrs)

By signature below the Contractor and/or Subcontractor proposing the material or product substitution hereby certify that the above noted information is true and accurate. The Contractor and/or subcontractor further certify that each of them waiver their rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of the substitution to perform adequately. THE CONTRACTOR AND SUB-CONTRACTOR

HEREBY FURTHER CERTIFY THAT THIS SUBMISSION HAS BEEN FULLY CHECKED AND COORDINATED

WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

/ /

(Subcontractor’s Signature) (Date)

(Printed Subcontractors Name)

/ /

(Contractor’s Signature) (Date)

(Printed Contractor’s Name)

ARCHITECT’S ACTION AND/OR REVIEW COMMENTS:

The proposed Substitution Request has been reviewed for compliance with the Design Intent of the Contract Documents by the Architect, in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract; However, this review shall not relieve the Contractor or the sub-contractor of their duties and responsibilities under the terms of the Contract, and/or the coordination and product incorporation provisions certified by the Contractor and sub-contractor above. The proposed Substitution shall not be incorporated into the project unless the marked accepted and Architect’s acceptance is acknowledged by the Owner. The Architect’s Review Comments and Response are as follows:

� Rejected; not accepted � Accepted as noted below � Revise and resubmit � Additional Review Comments Attached � Accepted �

/ /

(Architect’s Signature) (Date)

(Printed Architect’s Name)

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST BY OWNER:

/ /

(Signature) (Date)

(Printed Owner’s Name)

END OF FORM


Substitution Request Number: Date: / /

Project Name:

Architect’s Project No.:

Proposed Product Substitution:

ARCHITECT’S ADDITIONAL REVIEW COMMENTS:

END OF ADDITIONAL REVIEW COMMENTS


EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Installation of the Work. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected

portions of the building. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

5. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.




A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 21 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems.



3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Equipment supports. d. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. e. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and



verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."



E. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.

B. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that



adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Division 1 Section "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.



G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.



3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.



F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."



1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1

SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.


1. Division 1 Section “Summary” for use of premises, and phasing, and Owner-occupancy requirements.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Division 1 Section “Photographic Documentation” for preconstruction photographs taken

before selective demolition operations. 4. Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for temporary construction and

environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.


A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm.



B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner’s and other tenants’ on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of

egress, including for other tenants affected by selective demolition operations. 5. Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner’s partial occupancy of completed Work. 6. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from

building.

C. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

D. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section “Photographic Documentation.” Submit before Work begins.

E. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner’s operations will not be disrupted.



B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

A. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

C. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.



F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction photographs and templates.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section “Photographic Documentation.”

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section “Summary.”

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before

proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.



5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner’s storage area off-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.



C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.



3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs.

3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 6. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing

Owner's personnel. 7. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents.



4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

7. Complete startup testing of systems. 8. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.



B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit seven copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Project identifying numbers. c. Date. d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. f. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.



3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.



h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1

SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Product Data.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.

B. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.



b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.



2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of materials, systems and equipment.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for products in those Sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit seven (7)

copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.



C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.



B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Operating standards. 3. Operating procedures. 4. Operating logs. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Control diagrams. 7. Piped system diagrams. 8. Precautions against improper use. 9. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures.



5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 1

SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training videos.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include three (3) learning objectives and outline for each training module.

1. At completion of training, submit seven (7) complete training manuals for Owner's use.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videos: Submit two copies within fifteen days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Project identifying numbers. c. Name and address of video producer. d. Name of Architect.



e. Name of Contractor. f. Date videotape was recorded.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Conveying systems, including baggage handling conveyors.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Operating standards. c. Regulatory requirements. d. Equipment function. e. Operating characteristics. f. Limiting conditions.



g. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Identification systems. e. Warranties and bonds. f. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.



7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 21 days' advance notice.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a written or demonstration performance-based test.



E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training videos. If available, manufacturer’s standard training video is acceptable where systems are substantially similar to those installed. Where pre-recorded video is not readily available, site-specific training shall be video recorded and given to Owner for use in their ongoing training program.

B. Site-specific training: Record each training module separately. As appropriate, include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

C. Video Format: Provide high-quality auto-play DVD in industry-standard format, for replay on both personal computer or DVD player to television display.

D. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of demonstration and training.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video by dubbing audio narration off-site after recording. Include description of items being viewed.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 - 1

SECTION 05100 - STRUCTURAL STEEL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division - 1 Specification Sections apply to work on this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide structural steel work as shown on drawings and specified herein. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC "Code of standard Practice," and as otherwise shown on drawings.


A. Codes and Standards

1. Comply with provisions of following, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

a. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." b. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel

for Buildings," including the "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued. c. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"

approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation.

d. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code," latest editions. e. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes,

Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use.

1) Qualifications for Welding Work

f. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure."

1) Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months.

2) If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility and at his expense.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall fully coordinate the structural steel work.

B. Contractor shall fully verify all dimensions and details. Any discrepancies shall be immediately reported to the Architect.



C. Contractor shall locate dimensionally on setting plans all anchor bolts, inserts, base plates, etc. and shall prepare and deliver all required templates and fully dimensioned setting plans, all in time for the proper execution of the work.

D. Contractor shall set the anchor bolts and inserts. Contractor shall field survey all such settings for correctness after they have been cast in place, and before proceeding with steel erection. Checking shall be performed within ten days of notification by concrete installer that his work is complete.

E. Contractor shall within 10 days report to the Architect and certify that he has complied with the above checking requirements and shall indicate any inaccuracies found and corrections which must be made. Any inaccuracies not included in this report and found during or after steel erection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and the cost of corrective measures shall be borne by him.

F. Use base lines, bench marks, or other standards for survey work. If permanent building bench marks have been established, they will be used for the aforementioned field checking.

G. Contractor shall coordinate erection areas and sequence and temporary bracing locations.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

1. Submit 4 copies of producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards).

2. Structural Steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering the chemical and physical properties.

3. High strength bolts. 4. Structural steel primer paint.

B. Shop Drawings

1. Shop drawings shall give all necessary information for the fabrication and erection of the structure and shall be based on AISC Specifications. Minimum connections used shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall support the total uniform load capacity of members. Provisions for the connection of other work required shall be indicated and provided by Steel Installer. Index sheets shall be furnished with all beam and column details at the same time the details are submitted for the review of the Architect. Standard connection details conforming to those shown on the drawings shall be submitted with first erection plan. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated.

2. The review of shop drawings shall be for size and arrangement of principal members and strength of connections only.

3. Provide anchor bolt and setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others.

4. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated.



5. Shop drawings shall bear the initials of the detailer's checker prior to submission. 6. Shop drawings shall indicate the sequence and extent of areas to be erected by using

division or derrick numbers.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time so as not to delay that work.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports, Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. The Contractor shall be responsible for any demurrage charges due to failure to unload or store materials properly. Structural steel shall be kept properly drained. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members of the supporting structures.

D. Protection

1. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.

E. Replacement

1. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Shop Fabrication and Assembly

1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

G. Connections

1. Shop connections shall be welded or high strength bolted. Field Connections shall be bolted with high strength bolts in friction-type connections conforming to ASTM Designation A325, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.

2. Combinations of bolts and welds in the same connections are not permitted, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

3. Where structural joints are made using high strength bolts, hardened washers and nuts tightened to a high tension; the materials, methods of installation and tension control, type of wrenches to be used, and inspection methods shall conform to ASTM Designation A325 as approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. Each bolt shall have a hardened washer under the nut.



4. The high strength bolts used shall have a suitable identifying mark placed on top of the head before leaving the factory.

5. Tightening of nuts shall be done with properly calibrated pneumatic wrenches. The minimum bolt tension for the size of the bolt used shall be in accordance with tables listed in the above referenced Standards. Each wrench shall be checked for accuracy at least once daily for actual conditions of application.

6. Bolts that have been completely tightened shall be marked with identifying symbols. 7. The Contractor shall have a properly calibrated torque gauge on hand, and when

requested by the Architect, shall provide a check on any bolt at any time until final acceptance of the work by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces - General

1. For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam markers, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes.

2. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B. 4. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 with size and shape as indicated on the

drawings. 5. Arc Welding Electrodes shall conform to the AWS Code as Revised. All electric current

require shall be furnished by Contractor. 6. Paint for Shop Painting Structural Steel and Field Touch-up shall be manufacturer's

standard primer. 7. All items exposed to weather, such as shelf angles and items as noted on the drawings,

shall be zinc coated in accordance with the provisions of ASTM Designation A123 as revised to date.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the approved shop drawings.

B. Bearing surfaces shall be planed to true beds, and abutting surfaces shall be closely fitted. All columns and bearing stiffeners shall be milled to give full bearings.

C. Bolt holes shall be drilled or punched in accordance with AISC Specifications, subject to the provisions specified herein. Holes shall be accurately centered and shall register true upon erection. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for a rejection. Small errors may be repaired by drilling or reaming.



D. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly. Assembled parts shall be brought into close contact. Drift pins shall be used only for aligning members and shall not be used in a manner which will damage metal or enlarge or distort holes. Members requiring accurate alignment shall be provided with slotted holes and/or washers for truing up the steel as required. All finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints.

E. Welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform the type of work required. Such qualification test shall have been passed within the preceding 12-month period. Shop drawings shall indicate the size, length, spacing, and type of all welds. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and for methods used in correcting welding work.

F. Holes for Other Work

1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on approved shop drawings.

2. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.

3. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. General

1. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

B. Codes

1. Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. Maintain work in a safe and stable condition during erection.

C. Anchor Bolts

1. Steel installer shall furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Steel installer shall furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. Contractor shall set anchor bolts and other insert anchors required.

D. Field Assembly

1. Set structural members to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.



Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

E. Temporary Shoring and Bracing

1. Provide as required, with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy line to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. Coordinate locations of temporary bracing with the Contractor.

2. Splice members only where indicated. 3. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins. Ream or

drill holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 4. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the

structural framing.

F. Touch-up Painting

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint, and paint all exposed areas with the same materials as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry file thickness of 2.0 mils.

3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. General

1. The Owner shall pay for the services of a Test Laboratory for steel inspection. The Test Laboratory shall be selected by the Architect.

2. Certified copies of mill reports covering the chemical and physical properties of the steel used in the work shall be furnished at the Contractor's expense.

3. The Testing Laboratory will test the structural steel for compliance with AISC Specifications for the design, fabrication, and erection of structural steel for buildings. The following testing and inspection procedures are included for reference only and are not included as part of this contract.

B. Shop Inspection, if authorized will include:

1. Examination of structural steel for straightness and alignment. 2. Checking shop connections and fabricated pieces. 3. Testing shop bolts and welds. 4. Examination of all fabricated pieces for proper cleaning and painting.

C. Field Inspection, if authorized, will include:

1. Proper erection and connection of structural members, etc. including tightness of high strength bolts.

2. Proper size and fit of all bolts. 3. Proper alignment of all structural members and plumbness of building.



4. Proper welding methods conforming to American Welding Society Specifications. 5. Proper field Painting.

D. The Testing Laboratory, if authorized, will:

1. Verify that all welding required by the details shall be done by welders who have been qualified within the past year for the positions, materials, and welding procedures in accordance with the latest requirements of the American Welding Society and that all welding materials, welding operators and inspectors shall meet the requirements of the state and local building codes. Affidavits identifying individual welders and their qualifications shall be secured from the fabrication and erector.

2. Submit reports on testing and inspection. Reports shall include detailed data with respect to all requirements of the specifications referenced. Materials or workmanship not meeting the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, either at the Plant or Project Site, will be rejected by the Testing Laboratory and immediately reported to the Architect. In no case shall the laboratory recommend any method of adjustment or correction without obtaining prior approval of the Architect. Include in all reports and project title and number, location, Contractor's name, and date work was performed.

3. Immediately after tests or inspections have been made and in no case later than seven (7) days after tests or inspections have been made, the laboratory shall furnish copies of all test and inspection reports.

4. Upon completion of the work, a final report shall be issued summarizing the inspection performed.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Miscellaneous steel trim. 3. Metal bollards. 4. Pipe guards. 5. Loose bearing and leveling plates.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

C. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.



2.3 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.



C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Primemiscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.

2.9 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate.

B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.

C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.



2.10 PIPE GUARDS

A. Fabricate pipe guards from 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts.

B. Prime pipe guards with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 9 painting Sections unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning." 3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.

C. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.



C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 1

SECTION 05730 - ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Closures and trim. 2. Metal base.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal.

1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery,

finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.


A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL

A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.


A. Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834; and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.



B. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

C. Anchors: Provide metal expansion sleeve anchors of type, size, and material necessary for type of load and installation indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

D. Sound-Deadening Materials:

1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test.

2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to metal and is noncombustible after curing.

F. Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard bituminous paint.

2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS

A. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Shop Primers: Comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Water-based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners.



C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.

D. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.

2.5 CLOSURES AND TRIM

A. Form closures and trim from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly to adjoining construction.

1. Steel Sheet: 0.048 inch.

a. Finish: Factory primed.

2.6 METAL BASE

A. Form metal base from metal of type and thickness indicated below:

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: 0.050 inch.

a. Finish: No. 4.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

2.8 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Preparing Galvanized Items for Factory Priming: Thoroughly clean galvanized decorative formed metal of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

B. Repairing Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise indicated.



2.9 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or with SSPC-SP 8.

B. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it.

C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible.

C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.

D. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish.

E. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.



MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rough carpentry work not specified elsewhere and generally intended for support of other work.

2. Wood furring/blocking 3. Wood equipment bases. 4. Miscellaneous blocking, grounds, nailers, and panels. 5. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack material above ground level on uniformly spaced supports to prevent deformation.

B. For material pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle for air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Grade Stamps: Furnish lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency that indicates grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

1. Sizes: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically noted as being required.

C. Surfacing: Dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.



2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED CONDITIONS

A. Species: Any wood species listed by PS 20.

B. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture content).

C. Grade: No. 2 or standard grade.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR EXPOSED CONDITIONS



C. Grade: No. 2 or standard grade.

2.4 BOARDS FOR CONCEALED CONDITIONS



C. Grade: No. 2, 2 Common, or Construction Boards.

2.5 BOARDS FOR EXPOSED CONDITIONS



C. Grade: No. 2, 2 Common, Construction Common, or Construction Boards.

2.6 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Standards: Comply with requirements of PS 1 Voluntary Product Standard "Construction and Industrial Plywood" for veneer plywood and APA PRP-108 "Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use Panels" for performance-rated panels.

1. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark for grade specified.

B. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than ¾- inch.



C. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: C-C Plugged Exterior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch nominal.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Wire, Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

C. Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and flat washers.

2.8 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. General: Obtain preservative-treated lumber complying with AWPA Standard C2. Mark each treated item with AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. Coat surfaces cut after treatment to comply with AWPA M4.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Above-Ground Wood Treatment: Pressure treat with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf.

1. Kiln-dry interior dimension lumber after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content.

2. Treat wood items indicated and in the following circumstances:

a. In contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. b. In contact with masonry or concrete. c. Within 18 inches of grade.

C. Ground-Contact Wood Treatment: Pressure treat with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.

2.9 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. General: Identify treated wood with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Dimension Lumber: Comply with AWPA C20.

1. Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior Type for wood exposed to weather.



C. Plywood: Comply with AWPA C27.

1. Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior Type for wood exposed to weather.

D. Inspect each piece after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of miscellaneous carpentry and in sizes that would require an excessive number or poor arrangement of joints.

B. Cut and fit miscellaneous carpentry accurately. Install members plumb and true to line and level.

C. Coat cut edges of preservative-treated wood to comply with AWPA M4.

D. Securely fasten miscellaneous carpentry as indicated and according to applicable Florida building codes and recognized standards.

E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood.

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS

A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Cut and shape to required size. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Comply with applicable installation recommendations in APA Form E30 "Design/Construction Guide--Residential & Commercial."

B. Install backboards for electrical and other panes directly to suds in a manner that will support equipment loads.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

2. Color: Match existing roof panel.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

2. Color: Match existing roof panel.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.



2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel

according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

C. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick.



C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

4. Install sealant tape where indicated. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.



C. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

D. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 1

SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preformed flashings.


1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.


A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage.


A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



B. WARRANTY

C. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 METAL MATERIALS

A. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated. 2. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): Prepare,

pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements in AAMA 2604, except as modified below:

1) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours.

b. Color and Gloss: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and coil-coat finish as follows:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Conversion coating;



Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604 and with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range

C. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished.

D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished.

F. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

G. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M.


A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.



2.4 PREFORMED FLASHINGS

A. Exhaust Vent Flashings: Double-wall metal flashing sleeve, urethane insulation filled, with integral deck flange, 12 inches high, with removable metal hood and slotted metal collar, and as follows:

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.064 inch thick, mill finished. 3. Diameter: As required for vent size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.

2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.



3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance.

D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

E. Preformed Flashing Installation:

1. Secure to roof membrane according to vent and stack flashing manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.



THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1

SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. Include firestop system for the tops of rated CMU walls.


1. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 2. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.



3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable,

thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."



B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance.

C. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by the authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application on Drawings that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Nelson Firestop Products. 5. NUCO Inc. 6. Specified Technologies Inc. 7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 8. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 9. USG Corporation.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:



a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

F. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.

G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

H. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.



3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.



3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.



B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.


ST. PETERSBURG - CLEARWATER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LPA PN: AR178017

AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT OF 2009 JUNE 17, 2010


JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1

SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to product data submit the following:

B. Samples of each type and color of joint sealant required.

C. Certified test reports for joint sealants evidencing compliance with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPATIBILITY

A. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another

and with joint substrates under service and application conditions, as demonstrated by testing and

field experience.

2.2 COLORS

A. Provide color indicated of exposed joint sealants or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by

Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANT STANDARD

A. Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated

complying with ASTM C 920 requirements.

1. One-Part, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows:

a. Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and O.

b. Additional capability, when tested per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following

percentage changes in joint width as measured at time of application and still comply

with other requirements of ASTM C 920:

1) Fifty (50) percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of

100 percent movement.

2. One-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT,

M, A, and O.





3. One-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows:

a. Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and O.

2.4 SEALANT BACKINGS, GENERAL

A. Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; approved for

applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

2.5 PLASTIC FOAM JOINT FILLERS

A. Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, non-extruding strips of plastic foam of material

indicated below, and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to

producing optimum sealant performance.

1. Open-cell polyurethane foam.

2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in

unruptured state.

3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, non-outgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf

and tensile strength of 35 PSI per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than

0.02 gram/cubic centimeter per ASTM C 1083.

4. Any material indicated above.

B. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with

ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures

down to -26 deg F.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back of joint.

D. Primer: As recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to

joint substrates indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and applications

indicated.

3.2 SEALANT INSTALLATION STANDARD

A. Comply with ASTM C 1193.





3.3 SEALANT SCHEDULE

Location Type

Interior Frames Single-Part Nonsag Urethane

Exterior Frames Single-Part Nonsag Urethane

Exterior Roofing, Flashing Single-Part Neutral Curing Silicone

Interior Joints between Counters,

Walls, and Dissimilar Materials Single-Part Non-Sag Urethane



STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

1.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.* Basis of Design

5. D & D Specialties 6. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 7. Firedoor Corporation. 8. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 9. Habersham Metal Products Company. 10. Kewanee Corporation (The). 11. Mesker Door Inc. 12. Palmetto Wholesale Company 13. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 14. Security Metal Products Corp. 15. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 16. Windsor Republic Doors.



1.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.

H. Glazing: Division 8 Sections “Glazing” as applicable to location of glazing.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

1.5 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq.

ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."



B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

1.6 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- thick steel sheet.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

1.7 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

1.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

1.9 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metalwork to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.



B. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 16 electrical Sections.



1.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.



B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

2.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing and installing commercial door hardware needed for a complete and operational system for following:

a. Swinging doors b. Other doors indicated in schedules and plans

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections 3. Electrified door hardware

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 8 Steel Doors and Frames

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced.

B. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A156 Series 2. ANSI A115 Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware 3. ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4. ANSI A250.6 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Applications)

C. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)

D. Door and Hardware Institute:

1. DHI Publication - Abbreviations and Symbols 2. DHI Publication - Basic Architectural Hardware 3. DHI Publication - Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors (with supplements) 4. DHI Publication - Hardware Reinforcements on Steel Doors and Frames 5. DHI Publication - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 6. DHI Publication - For Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates

E. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 4. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door

Assemblies 5. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



F. Steel Door Institute:

1. SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1. UL Standard 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL Standard 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 3. UL Building Materials Directory

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Sequence:

1. Submit final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

2. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to coordinated review of Door Hardware Schedule.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product fact sheets describing each item of hardware to be provided including material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

C. Door Hardware Schedule:

1. Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under supervision of a DHI certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Certified Door Consultant (CDC) detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

2. Coordinate Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

3. Format:

a. Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical form as described in DHI’s Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule.

b. Horizontal hardware schedules are not acceptable. c. Submit 6 copies of hardware schedule.

4. Organization:

a. Organize door hardware schedule into hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item needed for each door or opening.

b. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in Door Hardware Schedule contained in Part 3 of this specification.

c. For doors of different sizes or where hinges, locks, or closers are different, a separate heading shall be used. No labeled openings shall be combined with non-labeled openings.

5. Content:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish for each door hardware item b. Name and manufacturer of each item c. Fastenings and other pertinent information



d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule

e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule f. Mounting locations for door hardware g. Door and frame sizes and materials

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted. a. Electrical components shall be listed by opening in hardware submittals.

2. Submit details of interface between electrified door hardware and following:

a. Fire alarm system b. Access control system c. Security system d. Building control system

3. Provide description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems; include description of component functions that occur in following situations:

a. Authorized person wants to enter b. Authorized person wants to exit c. Unauthorized person wants to enter d. Unauthorized person wants to exit

4. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of system components with respect to their placement in door opening.

a. Indicate mounting heights and locations of electronic components listed by opening in hardware submittals.

5. Wiring Diagrams:

a. Submit detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems for each opening that requires electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-opens are specified. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include following:

(1) System schematic (2) Point-to-point wiring diagram (3) Riser diagram (4) Elevation of each door

E. Samples:

1. Submit samples of door hardware items if requested by Architect. Accepted samples may be incorporated into Work.

F. Quality Assurance Submittals:

1. Test Reports:

a. Provide product test reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products comply with requirements.



2. Manufacturer’s Instructions:

a. Submit instructions for installation and maintenance of operating parts and finish. b. Furnish templates and schedules needed for fabrication of hollow metal doors and

frames, wood doors and frames, and other items related to hardware. c. Submission for templates and template list shall follow procedures established by

DHI publication For Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates.

G. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance:

a. Provide operation and maintenance data for electrically operated and non-electrical hardware consisting of technical information as follows:

(1) Maintenance instructions for each item of hardware (2) Catalog pages for each product (3) Parts list for each product (4) Copy of final hardware schedule (5) Copy of final keying schedule

b. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in hardware submittals.

(1) Operational descriptions shall detail how each electronic component functions within opening incorporating conditions of ingress and egress.

(2) Provide complete point-to-point wiring diagrams for electronic components listed by opening in hardware submittals.

c. Include a copy of operational and maintenance descriptions in Operation and Maintenance Data Manual.

2. Warranties:

a. Submit Special warranties specified in this Section.

3. Keying Schedule:

a. Prepare and submit a keying schedule using keyset symbols referenced in DHI manual Keying Systems and Nomenclature. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.

(1) Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.

b. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts. c. Keying schedule shall be prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. d. Submit 4 copies of keying schedule.

4. Deliver keys and bitting list to the Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.




A. Qualifications:

1. Door Hardware Supplier:

a. Door hardware supplier shall have warehousing facilities in Project’s vicinity and shall employ a qualified Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during course of Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

b. Electrified Door Hardware:

(1) Supplier shall be an experienced door hardware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.

(2) Supplier shall prepare data for electrified door hardware, including shop drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer’s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

2. Architectural Hardware Consultant:

a. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall be a person who is currently certified by Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

b. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall be experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations.

3. Installer:

a. Door hardware shall be installed by an experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Hardware and installation shall comply with provisions and standards listed in IBC 2003.

2. Federal Accessibility Regulations:

a. Americans with Disabilities Act - ADA b. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards - UFAS c. ANSI A117.1 Standard for Accessible and Usable Building s and Facilities d. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)

3. National Fire Protection Association:

a. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows b. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code c. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door

Assemblies d. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



4. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

a. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies b. UL 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies

5. ANSI/BHMA Standards

a. A115-W Series b. A115 Series c. A156 Series:

6. Door and Hardware Institute:

a. Abbreviations and Symbols b. Basic Architectural Hardware c. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors (with supplements) d. Hardware Reinforcements on Steel Doors and Frames e. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware f. WDHS-1 Template Book Criteria for Wood Doors g. WDHS-3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors

C. Pre-Installation Meetings:

1. Conduct conference on-site to comply with requirements in Division 1 for Project Meetings.

2. Topics to be discussed at meeting shall include:

a. Review items such as proper installation sequence, adjustments, attachment, and location of door hardware.

b. Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including but not limited to following:

(1) Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

(2) Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. (3) Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

c. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

D. Keying Conference:

1. Conduct conference on-site to comply with requirements in Division 1 for Project Meetings. Participants shall be Owner’s representative, Contractor, hardware supplier, and lock manufacturer’s representative.

2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including but not limited to following:

a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security needed, and plans for future expansion

b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram c. Requirements for key control system d. Address for delivery of keys



E. Coordination:

1. Templates:

a. Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware to parties involved.

b. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with specified requirements.

2. Electrical System Roughing-In:

a. Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, security system, building control system.

b. Refer to work specified in Division 16 applicable to electrified hardware items including, but not limited to conduit, pull boxes, wiring, and final connections.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:

1. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Site.

2. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include but are not limited to following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering

B. Warranty period shall be for not less than 3 years from Date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manual Closers: 10 years

C. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Service:

1. Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months’ full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware installer.



a. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as needed for proper door hardware operation.

b. Provide parts and supplies as used in manufacture and installation of original products.

2. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General Requirements:

1. Hardware shall be of best grade, entirely free of imperfections in manufacture and finish, and shall satisfactorily perform various functions needed.

2. Furnish necessary screws, bolts or others fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position and match hardware as to material and finish. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated.

3. Do not use through-bolts for installations where bolt head or nut opposite face is exposed in other work. Use of sex bolts shall not be allowed.

4. Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated. Items of hardware not definitely specified, but needed for satisfactory installation of hardware shall be provided. Such items shall be of type and quality suitable for service needed and comparable to adjacent hardware.

5. Finishes shall comply with ANSI A156.18/ BHMA 1301. Finish designations cross references shall be as follows:

BHMA Code

Description

Nearest US Equiv.

BHMA Category

Basis Metal

626 Satin chromium plated US26D A Brass; Bronze 628 Satin aluminum, clear anodized US27 A Aluminum 630 Satin stainless steel US32D A Stainless Steel 652 Satin chromium plated US26D E Steel 689 Aluminum painted US28 E Any

B. Substitutions:

1. Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality and design. The architect must approve all product substitutions. Any request for substitutions must be submitted 10 days before the bid date, to allow sufficient time for an addendum to be added to the bid document. In accordance with Section 016000, required data and physical samples must be provided to the architect for review.

2.2 HINGES

A. Butt Hinges: ANSI/ BHMA A156.1



1. Provide full mortise, template, 5-knuckle, button tip hinges with non-rising loose pins and ball type bearings.

2. Out-swinging exterior doors shall be furnished with stainless steel, hinges with non-removable pins or security studs.

3. Interior doors with locksets shall be furnished with non-removable pins hinges. 4. Hinges shall be furnished in following quantities:

a. Doors up to 90” in height: 3 hinges b. Doors over 90” in height: Add 1 hinge for every additional 30”

5. Furnish hinge sizes not less than as follows:

a. For 1 3/4” Thick Doors: Heavy weight

(1) Doors up to 3’-0” wide: 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 x 0.180 gauge (2) Doors 3’-0” to 4’-0” wide: 5 x 4 1/2 x 0.190 gauge

6. Furnish hinges of sufficient throw where needed to clear trim or permit doors to swing 180 degrees.

7. Finishes: a. BHMA #630 (US32D)

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Stainless Steel

a. Bommer: BB5006 b. Hager: BB1199 c. H. B. Ives: 5BB1HW

B. Geared Continuous Hinges: ANSI/ BHMA A156.26 Grade 1

1. Provide full mortise, non-handed, full height hinges with interlocking cover and symmetrically templated hole pattern made from extruded aluminum.

2. Finish: BHMA #628 (US27) 3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hager: 780-112 HD b. Ives: 112HD c. Select: SL-11HD

2.3 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS


1. Shape of lever shall be easy to grasp with one hand and not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of wrist.

2. Locksets and latchsets shall not require more than 15 lbfto release latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

3. Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latchset and lockset with curved lip extended to protect frame without catching clothing. Finish shall match hardware set.

4. Provide all locks and cylinders with Best Access interchangeable core cylinders. Key system shall be 7-pin tumbler with cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.



2.4 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices: ANSI/ BHMA A156.3, Grade 1

1. Exit devices shall be listed by UL for accident and hazard. Devices shall conform to applicable requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.

2. Shape of lever shall be easy to grasp with one hand and not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of wrist.

3. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbfto release latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

4. Exit devices mounted on labeled wood doors shall be through-bolt mounted in compliance with door manufacturer’s requirements. Do not through-bolt if there has been special blocking specified in wood door specification; refer to Section 08210.

5. Furnish filler plates and shim kits as needed for flush mounting of devices on doors. 6. Provide touch bars with return stroke fluid dampers and rubber bottoming dampers, plus

anti-rattle devices. 7. Touch pad shall extend not less than one-half of door width. Touch pad height shall

exceed height of mechanism case or rail assembly (T-Shaped) to eliminate pinch parts. If touch pad height does not exceed height of mechanism case/rail assembly, provide insert/filler on top and bottom of touch pad along mechanism case/rail to prevent pinch part. Provide stainless steel touch pads. Plastic touch pads shall not be acceptable.

8. End caps shall be of heavy-duty metal alloy construction and provide horizontal adjustment to provide flush alignment with device cover plate. When device end cap is installed, no raised edges will protrude.

9. Cylinder dogging to be furnished on non-fire rated doors. 10. Surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a locking plate underneath to

prevent movement. Devices shall have dead latching feature to prevent latchbolt tampering.

11. Devices shall not have exposed rivets or screws on back of device that could be visible through a glass light.

12. When removable mullions are listed, provide the type controlled by a key cylinder under masterkey system and from same manufacturer as exit device. Furnish stabilizers similar to Von Duprin 154 with removable mullions.

13. Outside trim shall be heavy-duty type fastened by means of concealed welded lugs and through-bolts from inside. Trim shall be forged brass with a minimum average thickness on escutcheon of 0.130”. Pull plate with trim shall be brass with minimum average thickness of 0.090” and have forged pulls.

14. Lever trim shall be designed with a breakaway feature to allow trim to freely rotate while remaining securely locked, preventing damage to internal lock components from vandalism by excessive force.

15. Latch bolts shall have a self-lubricating coating that reduces friction and wear. Plated latch bolts are unacceptable.

16. Finish: BHMA #626 (US26D) 17. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Von Duprin: 98 Series b. Von Duprin: 35 Series; narrow style case

2.5 DOOR CLOSERS




1. Closers shall be sealed and filled with all-weather fluid. Provide stable hydraulic fluid to withstand a temperature range of 120 degrees F to minus 30 degrees F.

2. Size closers in compliance with requirements for accessibility for handicapped and recommendations of manufacturer. Provide barrier free and delayed action features as needed. Comply with following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior Hinged Doors: 5.0 lbs. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction

B. Surface Closers: ANSI/ BHMA A156.4, Grade 1

1. Surface mounted closers shall be full rack-and-pinion type with cast iron body. Double heat-treated shaft, full complement bearings, single piece forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring, non-critical screw valves; back check, sweep and latch.

2. Furnish closers complete with rectangular, non-ferrous covers, necessary brackets and fasteners for top of door surface mounted units. a. Finish: BMHA #689

3. Closer products with any type of pressure relief valve system shall not be acceptable. 4. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be stamped with date of manufacturer

code. 5. Non-sized closer to be independent lab tested for 10,000,000 cycles. 6. Closers shall be non-sized, field adjustable from size 1 to 6 with a “FAST” power adjust

speed dial to show spring power size. 7. Furnish non-sized closers with 1 1/2” diameter piston. 8. Do not through-bolt if there has been special blocking specified in wood door

specification; refer to Section 08210. 9. Locate closers on interior side of exterior doors and on non-public side of interior doors,

unless otherwise specified. 10. Provide extra-duty arms (EDA) at doors scheduled with parallel arm applications. 11. Provide plates, brackets and special templates when needed for interface with particular

header door and wall conditions and adjacent hardware. 12. Closers shall be tested to 100 hours of salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117;

furnish data on request. 13. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. LCN: 4010/4110 Series

C. Concealed Closers: ANSI/ BHMA A156.4, Grade 1

1. Concealed mounted closers shall be full rack-and-pinion type with cast iron body. Double heat-treated shaft, full complement bearings, single piece forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring, non-critical screw valves; back check, sweep and latch.

2. Closer products with any type of pressure relief valve system shall not be acceptable. 3. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be stamped with date of manufacturer

code. 4. Non-sized closer to be independent lab tested for 10,000,000 cycles. 5. Closers shall be non-sized, field adjustable from size 1 to 6 with a “FAST” power adjust

speed dial to show spring power size. 6. Furnish non-sized closers with 1 1/2” diameter piston. 7. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted track arms. 8. Provide track fire shield for use with 20 minute wood door applications. 9. Closers shall be tested to 100 hours of salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117;

furnish data on request.



10. Finish: BMHA 689 (US28) 11. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. LCN: 2030/2031 Series b. LCN: 2010/2011 Series

2.6 FLUSHBOLTS

A. Flushbolts: ANSI/ BHMA A156.16

1. Provide minimum 1/2” diameter rods of brass or stainless steel, with minimum 12” long rods for doors up to 7’-0” in height. Provide longer rods as needed for doors exceeding 7’-0” in height.

2. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom flushbolt applications, except where special threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt.


a. Ives: FB458 b. Rockwood: 555 c. Trimco: 3917

2.7 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Surface Mounted Overhead Holders/Stops: ANSI/ BHMA A156.8

1. Description: Heavy-duty extruded brass, bronze or stainless steel stop/holders with shock absorber and no plastic parts


a. GJ: 90 Series b. Rixon: Heavy Duty 9 Series

2.8 SEALS AND GASKETS

A. General Requirements: ANSI/ BHMA A156.22

1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide DHSI #105 weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf.

2. Seals and gasketing manufacturer shall show evidence that they can provide an STC of 30 or more on sealed openings. Evidence shall be provided that this STC, as well as any requirements for smoke gasket can be maintained under industry allowable tolerances for warp (AWI) and plumb (SDI). Evidence shall be provided that the gasket system can meet criteria under the Field Quality Assurance Standards.

a. Any opening, allowing light to pass the frame perimeter (exclusive of the door bottom) shall be rejected. (U/L 1784)

b. Gasket that binds the door, requiring more than 15# to release the latch is unacceptable. (NFPA 101)

c. Filing of strike plates shall be unacceptable. (NFPA 80) d. To avoid self-adhesive failure, due to stretching during installation self adhesive

frame seals shall be inelastic and shall not be subject to stretching. (Failure of a smoke seal voids listing of the opening).



e. Provide NGP 5050B.

3. Door Bottoms: Door sweeps used on exterior doors shall be NGP 100V as listed.

2.9 THRESHOLDS

A. General Requirements: ANSI/ BHMA A156.21

1. Except as otherwise indicated provide standard threshold units of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled.

2. Metal: Extruded aluminum; 6063-T5 alloy

a. Finish: Clear anodized; BHMA #628 (US27)

3. Provide thresholds that are 1” wider than depth of frame. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. NGP b. Burns c. Reese

2.10 AUXILIARY HARDWARE

A. Silencers: ANSI/ BHMA A156.16

1. Furnish tamper proof resilient cushions designed to absorb shock and noise at openings without gaskets.

2. Provide 3 silencers per single door, and 2 for pairs of doors. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hager: 307D b. Ives: SR64 c. Rockwood: 608

B. Wall Bumpers: 2 1/2” diameter; 1” nominal projection


a. Hager: 235W b. Ives: WS402CCV c. Rockwood: 403

C. Interior Floor-Mounted Stops: Dome stops with risers; 1” height


a. Hager: 241F b. Ives: FS13 c. Rockwood: 441



2.11 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED HARDWARE


1. Electrically operated locking devices shall be connected to building fire and smoke/heat alarm systems. Activation of alarm system shall disengage electric locking mechanism allowing free, unrestricted egress through opening.

2. Coordinate installation of electrically operated hardware to insure proper size wire is used to power load(s).

a. Voltage drop shall not exceed 5% of load’s stated voltage. b. Voltage drop shall be calculated by first determining resistance of load (R=E/I

voltage divided by AMP draw). Next, determine resistance of wire (per below chart). Divide this number by resistance of load. If result exceeds 5%, wire thickness shall be increased.

c. Wire length shall equal distance to load and back to supply (Lock 50 ft. from power supply; wire length = 100 ft.). Two loads powered by one pair of wires draw double current and have half (50%) of resistance.

Wire SizeResistance Per 1,000 Feet

12 Gauge 1.6 OHM 14 Gauge 2.5 OHM 16 Gauge 4.1 OHM 18 Gauge 6.4 OHM 20 Gauge 10.1 OHM 22 Gauge 16.0 OHM

3. Furnish electrically operated hardware with power supply units, junction boxes, and other accessories needed for a complete, efficient installation.

4. Power Supply Units:

a. Power supply units shall be designed for electromagnetic locks, electric locking or monitoring exit devices, and/or electric strikes as needed.

b. Output power shall be field selectable for either 24 volts DC at 1 ampere or 12 volts DC at 2 amperes. Input power shall be 120 volts AC at 0.6 ampere, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Units shall have a terminal block that shall accept 14 gauge stranded wire. d. Enclosure shall have not less than six, 1/2” knock-out holes for conduit connection.

B. Electric Strikes: ANSI/ BHMA A156.5, Grade 1

1. Electric strikes shall be listed by UL for fire door accessory and burglary resistance. 2. Strikes shall be for use with mortise locks without deadbolt or cylindrical locks on single

door; hollow metal or aluminum frame application. 3. Operation shall be fail-safe or fail-secure as listed. 4. Power Requirements: 24 VDC 5. Finish: BHMA #630 (US32D) 6. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Folger Adam: 310 Series b. Schlage: 9000 Series c. Von Duprin: 6000 Series



2.12 CYLINDERS, KEYING SYSTEMS AND KEY CONTROL


1. Meet with Architect and Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing. Keying schedule shall be established in compliance with specific requirements determined in consultation with Owner.

2. Cylinders shall be from same manufacturer as locks 3. Provide temporary construction keying system during construction period. Permanent

keys shall be furnished to Owner’s Representative prior to occupancy. Owner or Owner’s Security Agent will void operation of construction keys.

B. Cylinders:

1. Permanent cylinders shall be keyed by manufacturer and configured into sets or subsets, master keyed or great grand master keyed as directed by Owner.

2. Permanent keys and cylinders shall be marked with applicable blind code for identification. These visual key control marks or codes shall not include actual key cuts.

a. Key and cylinder identification stamping shall be approved by Architect and Owner. Failure to properly comply with these requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders and keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Key Material:

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard embossed keys of nickel silver to ensure durability. Key Quantity: Furnish keys in following quantities:

a. Master Keys: 6 per master group b. Change Keys:

(1) Locks Keyed Alike: 4 per set (2) Locks Keyed Different: 3 per lock

c. Key Blanks: 6 per cylinder d. Temporary Construction Master Keys: 12 total

2. Deliver end user exclusive permanent key blanks and other security keys directly to Owner’s representative from manufacturer by secure courier, return receipt requested. Failure to properly comply with these requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders and keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Locks, Cylinders and Keys: Best Access Systems – 7 Pin IC to Facility key system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Examine doors and frames with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.



2. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility

for satisfactory performance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation:

1. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series

a. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames in compliance with SDI 109

3.3 INSTALLATION


1. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturers’ written instructions using manufacturers supplied fasteners.

2. Securely install finish hardware items in compliance with accepted schedule and templates furnished with hardware.

3. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces. 4. Install locksets, surface mounted closers, and trim after finishing of doors and frames is

complete.

a. Where cutting and fitting is needed to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are to be painted or finished in another way later, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of door hardware with finishing work.

5. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

6. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in compliance with industry standards.

B. Mounting Heights:

1. Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

a. Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI A250.6

(1) DHI Publication Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

(2) DHI Publication Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames

C. Electrically Operated Hardware:

1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for wiring, grounding, and shielding. 2. Locate boxed power supplies as indicated or if not indicated, verify location with

Architect. 3. Provide one power supply for each door opening.



4. Provide least number of power supplies needed to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

D. Door Stops:

1. Door stops shall be furnished for every door leaf. Install floor-mounted or wall-mounted stops, as scheduled. Overhead door holder shall be provided where floor or wall stops cannot be used.

2. Place door stops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing, but do not present a hazard or obstruction. Furnish floor strikes for floor holders of proper height to engage holders of doors.

3. Floor stops shall be installed with risers as needed to accommodate finish flooring materials for proper relationship to door.

E. Thresholds:

1. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant in compliance with requirements specified in Division 7.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment:

1. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

2. Adjust electric strikes horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

3. Adjust door closer sweep period so that from an open position of 70 degrees door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3” from latch measured to leading edge of door.

B. Final Adjustment:

1. Return to Project during week prior to Substantial Completion and make final check and adjustment of hardware items.

2. Adjust hardware so doors operate in perfect order. Test and adjust hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding, or rattling. Adjust closers for proper, smooth operation.

3. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

C. Six Month Adjustment:

1. Approximately six months after Date of Substantial Completion, installer shall perform following:

a. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware and electrified door hardware.

b. Consult with, and instruct, Owner’s personnel on recommended maintenance procedures.

c. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation.



3.5 CLEANING

A. Exposed hardware shall be carefully cleaned by methods not injurious to finish, immediately preceding occupancy. Replace defective, damaged, or missing hardware.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as needed to restore proper function and finish.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware shall be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protect door hardware items from abuse, corrosion and other damage until Owner accepts Project as complete.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Hardware Sets: List of manufacturers represented in the hardware sets:

1. Hinges: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 2. Continuous Gear Hinges: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 3. Flush Bolts: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 4. Surface Bolts: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 5. Coordinators: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 6. Cylinder & Keys: Best Access - 317-849-2250 – www.bestaccess.com (BES) 7. Locksets & Latchsets: Best Access - 317-849-2250 – www.bestaccess.com (BES) 8. Exit Devices & FEH: Von Duprin – 317-897-9944 – www.vonduprin.com (VON) 9. Removable Mullions: Von Duprin – 317-897-9944 – www.vonduprin.com (VON) 10. Door Pulls: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 11. Push/Pull Bars: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 12. Concealed OH Closers: LCN – 800-526-2400 – www.lcnclosers.com (LCN) 13. Surface Closers: LCN – 800-526-2400 – www.lcnclosers.com (LCN) 14. Overhead Stop/Holders: Glynn-Johnson – 800-525-0336– www.glynn-johnson.com

(GJH) 15. Wall & Floor Stops: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 16. Protective Plates: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 17. Thresholds: National Guard Prod. – 800-647-7874 – www.ngpinc.com

(NGP) 18. Weatherstrip & Gasket: National Guard Prod. – 800-647-7874 – www.ngpinc.com

(NGP) 19. Silencers: H. B. Ives – 877-613-8766 – www.iveshardware.com (IVE) 20. Electric Strikes: Von Duprin – 317-897-9944 – www.vonduprin.com (VON) 21. Power Supplies: Schlage Electronic – 860-584-9158 – www.schlage.com (SCE)



HW SET: HW-02 DOOR NUMBER: TB105.02 EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE BOLT SB454-12-TB 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9875L-BE 996L-BE 06 626 VON 1 ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MFG 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP2 EA DOOR SWEEP 100VA AL NGP1 EA THRESHOLD 896V AL NGP



GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. *Basis of Design

f. PABCO Gypsum. g. USG Corporation.

B. Type X: *Basis of Design

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint.



2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

C. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: typical for Vertical surfaces, and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:



1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicate.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. b. All surfaces exposed to view are to be primed and painted to match adjacent

existing to remain.

2. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.



B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1

SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Product test reports.

B. Evaluation reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.



2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

C. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: To match existing acoustical panel ceiling system to remain, provide USG Radar ClimaPlus Panel SLT 2’ x 2’ x 5/8”, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. *Basis of Design

B. Classification: Type III, Form 2, Pattern C, D, or E.

C. Color: White.

D. LR: 0.84.

E. NRC: 0.55, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.

F. CAC: 33.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members, Shadowline tapered.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, to match existing acoustical panel ceiling system to remain, provide USG Donn DX 15/16” or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. *Basis of Design



B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

D. Exposed Edge Trim: Basis of Design is USG Compasso Edge Trim 2-1/4” x 9/16” metal pans. Pans and splice plates roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted; with attachment clips hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation

1. Trim Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 2. Base metal thickness: 24 gauge. 3. Profile: Flat, 2-1/4” wide face with 9/16” horizontal legs.

a. Corner trim pieces: manufactured piece to match edge trim profile and finish. 4. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel finish, to match suspension grid – white

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.



SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 09852 - 1

SECTION 09852 - SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 3. Fire Growth Contribution: Tested according to NFPA 286.

1.2 WARRANTY

A. Materials and Workmanship: Two years minimum.

1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Fabric: 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than enough fabric to recover two typical panesl of each fabric, if used.

B. Mounting Devices: Ten percent of amount installed, but no fewer than eight devices.

1.4 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard construction; for standard fabric-wrapped panels: with facing material stretched over core.

B. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panels:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: TECTUM Inc., Wall Panel, Standard Tectum Tile, Panel Type 1000 (or greater) nominal thickness 1-1/2” or Panel Type 500 (or greater) nominal thickness 2”.

2. Mounting: Manufacturer’s standard recommended method back- or face-mounted on furring channels.

3. Core Materials: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Edge Construction: Manufacturer’s standard metal or PVC, except wood frame not

allowed. 5. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square. 6. Facing Material: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of not less than 0.60. 8. Nominal Core Thickness: 1-1/2 inches minimum. 9. Panel Width: 24 inches nominal. 10. Panel Height: 48 inches.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 1

SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU) 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Aluminum


1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.




A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. M.A.B. Paints. 4. Porter Paints. 5. Rose Talbert



6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: To match existing adjacent to remain.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17.


2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.


B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1.

C. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.


2.6 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS

A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Gloss): MPI #9 (Gloss Level 6).




2.7 ALUMINUM PAINT

A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.



D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-



paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1A.

a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat).

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).

2. Aluminum Paint System: MPI EXT 5.1K.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.



b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H.

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (gloss).

E. Aluminum Substrates:

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).



INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board.


1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

2. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:



1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Duron, Inc. 3. Porter Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 6. Rose Talbert



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect.



2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.


2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.


2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.


B. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.


2.6 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.


2.7 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 0.5.

B. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg).


2.8 ALUMINUM PAINT

A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.




2.9 FLOOR COATINGS

A. Interior Concrete Floor Stain: MPI #58.


B. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.



1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.



B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work:

a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

b. Conduit.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.




A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Alkyd Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Topcoat: Interior alkyd dry fog/fall.

2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss).

3. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.1M.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint.



c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J.

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss).

2. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.3G.

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.

E. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss).

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).



FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520- 1

SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style,

and details of installation.

B. Maintenance data.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.



b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six (6) years from date established in Specification Section 01770 “Closeout Procedures”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick.

2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 2. JL Industries, Inc. * Basis of Design to match existing 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

C. Regular Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 10-B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, with sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. Provide (25) with recessed cabinets

D. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. Provide (3) with bracket mounts.

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Manufacturers:

1. JL Industries, Inc. *Basis of design to match existing 2. Kidde Fyrnetics. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.



B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

D. Cabinet Material Stainless-steel sheet.

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch

F. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet

G. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

H. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

I. Door Glazing: Tempered break glass

J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch 2. Provide concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

K. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.

3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

4. Door Lock: Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets. 5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,

size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER.

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical

L. Finishes:

1. Stainless Steel: Satin, directional polish, No. 6.



2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries, Inc. *Basis of Design to match existing 8. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 9. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

1. Color: Black.

C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

C. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

D. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

F. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

G. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

H. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair.



BAGGAGE CONVEYORS 14540-1

Ticketing “B” Inline System St Petersburg-Clearwater International Airport (PIE)

1 Contents

PART 1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 5

1.01 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 5

M. Permits ...................................................................................................................................... 5

N. Related Documents ................................................................................................................... 6

1.02 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 6

A. System Description ....................................................................................................................... 6

B. Labor ............................................................................................................................................. 7

C. New System Requirements ....................................................................................................... 7

1.03 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................. 9

A. General .......................................................................................................................................... 9

B. Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................. 10

1.04 SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................................................... 13

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................... 14

A. Standards ..................................................................................................................................... 14

B. Workmanship .............................................................................................................................. 15

C. Schedule Management ............................................................................................................ 16

D. Alternative Materials ............................................................................................................... 16

E. Factory Acceptance Test ............................................................................................................. 16

F. Noise Level ................................................................................................................................. 16

G. Radio Frequency Interference: ................................................................................................ 17

1.06 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................... 17

A. Conditions ................................................................................................................................... 17

B. Bid Proposal ................................................................................................................................ 17

C. Submit to the Engineer ............................................................................................................ 18

D. Structural Attachment ............................................................................................................. 19

E. Drawings for Review .................................................................................................................. 19

F. Submittal Deadlines .................................................................................................................... 20

G. Master Schedule Contents ....................................................................................................... 22

H. Test & Inspection Program ..................................................................................................... 22

I. Maintenance Inspection and Lubrication Chart .......................................................................... 23

J. Weekly Updates .......................................................................................................................... 23



K. Meetings/Scheduling ................................................................................................................... 23

L. Test Reports ................................................................................................................................ 23

M. Substitutions ............................................................................................................................ 23

N. List of Lubricants .................................................................................................................... 24

O. Final Parts List ........................................................................................................................ 24

P. Computer/Software/Hardware Inventory .................................................................................... 24

Q. Computer Log ......................................................................................................................... 24

1.07 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................................. 24

PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 26

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ....................................................................................... 26

2.02 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 26

A. Bearings ...................................................................................................................................... 26

B. Belting ......................................................................................................................................... 26

C. Brakes ..................................................................................................................................... 26

D. Diverters .................................................................................................................................. 26

E. Fire/Security Doors ..................................................................................................................... 27

F. Hour Meters ................................................................................................................................ 27

G. 45° Merge/Take-away ............................................................................................................. 27

H. MCP Cabinet ........................................................................................................................... 27

I. Motor Starters ............................................................................................................................. 27

J. Motorized Pulleys ....................................................................................................................... 27

K. Motors ......................................................................................................................................... 27

L. PLCs ............................................................................................................................................ 27

M. Photoelectric Controls ............................................................................................................. 28

N. Reducers .................................................................................................................................. 28

O. Roller Chain ............................................................................................................................ 28

P. Signaling/Alarms ........................................................................................................................ 28

Q. Turns ....................................................................................................................................... 28

R. UPS/Battery back-up............................................................................................................... 28

S. VFD............................................................................................................................................. 28

2.03 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 28

2.04 BELT CONVEYOR GENERAL ................................................................................................ 29

A. Equipment ................................................................................................................................... 29

B. Baggage Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 29

C. Design Loads .......................................................................................................................... 30

D. Clearances and Configuration ................................................................................................. 30



E. Maintainability ............................................................................................................................ 30

F. Vibration ..................................................................................................................................... 31

G. Speeds ..................................................................................................................................... 31

H. Ancillary Items ........................................................................................................................ 31

I. Reducers ...................................................................................................................................... 32

J. Motors ......................................................................................................................................... 32

K. General Drive Requirements ....................................................................................................... 32

L. Pulley Assemblies ....................................................................................................................... 33

M. Bearings .................................................................................................................................. 36

N. Conveyor Bed Frame .............................................................................................................. 36

O. Side Guards ............................................................................................................................. 37

P. Protective Guarding .................................................................................................................... 38

Q. Stainless Steel Trim ................................................................................................................ 38

S. Fire Door ..................................................................................................................................... 38

T. Impact Protection ........................................................................................................................ 39

U. 45 Degree Merge Unit ............................................................................................................. 40

V. High Speed Diverter (HSD) ........................................................................................................ 40

W. Conveyor Turns (Power Turns) .............................................................................................. 41

X. Queue Conveyor ......................................................................................................................... 41

Y. Floor Supports ............................................................................................................................. 41

Z. Transfer Plates ............................................................................................................................ 42

AA. Roller Conveyor ...................................................................................................................... 42

BB. Directional Input Device ......................................................................................................... 42

2.05 EXPLOSIVE DETECTION SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 43

2.06 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS .................................................................................................. 43

2.07 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 44

2.08 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................. 44

A. General Requirements ................................................................................................................. 44

B. Outbound System ........................................................................................................................ 44

C. EDS Security Screening System ............................................................................................. 45

2.09 OVER-SIZE DETECTION ......................................................................................................... 49

PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 50

3.01 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................... 50

3.02 TESTS AND RECORDS ............................................................................................................ 50

A. No-Load Test .............................................................................................................................. 50

B. Load Test .................................................................................................................................... 51



C. Alignment ............................................................................................................................... 51

D. Run Test .................................................................................................................................. 51

E. TEST OPERATION ................................................................................................................... 51

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL .................................................................... 51

B. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 51

C. System Description and Operation ......................................................................................... 51

D. Operating Instructions ............................................................................................................. 52

E. Preventative Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 52

F. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 52

G. Parts List/Recommended Spares List ..................................................................................... 52

H. Glossary of Terms and Symbols Manufacturers’ Literature ................................................... 53

PART 4 PAYMENT AND REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 54

4.01 PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................. 54

4.02 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 54

A. Conditions ................................................................................................................................... 54

B. Accident Prevention .................................................................................................................... 54



PART 1 GENERAL

1 .01 GENERAL

A. These Specifications combined with the Contract Drawings comprise the Contract documents and minimum requirements for this project. If any discrepancies are found between the specifications and drawings the stricter requirement shall apply. This includes but is not limited to potential conflicts between the contract documents and any applicable code or standard. This includes but is not limited to potential conflicts between the contract documents and any applicable code or standard.

B. The provisions and intent of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to this work in this section.

C. The lengths and sizes are approximate and must be verified by the contractor prior to preparation and submittal of shop drawings for the Engineer’s review and comment.

D. Sequence of Operation shall be submitted to be reviewed for TSA compliance.

E. BHS contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and facilities and execute all tasks associated with this statement of work.

F. BHS contractor shall be responsible for requesting and obtaining existing condition drawings including architectural, MEP, structural and phasing. Coordinate final equipment locations with architectural, MEP and structural drawings. Layout before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Provide coordination as required for installation in a neat and workmanlike manner.

G. The Contract Documents show purpose and intent only (not complete in every detail). Contractor shall comply with the Contract Documents true intent and meaning and shall not exploit any manifestation of error, omission, discrepancy or ambiguity which appears in the Contract Documents or Work performed by others.

H. The Owner or his representative does not guarantee the accuracy or the completeness of the utility services, facilities, or structures information shown on the drawings or encountered in the work.

I. Equipment, parts or material deemed equal to those specified are subject to approval by the Owner or his representative.

J. These contract documents are is confidential and may well be legally privileged. Please do not copy or distribute for any purpose, or disclose its contents without the written consent of the owner or the owner’s representative.

K. Contractor employees must be US Citizens or Legal Permanent Residents.

L. Give all notices, file all Plans, pay all fees, obtain all permits and approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Include all fees and taxes (Federal, State, and Local) in the Bid Price.

M. Permits



1. The Permit Applicant shall not commence performance of any work prior to posting a fully executed and approved copy of the Permit in a visible location convenient to the site of the work. The issuance or granting of a permit or approval of plans and specifications shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the St. Petersburg Clearwater International Airport Construction and Fire Prevention Standards or the Codes.

2. No permit presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of these Standards and Codes shall be valid. The issuance of a permit based upon plans, specifications and other data shall not prevent the Building Official or Fire Chief from thereafter requiring the correction of errors in plans, specifications and other data, or from preventing building operations being carried on when in violation of the referenced Standards and Codes.

3. The Permit Applicant shall comply with such Federal, State and local laws, statutes, orders and regulations as may be legally applicable to the work to be performed under the Permit. The Permit Applicant shall protect the lives and health of the public and comply with all safety standards required by Federal, State and local law and any additional standards customarily employed in connection with the type of work being performed or the conditions at the site.

N. Related Documents

1. TSA Independent Verification and Validation (IV&V) Checked Baggage Inspection System Performance and Commissioning requirements.

2. Planning Guidelines and Design Standards (PGDS) for Checked Baggage Inspection Systems, (current version at time of NTP).

3. Site Specific Test Plan (SSTP) for the Checked Baggage Inspection System (CBIS) Performance and Commissioning Requirements. TSA will generate the actual site specific document for the project 30-45 days after submission of the shop drawings. This may require programming modifications that will be required for acceptance of the system. The Contractor shall include this time requirement in their schedule and appropriate general conditions required to accommodate this project requirement. Onsite testing by Battelle will be required prior to acceptance of the system, and a minimum of two weeks should be included for testing of the integrated conveyor system; additional testing maybe required if the system does not meet the TSA requirements and acceptance criteria.

4. BHS contractor shall perform his own SSTP prior to Battelle testing.

5. Contractor shall contact the appropriate firm or supplier to request the necessary documents required for coordination, testing, interface and reference purposes.

1 .02 SUMMARY

A. System Description



1. The belt conveyor system(s) being installed in this project consist a mini-inline CBIS system transporting baggage from a ticket counter to primary and secondary EDS machines then to a baggage makeup area.

2. The outbound baggage system consists of an existing ticket counter (to be modified) that transports checked baggage to the new TSA screening area. The main line transports baggage to an L3 screening machine. From the screening machine, cleared baggage is transported to an existing flat plate make-up unit in the bag room. Suspect, alarm and unknown bags will be transported to a CBRA area where they will be removed from the conveyor by TSA agents. Ticket counter conveyors will be modified to run in the reverse direction to feed a secondary screening line. The secondary line will transport baggage to a CT-80 screening machine. From the screening machine cleared bags will be manually transported to the existing flat plate make-up unit. Suspect, alarm and unknown bags will be removed from the conveyor by TSA agents. Baggage that is too large for the screening equipment will be measured after the ticket counter and stopped on a queue preceding the L3 machine. A warning beacon and audible alarm shall be activated when the bag stops as an alert. The bag will then be removed from the conveyor system by TSA agents.

3. Dynamic merging shall be used. Using the average bag length stated in the specification, the make-up unit shall hold 25 bags when completely loaded from the merge unit.

B. Labor

1. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and facilities to execute all tasks associated with this statement of work.

C. New System Requirements

1. Modification of existing tickets counter conveyor as required.

2. Provision of new conveyors with ancillary components from the ticket counter to the existing make-up unit including power turns, and merges as defined on the Engineering Design Drawing. This includes all transport conveyors from the ticket counter to the flat plate make-up unit and from the ticket counter to the CT-80 screening machine.

3. Provision of a vertical paddle diverter for sortation of cleared bags and other all other baggage after the main screening machine.

4. Integrate the L3 and CT-80 into the BHS system.

5. Provide the control station at the CBRA area.

6. Provide roller conveyors and ball tables as shown on the contract drawings.

7. Provide 9” hinged side guards at the two queue conveyors immediately preceding the L3 screening machine. The side guards shall be able to lock in place (normal vertical configuration) or rotate downwards 90° on the hinges. The force required to raise or lower the side guards shall not



be greater than ten (10) pounds. Low profile photo eyes shall be used at hinged shelf. Provide send model #, cut sheet and detailed drawings.

8. Provide new electrical components with “quick disconnect” equipment to provide for easily removable conveyor components for EDS machine removal/replacement. Easily removable conveyors shall have caster wheels on the floor support legs. Casters shall be selected to be locking and able to support the combined baggage live load plus the weight of the associated conveyor and drive.

9. Demolish existing MCP and provide a new MCP for all new CBIS conveyors, existing ticket counter and existing flat plate make-up. Provide a secondary main control panel device needed with reset capability near the L-3 machine.

10. Provide interface with TSA office / IT room in ticketing ‘B’.

11. Provide secondary conveyor pass-thru roller bed. Modify existing stainless steel ticket counter to have an easily removable section at the pass-thru. Provide a motor operated fire door with a stainless steel door buck at the pass-thru.

12. Provide new fire door(s) where indicated on the contract drawings. Control all fire doors on the BHS system from the new MCP.

13. Provide new control systems and all necessary ancillary hardware as required for system operation. Provide photo eyes and corresponding alerts at all jam points.

14. Provide all components and equipment specified and required to complete the scope of work in the contract documents. All components shall be standard products and conform to the system layout. No item or design for the baggage system shall constitute a change order.

15. Coordinate with the Owner (or his representative) and the TSA for scheduling the transportation of the EDS machines (by others) to their final location.

D. Revise controls for the ticket counter allowing belts to run in both directions. Tie in controls for the make-up unit and fire/security doors with the rest of the system.

E. The Period of Performance shall begin upon contract award.

F. The extent of the slider-bed belt conveyor and make-up device work is shown on the drawings and is hereby defined to include (but not by way of limitations) the drives, belting, roller assemblies, frame, supports, control devices, control panels, electrical wiring both permanent and temporary, safety guards and side guard cabling, make-up devices and equipment necessary to complete the Work. The Contractor shall provide new belt conveyors and equipment of U.S.A. manufacture, or manufactured to standard U.S.A. sizes and dimensions. The length for the various conveyor sections are indicated on the system drawings. The lengths and sizes are approximate and must be verified by the contractor prior to preparation and submittal of shop drawings for the Engineer’s review and comment.



1 .03 DEFINITIONS

A. General

1. As Built shall comprise all elements of the term As Executed.

2. Baggage Handling System shall mean all components, installation materials, interfaces, other components, necessary hardware, software, installation coordination and construction supervision of computers, PLCs, controls, control hardware, control software, management and support services required to implement the work and supply a fully functioning system as described by the Contract Documents.

3. Baggage Handling System Contractor shall mean the firm or company responsible for the design, engineering, manufacture, integration, and installation of the conveyor equipment and systems required to implement the work and supply a fully functioning system as described by the Contract Documents.

4. Completion shall mean: the stage of the execution of the Work under the Contract when the Works and all other things are completed, performed and accepted

5. Control System shall mean the means and methods of controlling all conveyors and sortation devices in the BHS.

6. Contract means this Deed of Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor for the performance of the Works, including all schedules, attachments, annexure and other documents incorporated into this Contract.

7. Construction Manager shall mean a firm or person or such other manager as may be appointed by the Owner for the purpose of managing the Contract or his nominated representatives.

8. Contract Sum means: the lump sum (where the Owner accepted a lump sum), the sum determined by adding the products of the rates and the corresponding quantities in the Schedule of Rates (Where the Owner accepted rates), the combination of the sums (where the Owner accepted a lump sum and rates)

9. Date for Completion shall mean: completion date stated in contract, the last day of a completion time period stated in the contract, the date certified by the Owner in a Certificate of Completion representing the date which the Works have reached completion. If an extension for the time of completion is granted by the Owner then it means the date resulting from the extension of time.

10. Day means a calendar day.

11. Other(s) shall mean a firm or person separate from the BHS Contractor who shall enter or has entered into a Contract with the Owner.

12. Schedule of Rates shall mean any schedule included in the Contract which shows the rate or respective rates of payment for execution of that work and which may also include provisional items, sums, quantities and



prices. The schedules of rates are fixed sums for the duration of the Contract with the Owner.

13. Site means the area made available or to be made available to the Contractor by the Owner for the purpose of the Contract and/or Work.

14. Specifications means the Specification for the Works included in the Contract and any revision of such Specification thereafter.

15. Subsystem shall mean a set conveyor segments and its related field elements (control stations, consoles, scanners, etc.), which is a system itself, and a part of the whole system

16. Temporary Work shall mean any work required for the execution of the Contract but not forming part of the final Work.

17. The Contract Drawings shall mean the drawings referred to in these written Specifications or The Contract; the Owner may supply revisions of those drawings and other drawings to the Contractor for the purposes of the Contract.

18. The Works shall mean the whole of the obligation to be executed in accordance with the Contract, including variations provided for by the Contract.

19. Work under the Contract shall mean any work the BHS Contractor is or may be required to execute per the Contract including variations, remedial work and temporary work.

B. Abbreviations

1. ACS shall mean Access Control System

2. ANSI shall mean American National Standards Institute

3. ASCII shall mean American Standard Code for Information Interchange

4. AOA shall mean Airport Operations Area

5. ATO shall mean Airline Ticket Office

6. ATR shall mean Automatic Tag Reader

7. BHS shall mean Baggage Handling System

8. BHS Contractor or Contractor shall mean Baggage Handling System Contractor

9. BMTT shall mean Bag Maximum Travel Time

10. BPM shall mean Baggage Processing Message

11. BSM shall mean Baggage Source Message. Information relayed from airline computer system to BHS computers.

12. BSO shall mean Baggage Service Office

13. BUM shall mean Baggage Unload Message

14. BVS shall mean Baggage Viewing Stations.

15. CB shall mean Clear Bag



16. CBS shall mean Checked Baggage Screening

17. CBIS shall mean Checked Baggage Inspection System

18. CEMA shall mean Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association

19. CM shall mean Construction Manager

20. COF shall mean Coefficient of Friction

21. Cold Back-up shall mean redundancy based on the removal of a failed primary component and replacement with a fully programmed component.

22. CT shall mean Computed Tomography

23. CTO shall mean the TSA’s Chief Technology Office

24. CUTE shall mean Common User Terminal Equipment

25. DCH shall mean Data Communication Highway. Communication line between peripheral devices including PLCs and computer systems.

26. DID shall mean Directional Input Device

27. DVD shall mean Digital Video Disk

28. EDS Shall mean Explosive Detection System

29. EPROM shall mean Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

30. EOD shall mean Explosives Ordinance Disposal

31. ETD shall mean Explosive Trace Detection

32. FAA shall mean Federal Aviation Administration

33. FAT shall mean Factory Acceptance Test

34. FLA shall mean Full Load Amperage

35. FPM shall mean Feet Per Minute

36. GC shall mean General Contractor

37. GOVT shall mean Guaranteed Operator View Time

38. GSE shall mean Ground Service Equipment

39. HBS shall mean Hold Bag Screening

40. HDD shall mean Hard Disk Drive

41. HMI shall mean Human Machine Interface.

42. Hot Back-up shall mean that in the event of a failure of the primary component the hot back up component shall retain the latest current status of the related system (ex: tracking information) and shall assume full operation. Hot back up of components shall provide automatic and seamless transfer of information when primary component failure occurs.

43. HSD shall mean High Speed Diverter

44. HVAC shall mean Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

45. IATA shall mean International Airline Transportation Association



46. ID shall mean Identification

47. IEC shall mean International Electromechanical Commission

48. I/O shall mean input/output

49. IV&V shall mean Independent Verification and Validation

50. LAN shall mean Local Area Network

51. LCD shall mean Liquid Crystal Display

52. LED shall mean Light Emitting Diode

53. MCP shall mean Motor Control Panel

54. MEP shall mean Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing System

55. MIS shall mean Maintenance Information System

56. MTBF shall mean - Mean Time Between Failures

57. NEC shall mean National Electrical Code

58. NEMA shall mean National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association

59. NFPA shall mean National Fire Protection Association

60. NIC shall mean Not In Contract

61. NRT shall mean Near Real Time

62. NTP shall mean Notice to Proceed

63. O & M shall mean Operations and Maintenance

64. OEM shall mean Original Equipment Manufacturer

65. OOG shall mean Out of Gauge

66. ORT shall mean Operational Readiness Test

67. OSHA shall mean Occupational Safety and Health Administration

68. OSR shall mean On-Screen Resolution

69. Owner shall mean St. Petersburg-Clearwater International Airport (PIE)

70. PAX shall mean Passenger

71. PDP shall mean Power Distribution Point

72. PE shall mean Professional Engineer

73. PGDS shall mean Planning Guidelines and Design Standards for Checked Baggage Inspection Systems (current version at time of NTP)

74. PLC shall mean Programmable Logic Controller

75. PM shall mean Program (project) Manager

76. PSI shall mean Pounds per Square Inch

77. PTRI shall mean Passive Threat Resolution Interface

78. RFI shall mean Request For Information

79. ROW shall mean Right of Way



80. RT shall mean Real Time

81. SAC shall mean sort allocation computer

82. SAT shall mean Site Acceptance Testing

83. SB shall mean Suspect Bag

84. SSTP shall mean Site Specific Test Plan (prepared by the TSA’s representative)

85. TCU shall mean Threat Containment Unit

86. TOB shall mean Top of Belt

87. TRI shall mean Threat Resolution Interface

88. TRT shall mean Threat Resolution Tools

89. TRR shall mean Test Readiness Review – shall be performed by the BHS contractor in conjunction and coordination with the Airport’s Security, TSA’s CTO and local TSA representatives to demonstrate that the system meets all of the requirements of the TSA/IV&V Contractor CBIS performance and commissioning requirements, per the TSA’s PGDS, as well as the intent of the TSA’s Site Specific Test Plan (SSTP).

90. TSA shall mean Transportation Security Administration

91. UL shall mean Underwriters Laboratories

92. UPS shall mean Uninterrupted Power Supply

93. USS shall mean Uniform Symbology Specification

94. VOM shall mean Volt Ohm Meter

95. VSC shall mean Vertical Sort Conveyor

96. WAN shall mean Wide Area Network

97. Warm Back-up shall mean that in the event of a primary component failure the warm back up has to be manually switched to become the primary component

1 .04 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work provided under this specifications section shall include all labor, materials, permits, inspections and re-inspection fees, tools, equipment, transportation, insurance, temporary protection, temporary lighting, supervision and incidental items required for proper installation and operation, even though not specifically indicated but which are typically provided or are required for proper installation and operation of all systems as indicated in the contract documents.

B. Provide and assemble and platforms, partitions, lights, barriers, warning devices or other items required for protection of any persons in the proximity of the work.

C. Provide a complete, operable, maintainable and safe system on a "turnkey basis", including all supports, anchors, framing, trim, electrical power to the BHS systems from power drop points (such as but not limited to disconnect, wiring,



and conduits), motors, motor starters, disconnects, controls, push buttons, conduit, wiring, cabinets, platforms, ladders, stairs, crossovers and all other components, whether specifically shown or implied in the plans and specifications or as required to effectively accomplish the intended functions of the BHS.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for its costs to administer a Request for Information (RFI) system throughout the duration of the Contract. Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation or time unless the cause and impacts of each RFI are identified and attributable to parties other than the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Airport Authority’s administrative costs for answering RFIs that could reasonably be found by reviewing the Contract Documents or are solely for the convenience of the Contractor. Those costs may be deducted from progress payments.

E. Contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions, elevations and quantities prior to fabrication. No extra charge or compensation over and above payment for the actual quantities or dimensions of the various items of work at the respective bid prices is permitted. Any difference shall be submitted to the owner's representative for consideration before proceeding with the Work no later than five (5) calendar days after discovery. Quantities noted in the proposal schedules are estimates only.

F. BHS Contractor shall schedule work to accommodate the TSA schedule for delivering and installing screening machine(s).

G. Repair or replace any fireproofing materials removed during the installation of the BHS system or ancillary items.

H. The equipment shall be capable of conveying baggage of various shapes and sizes with dimensions generally not exceeding 30 inches in height and 24 inches in width. The length of an item of baggage, in general, will not exceed 54 inches.

1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards

1. The Contractor shall establish, implement, and maintain a documented quality assurance system in accordance (with ANSI/ISO/ASQ Q9001:2008), as a means of assuring compliance with all requirements of the Contract. The Contractor shall pass the appropriate Contract requirements down to its sub-suppliers to ensure compliance with the Contract. The Contractor shall require that sub-suppliers have an appropriate documented quality system that controls the quality of the services and supplies provided. The Contractor shall identify a single point of contact for all communication on quality-related issues. The Contractor shall identify the quality representative who is responsible for accomplishment of all quality assurance tasks required by this statement of work. The Contractor's Quality manager shall be prepared at all times to present and discuss the status of quality activities, requirements, and problems.

2. The equipment covered by these specifications shall be designed, assembled and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards



of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturer’s Association (CEMA) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL). All materials furnished shall be new, free from defects and UL labeled where such approval is granted to the equipment to be furnished. In addition to the above requirements, all applicable equipment shall conform to the most recently published applicable federal specifications and applicable OSHA and WISHA specifications.

3. Contractor shall document and provide a minimum of 5 years successful experiencing installing and integrating not less than 8 of systems of similar size and complexity, including L3 baggage screening equipment.

4. TSA to offer suggested contract language.

5. All electrical work shall be done in accordance with the latest applicable municipal electrical code and N.E.C., whichever is more stringent.

6. Acceptance standards for weld performance and application shall be in accordance with the specifications for structural welding AWS D 1.1-88 and other applicable AWS specifications.

7. Fasteners shall be stainless steel (public areas), cadmium plated or zinc plated, locked with lock washers or lock nuts.

8. Stainless Steel Trim: AISC type 304 #4 Brush Finish

9. Structural Steel: ASTM A-36

10. Lumber (FR-S Rated Fire retardant: Interior): Type A requirements and AWPA Standard C-20.

11. Plywood (FR-S Rated Fire retardant): Inter Type A requirements in AWPA Standard C-27.

B. Workmanship

1. Use the best trade methods throughout. Correct or replace work evidencing substandard workmanship, as directed by the Engineer.

2. All work shall comply with the current applicable ASTM and AWS standards.

3. Execute workmanship in accordance with the best commercial practices consistent with heavy-duty, airline applications.

4. Keep areas to be welded free from rust, grease or other foreign matter for a distance of at least 1/2-inch back from the edge of the weld.

5. After the welds are deposited, clean them of slag and spatter to show uniform sections, smoothness of metal, feather edges without overlap or undercut and freedom from porosity and clinkers. Visual inspection at edges and ends of welds should indicate good fusion with the base metal. Repair all pinholes, cracks and other defects by chipping and grinding out the defects to sound metal and re-welding.

6. Make all fillet welds a minimum of 1/8 inch unless otherwise noted on the drawings.



C. Schedule Management

1. As part of each Project Plan, the Contractor shall establish and maintain a schedule of major activities that identify subordinate-tier activities, dependencies between task activities, and milestones required to demonstrate successful completion of the effort. Schedule days must be defined as “Standard Work Day and Standard Work Week”.

2. This schedule shall be developed and maintained using Microsoft Project 2003 or higher.

3. The schedules shall also identify the criteria required to satisfy milestone requirements, which enable the Contractor to proceed with follow-on activities.

4. Baseline schedules shall be updated monthly to coincide with the date of the reporting period or as otherwise required by tasking.

D. Alternative Materials

1. Alternative materials shall not be utilized without approval of the Owner or the owner’s representative.

E. Factory Acceptance Test

1. The BHS Contractor shall show analysis & simulation at the Factory Acceptance Testing that the system as designed by the BHS Contractor meets the minimum performance criteria as per this specification.

2. The BHS Contractor shall host the Owner or his representative at their facility for a demonstration of the controls systems software, sortation and maintenance diagnostics computer software/hardware interfaces with other airport systems and devices and operator interfaces. The BHS contractor shall submit to the Owner or his representative a Factory Acceptance Testing agenda, based on the previously submitted Functional Specification and System Acceptance Test Plan, for review and approval.

3. The Factory Acceptance Testing shall take place prior to the computer software and associated hardware on-site installation.

4. Items inadequate identified during the Factory Acceptance Test shall be corrected prior to installation. The BHS Contractor assumes responsibility for any additional cost and must maintain the schedule of work. If the BHS Contractor was not able to demonstrate all facets of the Factory Acceptance Testing, or provided documents stating that they had performed the tests internally prior to the Owner’s or his representative arrival, The Owner reserves the right to back charge the BHS Contractor for the time and expenses of attendees on the Owner’s behalf if the BHS Contractor is not able to completely demonstrate the Factory Acceptance Testing.

F. Noise Level

1. BHS equipment shall not increase the ambient noise level by more than 15 dB (A) and the bag room and all other associated non-public areas



shall not exceed 75 dB (A). Ambient noise levels for the BHS equipment shall not exceed OSHA standards.

G. Radio Frequency Interference:

1. Install suitable filtering and suppression to bring radio interference under control.

1 .06 SUBMITTALS

A. Conditions

1. All submittals shall be in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and prepared in the English language.

B. Bid Proposal

1. The BHS Contractor is expected to have studied the system design and requirements presented in both the drawings and specification and accepted the design and requirements as suitable and viable to safely accomplish the functions and processes described. In the bid submission the BHS Contractor shall identify any design aspect or specification requirement that is believed to be unsuitable or inadequate and shall propose alternate solutions to alleviate the potential problem but shall, in all cases, include in the bid submittal pricing for the base system presented in the drawings. Any alternate designs/layouts, proposed by the BHS Contractor must meet or exceed the design criteria as listed in the specifications.

2. In the proposal submission include the following items:

(a.) System Price Schedule and Unit Price Schedule

(b.) Any exceptions to these specifications, drawings or contract terms in a separate section titled “Exceptions”.

(c.) Type and duration of the proposed training program if different to the minimum requirements as listed in the specifications

(d.) Allocation to purchase items from the Estimated Spare parts list as detailed in the contract documents

(e.) Identification of any requirements more stringent than what is shown in the Specifications (if any).

(f.) Notification of any potential safety hazard with specified design of system or its components.

(g.) Notification if an adjustment of the Contractor's Submittal Deadlines is necessary.

(h.) Proposed equipment of non-standard design and equipment substitutions including data, shop drawings and test results.

(i.) Define the technical support to be provided during testing, conditional acceptance phase and after Final Acceptance.



(j.) The BHS Contractors requirements for lay down areas include line item cost for offsite storage (if required).

(k.) Project schedule outline by phase for the implementation of the BHS.

(l.) List of related projects including client, location, type of work, date completed and overall cost.

(m.) List staff with resumes and qualifications that shall be working on this project. Include on-site and off-site participating staff and corresponding job function. The Owner reserves the right to approve or reject key personnel from the list.

(n.) Provide a line item cost for all BHS related acceptance testing including all required IV&V, SAT testing. Indicate the types and quantities of required testing material as well as manpower.

(o.) Provide a line item cost for any EDS Equipment maneuvering

(p.) Provide a line item cost for any additional onsite support after final acceptance (if required).

(q.) Demonstrated acknowledgement and comprehension of TSA BGDS CBIS guidelines

C. Submit to the Engineer

1. Submit shop drawings and catalog data of all equipment to be furnished. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to: (a.) Layout plan of system(s) with dimensions and elevations with

components tied to the bill of materials list. Section/Elevation drawings of the system(s) keyed to the layout with components tied to the bill of materials list. Building and other systems shown in the background for coordination.

(b.) Location, type and load of supports and lateral bracing; additional steel members necessary to support conveyors.

(c.) Front, side and section views of all conveyor components

(d.) Location, dimensions and rating of drive units

(e.) Method of attaching adjacent conveyor sections

(f.) Bill of materials with catalog and part number

(g.) Detail of drive, take-up, end roller and break-over assemblies

(h.) Detail of stainless steel conveyor shrouding and/or custom equipment

(i.) Other details as may be necessary and/or requested by the Engineer

(j.) Bill of material indicating conveyor unit number, speed, motor HP, guard type, curve angle, live load, reducer size

(k.) Access panel locations and details



(l.) Product data cut sheets for all mechanical and electrical components provided for this work. Equipment provided for this Work shall be indicated appropriately with arrows, where multiple items are shown in the data. Product data shall be submitted prior to shop drawing submission. After approval, no variations from the submittal data will be permitted except by written consent of the Owner’s representative. The information shall be compiled in “presentation” type “D” ring binders and include revision notes, table of contents and index tabs. Products shall include but not be limited to: gear reducers, motors, bearings, pulleys, rollers, motorized pulleys, belting, chain, sprockets, belts, sheaves, queuing conveyors, merge conveyors, power turns, HSDs, vertical sort/merge, wiring devices, control devices, soft starts, brakes, VFDs, PLCs, power regulators, computer equipment, video devices, flat plate devices, inclined plate devices, BDDs, DIDs, ATRs, manual encode, scan guns, computers

(m.) Phasing plan for each subsystem with a description of the work and required staffing.

(n.) Submit 3 draft copies of baggage systems warranty for complete operating baggage handling systems for Owner’s review.

(o.) Submit recommended and critical spare parts lists no later than 60 days prior to final testing.

(p.) Submit a draft copy of the training outline and program for on-site staff to the Owner’s Representative 60 days prior to the start-up of the system(s) for review and approval. A training video with narration shall also be provided.

(q.) Upon Contractor's completion of the final punch list, transfer all "As-Built" conditions and to a reproducible set of drawings. Submit three (3) sets of full size drawings and one (1) set of CAD CD ROM disks for review and acceptance.

D. Structural Attachment

1. Submit structural, vibration isolation and seismic details drawings and calculations for all attachments and supports used on BHS equipment or platforms. Drawings and calculations shall be sealed by a registered Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the same state or jurisdiction of the work.

E. Drawings for Review

1. All drawings submitted shall become property of the Owner.

2. Submit for review three (3) ANSI-"E" size copies and an electronic copy in AutoCAD 2010 on CD ROM of each shop and installation drawing.

3. The Owner or his representative shall review the drawings and return them for revision and re-submittal within 21 days. Revise and re-submit drawings for final review by the Owner or his representative within 14 days. Corrections or changes on drawings shall not be considered as an



extra work order. Fabrication is at the BHS contractors own risk until receipt of the Owner or his representative’s approval.

4. The notes from the Owner or his representative shall not be taken to imply that the arrangement has been checked in detail. The BHS Contractor shall be fully responsible for the functionality and dependability of the BHS and associated systems and components as suggested in the drawings, specifications and other information submitted for acceptance by the Owner or his representative including all subsequent amendments. In no manner shall the Owner’s or his representative’s review or comments absolve the BHS Contractor in any way of his responsibility of ensuring that the equipment supplied complies with all specifications, drawings and functions in accord with the design intent.

5. Do not submit drawings out of full compliance with the specifications unless an Engineering Change Order Request (ECR) requesting addressing the discrepancy accompanies the submittal. In this situation the Owner or his representative may respond within 21 days, but shall be under no obligation to do so.

6. Submit and updated drawing list that containing all anticipated installation and shop drawings with each drawing submission.

7. Submit power requirements and MCP sizes by subsystem including connected and demand power.

8. Drawings shall include the following items: three letter airport code; name of the baggage handling system; drawing scale; drawing title; drawing/sheet number; drawing revision level and date

9. BHS Mechanical drawings shall include: general arrangements with dimensions (plan, elevation, details and sections) of all mechanical equipment, maintenance platforms, crossovers, ladders, impact protection, MCPs, workstations, safety signage, BDDs, ATRs and encoders. Plan view shall include conveyor speed in FPM.

10. BHS Electrical drawings shall include: identity and location of control devices, control stations, motors, limit switches, safety disconnect switches, layout of any displays or related control devices, safety signage, PLC block diagrams, motor schedule (including motor horsepower, full load amperage, speed), MCP layout, photo eye locations, belt tachometer locations

11. Provide detail shop drawings for any required system interfaces affected by the scope of work.

12. Provide ANSI “B” size copies of the schematic wiring diagram(s) for placement in each MCP.

13. Submit As-Built drawings indicating the location of BHS equipment. The shall include but not be limited to: mechanical components; maintenance platforms; electrical devices; operator’s control panels; MCPs; switches’ motor schedule.

F. Submittal Deadlines



1. Safety Program Manual 10 days after NTP

2. Project Management Team 10 days after NTP

3. Quality Control Manual 20 days after NTP

4. Configuration Management Plan 20 days after NTP

5. Detailed Master Schedule 21 days after NTP

6. Phasing Schedule 21 days after NTP

7. Structural Attachment Details 30 days after NTP

8. Environmental Requirements 30 days after NTP

9. Catalog Cuts and Equipment Specifications 20 days after NTP

10. System Power Requirements and MCP Sizes 30 days after NTP

11. BHS Equipment - Combined Heat Output Figures 90 days after NTP

12. Emergency Stop Zone Drawings 60 days after NTP

13. Controls System Description and BHS Redundancy

14. Schematic Diagrams 60 days after NTP

15. Control Room Equipment & Owner Finishes 60 days after NTP

16. Shop Detail Drawings 45 days prior to fabrication

17. Motor Schedule 45 days prior to fabrication

18. Installation Drawings 60 days prior to fabrication

19. Revise & Re-issue Drawing Period 21 days

20. Owner Re-review Period 14 days

21. Training Program 60 days prior to testing

22. Estimated Parts List 60 days prior to testing

23. Functional Specification 60 days prior to testing

24. Inspection and Test Program 60 days prior to testing

25. System Endurance and Stability Test 60 days prior to test

26. FAT 20 days prior to installation on site

27. Final Parts List 30 days prior to testing

28. Bag Tag Verification 30 days after NTP

29. Work Activities Bulletin 14 days prior to each activity

30. Test Reports 15 days after completion of testing

31. Certificate of Testing Compliance

32. System Reliability Calculations 30 days after completion of testing

33. Certificate of Installation Compliance 15 days after completion of installation

34. As-Built Drawings 30 days after acceptance of equipment



35. List of Lubricants 60 days prior to start-up

36. O & M Manual – Draft for Owner Review 60 days prior to start-up

37. Periodic Maintenance Inspection and Lubrication Chart 30 days prior to start-up

38. O & M Manual – Final 15 days prior to start-up

39. Weekly Report Last day of each week

40. Submittal Log With each submittal or as required by the project.

41. Computer/Software/Hardware Inventory At Conditional Acceptance / Updated as required at Final Acceptance

42. Computer Log To be kept during Conditional Acceptance period and officially submitted at Final Acceptance

G. Master Schedule Contents

1. Submit a detailed Master Schedule for review and approval by the Owner or his representative prior to any work. Show the schedule in an easy to read graphic form containing the following: beginning and ending of mechanical, electrical and controls engineering by subsystem or phase; drawing submittal and approval; equipment fabrication by subsystem of phase; date equipment (including long lead times) ships to site by subsystem or phase; mechanical, electrical, and controls installation by subsystem or phase; FAT dates; system interface and integration (including EDS) dates; training and test plan submittals; Operation and Maintenance manual submittal and training; manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list submittal; subsystem commissioning; system acceptance testing by subsystem; operational dates by subsystem or phase; punch list correction; final acceptance testing; as As-Build submittals

H. Test & Inspection Program

1. The Test & Inspection Program shall be submitted for the Owner or his representative’s review and approval prior to the start of System Testing in accordance with Schedule of Submissions. Assume the responsibility to meet with the Owner, the TSA and their representatives, at the Airport or other location per the Owner, to review the SSTP and ensure the CBIS meets all the requirements contained within, prior to the Pre-IV&V/TRR with the Owner, the TRR with the TSA’s representative and IV&V with TSA representative. The CBIS Contractor’s test plan submittal shall include the tests that are associated with the SSTP for the TSA’s CBIS Performance and Commissioning Requirements. This program shall include the required support and participation by the BHS Contractor for the TSA’s SAT testing of the EDS machines, separate Pre-IV&V/TRR, formal TRR and IV&V, all consistent with the SSTP for the CBIS Performance & Commissioning Requirements as well as the requirements of the TSA’s PGDS. The test program shall identify and demonstrate all System Control functions and is to list each Control Station, and Control Device, and its related Control Function that is to be demonstrated/tested. A Certification of Test Compliance shall be sent



after the system is proven to be in compliance with all testing requirements.

I. Maintenance Inspection and Lubrication Chart

1. Provide a Maintenance Inspection and Lubrication Chart involving periodic maintenance of all equipment items in the system and defining the points and frequency of recommended periodic maintenance functions, including inspection, lubrication and replacement.

J. Weekly Updates

1. Weekly Updates of the Master Schedule shall be provided. If the BHS contractor is sixteen (16) or more calendar days behind the original approved Master Schedule then a recovery plan shall be submitted. Weekly updates shall also include: status payments; right of way issues; BHS engineering issues; interface issues; tasks & deliveries for the following week

K. Meetings/Scheduling

1. The BHS contractor shall provide personnel for coordination meetings as required by the owner or his representative.

2. The BHS contractor shall coordinate with the General Construction Manager and follow his schedule.

3. The BHS contractor should anticipate a minimum of 3 pre-installation EDS meetings to review exact integration details.

L. Test Reports

1. The BHS contractor shall carry out an internal test run of acceptance test prior to the actual test with the Owner or his representative and submit a detailed report after completion.

M. Substitutions

1. Use of alternate materials, other than those specifically detailed out and identified within the specification shall not be utilized without written approval from the Owner or his representative.

2. Requests for substitutions must be submitted no later than 10 working days prior to the date of bid closing.

3. Changes in equipment, materials or products or methods of construction after the contract is awarded shall be considered as substitutions and must be pre-approved by the Owner, Owner’s Representative.

4. The BHS contractor shall be responsible for any cost incurred as a result of redesign to accommodate “approved equal” items.

5. Substitutions requested during bidding phase and accepted by Modification of the Bid shall not be subject to requirements specified in this section.



6. Equivalent products of manufacturers not named as acceptable manufacturers are subject to submittal requirements for.

7. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data sheets without separate formal request, acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or requested directly by subcontractor or supplier.

8. If necessary, Engineer/Architect through Construction Manager will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 1 working week of receipt of request for substitution.

9. Contractor’s submittal, and Engineer/Architect’s and Construction Managers acceptance of shop drawings, product data or samples for construction activities not complying with Contract Documents do not constitute acceptable or valid requests for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.

N. List of Lubricants

1. Submit a list of all lubricants used by the BHS equipment.

O. Final Parts List

1. Final Parts list shall include a list of all subsystem components with the following information of each part: name; description; location in system; manufacture; manufacturer’s part number; supplier; price; lead time/availability; manufacture’s contact information.

P. Computer/Software/Hardware Inventory

1. Upon conditional acceptance the BHS contractor shall submit Computer/Software/Hardware Inventory. It is to include in addition to the above, at a minimum, provide the following: complete software inventory by computer, complete hardware inventory by computer, registration numbers, serial numbers, and computer emergency boot disks.

2. The Airport Authority will retain the rights to all software and/or code.

Q. Computer Log

1. At conditional acceptance it shall be the responsibility of the BHS contractor to keep a computer log compiled in an electronic format (on a weekly basis) acceptable to the Owner or his representative.

2. The computer log shall include but not be limited to the following information: Date/Time of Occurrence, type & description of issue(s), Name/shift of individual that recognize the issue, issue resolution, affect on the system, BHS Contractor Individual Contacted for support and troubleshooting, Programs & files affected by the resolution to the issue.

1 .07 WARRANTY

A. The warranty period shall be 2 years for complete operating baggage systems as specified herein and agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and



workmanship of the work during the warranty period, which starts on the date of beneficial use or substantial completion, whichever occurs first.

B. Defective materials and workmanship is hereby defined to include operational failure, performance below required minimums, excessive deterioration or aging, abnormal wear considering intensity of use, unsafe conditions, excessive noise or vibration and similar unusual, unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions. In the event that the above defects occur within the warranty period, the Baggage System Contractor for work under this section shall repair or replace the defective item(s) and assume full costs of labor and materials for such replacement. Replacement item(s) shall be new and meet the requirements of this specification.

C. Provide a warranty against design failure for five (5) years beginning at Final Acceptance which states that the system, materials, equipment, software and high and low level controls furnished and installed shall be free from faults or defects in design; shall conform to the functional and technical requirements of BHS system; and shall comply with all laws, statues, ordinances and codes applicable at the installation site.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2 .01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. A minimum of five years of demonstrable experience with similar systems as a turnkey BHS Contractor is required. Equipment must be in compliance with this specification and pre-qualified separately by the owner or his representative. The BHS Contractor must have previous experience with L-3 Communications screening machines. The following BHS Contractors are approved for work on this project:

1. G&T Conveyor Company, Inc., Tavares, Florida

2. The Horsley Company, Salt Lake City, Utah

3. Jervis B. Webb Company, Farmington Hills, Michigan

4. Siemens Airport Logistics, DWF Airport, Texas

5. Vanderlande Industries, Inc., Marietta, Georgia

2 .02 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT

A. Bearings

1. Browning (Emerson Power Technologies)

2. Dodge (Baldor Electric Company) ABHS series

3. Sealmaster/Morse Industrial Corp.

4. Approved equal

B. Belting

1. Belting shall be no less wide than the distance between side guards minus three (3) inches, flame retardant and in accordance with ISO 340, ASTM D-378, DIN 22103 and NFT- 47108 or equal. All belting shall have a minimum working tension of 100 pounds per inch. For incline and decline conveyors of greater than 7° use bare by rough top or longitudinal rough top. Belting manufacturers:

(a.) Georgia Duck

(b.) Habasit Belting, LLC

(c.) Siegling America, Inc.

(d.) Sparks Belting Company

(e.) Approved equal

C. Brakes

1. Dodge (Baldor Electric Company)

2. Approved equal

D. Diverters



1. Siemens Airport Logistics

E. Fire/Security Doors

1. The Cookson Company

2. Vigneaux Corporation

F. Hour Meters

1. Hobbs Corporation

2. Approved equal

G. 45° Merge/Take-away

1. G&T Conveyor Company

2. The Horsley Company

3. Jervis B. Webb, Inc.

4. Siemens Airport Logistics

5. Transnorm Systems

6. Approved equal

H. MCP Cabinet

1. Hoffman Engineering Co.

2. Approved Equal

I. Motor Starters

1. Allen-Bradley

2. Approved Equal

J. Motorized Pulleys

1. Van der Graaf

2. Approved Equal

K. Motors

1. Baldor

2. SEW Eurodrive

3. Sumitomo

4. U.S. Motors

5. Approved equal

L. PLCs

1. Allen-Bradley

2. Approved Equal



M. Photoelectric Controls

1. Allen-Bradley

2. Approved Equal

N. Reducers

1. Browning

2. Dodge "TXT" ABHS

3. Dodge Quantis

4. SEW Eurodrive

5. Sumitomo

O. Roller Chain

1. Acme

2. Diamond Chain Company

3. Dodge

4. Morse Industrial

5. Tsubaki

P. Signaling/Alarms

1. Allen Bradley

2. Approved equal

Q. Turns

1. Portec, Flo-Master Division

2. Transnorm

R. UPS/Battery back-up

1. APC

2. Eaton Powerware

3. Approved Equal

S. VFD

1. Allen Bradley/Rockwell Automation

2. SEW Eurodrive

3. Approved Equal

2 .03 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural plates shall conform to ASTM A-36.

B. Hot-rolled sheets and coils shall conform to ASTM A-569.



C. Structural steel shapes shall conform to ASTM A-36.

D. All welding electrodes shall conform to AWS A-5.1. The standard AWS Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction shall be used as a guide to general procedure and qualification of welders.

E. All fasteners shall conform to ASTM A-307 Class 2A thread fit for bolts and Class 2B thread fit for nuts. All fasteners shall be zinc-plated or approved equal. All fasteners shall be locked with locknuts or lock washers.

F. Steel used in the fabrication of the equipment shall be free from rust, rust pts, kinks, and sharp bends. The forming of material shall be accomplished by methods that will not fracture or otherwise damage the metal. Burrs, sharp edges, and sharp corners shall be removed. All parts shall be formed and cut properly to assure uniformity. All joints shall be smooth and all corners rounded.

2 .04 BELT CONVEYOR GENERAL

A. Equipment

1. The equipment shall be numbered in consecutive order in a manner consistent with the subsystem identification detailed on the contract documents.

2. Provide identical types of equipment and minimize spare parts requirements wherever functional.

3. Design, provide and install a new belt conveyor system, including all required supports for the listed conveyor sections. Select all equipment including supports to minimize noise and vibration. Securely fasten each floor or overhead support to the ceiling overhead beams or the floor by methods approved by the Engineer.

B. Baggage Characteristics

1. The type of baggage which the system will encounter can be classified as follows:

(a.) Normal baggage: those items which can be processed by the system without special handling, including covered golf bags and duffel bags up to 54 inches long.

(1) The following defines the physical dimensions of normal baggage:

LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT Max. 54” 24” 30” 120 lbs. Min. 9” 3” 3” lbs.

(2) For purposes of rate testing, average baggage length shall be 33 inches long.

(3) The Baggage System Contractor shall provide a statement in their proposal discussing any limitations that are placed on baggage associated with their offering.



(4) Odd-size: those items such as animal cages, skis, map cases, etc. Which cannot be handled by the baggage system shall be manually handled by airline personnel.

(5) The totes trays referenced throughout this document shall be provide by the airlines and shall not be part of this scope of work.

C. Design Loads

1. All outbound and inbound baggage conveyors shall be designed for a live load of 40 lbs./ft. at a belt speed of 90 fpm adjusted to reflect speed variations and throughput. All conveyor drives shall be sized so that starts can be made under full-design load conditions. Load, unload, and all accumulating conveyors shall be designed to start with and convey a live load of 60 lbs./ft. Minimum load on any conveyor after speed and throughput are considered shall be 25 lbs./ft.

2. Static Load Rating: 250 pounds of concentrated load

3. Coefficient of friction between belt and slider bed shall determined by belt manufacturers recommendation and used in calculating horsepower. Note that slider bed and the interior surface of the safeguards shall be unpainted.

D. Clearances and Configuration

1. All baggage conveyors shall be engineered and installed to have a minimum of 36 inch baggage clearance above the belt surface. The Baggage system Contractor shall identify any areas where this cannot be met during preliminary design drawing development.

2. All conveyors and related components shall have a minimum underside clearance of 8'-0" from the bottom of the support structure to the floor wherever there may be personnel, tug or other traffic below.

3. Maximum Angles: For conveyor transporting normal sized baggage the maximum angles on inclines and declines shall not exceed 12° in tracked areas and 18° in untracked areas from the horizontal, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

4. The Baggage System Contractor shall conduct field survey of all conveyor paths prior to the submission of installation and assembly drawings. The Baggage System Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer where the slope must be exceeded and/or minimum clearances cannot be provided.

5. Normal operating conditions shall be considered to be 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. All components shall operate satisfactorily within a

temperature range of 20!F to 120!F, with a relative humidity of zero to 100 percent, non-condensing.

E. Maintainability

1. Equipment components requiring inspection and servicing shall be readily accessible. Suitable doors or removable enclosures in the building



shall be provided and installed by the Baggage System Contractor for these purposes as shown on the drawings. Maintenance access holes in conveyor frames or guards are acceptable but shall be held to a minimum number and size, and shall not create protrusions or discontinuities detrimental equipment or to the baggage being conveyed.

2. All components shall be easily disconnected and removed from the equipment without the necessity for extensive disassembly. All components shall be designed for removal and replacement by two men in a period not to exceed two hours. The Engineer reserves the right to request a demonstration or replacement of an item during the training sessions.

F. Vibration

1. The conveyor system, installed by the Baggage System Contractor, shall not produce or induce objectionable vibrations into the building structure. Vibration levels induced by the system and/or its components shall not be injurious to the system or the building structure or be harmful or annoying to passengers and/or employees.

2. The Baggage Handling System Contractor shall provide and install any and all necessary vibration isolation devices or techniques required to meet this requirement.

3. Preventative Maintenance: The baggage handling system shall be so designed that no scheduled PM task requires more than two (2) hours of full-system shutdown, or three (3) hours of reduced operation, or any combination of both in excess of three (3) hours. All components and sub-systems shall be designed for replacement within this period. All components and assemblies shall be easily disconnected and removed from the equipment without necessity for extensive disassembly.

G. Speeds

1. System speeds shown on the drawings are for reference only. Actual belt speeds shall be determined by the BHS Contractor in accordance with good design practice and system throughput requirements.

2. Conveyor speed from the queue after the L3 machine through to the diverter may be designed at 30 feet per minute.

H. Ancillary Items

1. It shall be the Baggage System Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the design of the conveyors and its ancillaries with all attachments thereto including but not necessarily limited to new catwalks, catwalk access, conveyor electrical systems, security doors, fire shutters, and adjacent devices installed under this contract and all existing conditions at time of bid.

2. Gap Pans shall be provided on all conveyor-to-conveyor transfer points. Gap pans shall be not less than 12 gauge metal with minimum one (1) inch high sides on the edges. The gap pan must be easily removable.



I. Reducers

1. Reducers shall be shaft-mounted where adequate clearance and maintenance access exists.

2. In applications where physical space is limited powered pulleys may be used.

3. All reducers shall be sized for Class II application and have a service factor based on a L10 life of 70,000 hours.

4. All chain drives, belts and rotating shafts are to be equipped with guards.

J. Motors

1. The conveyors shall be driven by copper wound, minimum NEMA-B rated AC induction motors except crescent plate and slope plate devices which shall have minimum NEMA-C motors.

2. Motors shall be sized for maximum load and belt speed requirements under continuous operation (minimum of one (1) HP, maximum of 7.5 HP) and, where applicable, shall be capable of withstanding shock caused by frequent starting and stopping under load conditions. Motor sizing shall permit a 20% speed increase on any conveyor without changing to larger motors. Motors shall also be of the constant speed (1800 RPM), continuous service, and ball-bearing type with a minimum of class “B” insulation. If overrun is critical to system control operation, motors shall be equipped with automatically applied brakes to prevent overrun after the motors are de-energized. All motors shall be TEFC and shall be provided with overload protection in the motor control panel. The service factor shall be a minimum of 1.15.

3. All motors in tracked areas and on indexing belts (including merges or other belts with frequent start/stop operations) shall be VFD controlled.Indexing drives shall be capable of 30 continuous start/stop cycles per minute when loaded.

4. Motors used on inclines or declines where rollback would be critical shall be equipped with brake motors. Electro-mechanical brakes shall be internally externally wired. The stopping torque shall be equal to or greater than the starting torque of the motor.

5. Motor sizes that very from the sizes stated on the drawings require the approval of the Engineer prior to installation.

6. Removable conveyors shall have electrical connections equipped with heavy-duty quick couplings.

K. General Drive Requirements

1. Conveyor drives shall be located near the head end of the conveyor where clearance permits, except for reversing conveyors which shall have drives located near the middle of the conveyor.

2. All drive units shall be equipped with a suitable guard of “Clamshell” design with quick-release fasteners, and fabricated from a minimum of 16-gage steel. All guards shall comply with applicable OSHA standards



and have an expanded or slotted metal viewing port to allow belt inspection without removal of the guard.

3. All drive motors and/or reducers shall be equipped with drip pans.

4. All drive sprockets and/or V-belt sheaves shall have a taper-lock type hub construction, with key-ways. Sprockets shall be steel with a minimum of thirteen Type B form teeth.

5. Driving and driven sheaves shall be minimum two-groove A-section pulleys with taper-lock type hubs.

6. Roller chain shall be compatible with the torque and horsepower requirements of the application but not less than RC-60 in size. The roller chain ends shall be connected with a removable connecting link.

7. All conveyor sections shall include intermediate type drive assemblies, with motors mounted under the conveyor, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

8. All lubrication points shall be easily accessible.

9. All pulley assemblies four (4) inches or greater in diameter shall use Dodge taper lock hubs and bushings.

L. Pulley Assemblies

1. Drives

(a.) All power pulleys for intermediate-type drives shall be lagged with a minimum of 3/8 inch thick vulcanized lagging of 55-70 durometer and be crown-faced and equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16 inch minimum diameter, designed to and in compliance with AISI 1018 steel and in accordance to CEMA standard No. 402-1992 as revised, shafts mounted in precision-and-ground flange-type ball bearing units. Pulleys and shafts sizes are determined by maximum belt pull as follows:

(b.) Light-duty (300 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of a 6-3/4 inch minimum diameter drive pulley with a 1-7/16 inch minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-60.

(c.) Normal-duty (500 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of an 8-3/4 inch minimum diameter drive pulley with 1-11/16 inch minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-60 or larger.

(d.) Intermediate-Duty (1,000 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of 10-3/4 inch minimum diameter drive pulley with a 1-15/16 inch minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-80 or larger.

(e.) Heavy-duty (1,500 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of 12-3/4 inch minimum diameter drive puller with a 2-3/16 inch minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-80 or larger.



(f.) Power pulleys for end-type drives or power take-offs shall be lagged with a minimum 3/8 inch thick vulcanized lagging of 55-70 durometer, and shall be 6 inch in diameter (minimum) crown-faced and equipped with taper-lock type hubs and 1-7/16 inch minimum diameter, designed to and in compliance with AISI 1018 steel and in accordance to CEMA standard No. 402-1992 as revised, shafts mounted in precision-and-ground flange-type ball bearing units. End-type drive units shall be used for conveyors 25 feet or less in length. Crown-faced pulleys shall be tapered a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot from the center. Drive pulleys shall be removable without disassembly of the drive frame unit, preferably through the end plate.

(g.) All power pulleys and shaft assemblies shall have a concentricity of 0.020 inch TIR minimum. The shaft run out of each assembly shall not exceed 0.0004 inch TIR/inch of shaft length measured from the pulley hub.

(h.) Belt arrangement at drive system shall be routed so that “tight side” of belt passes over and around drive roller, prior to belt wrapping around take-up pulley. Belt wrap around drive roller shall be greater than 210 degrees.

2. Take-ups

(a.) All take-up pulleys shall be a minimum of four (4) inch in diameter, steel, crown-faced and equipped with taper-lock type hubs and 1-7/16 inch minimum diameter, designed to and in compliance with AISI 1018 steel and in accordance to CEMA standard No. 402-1992 as revised, shafts mounted in precision-and-ground flange-type (with grease fittings) outboard ball bearing units. Pulleys shall be mounted on threaded take-up devices with steel guides. All conveyors shall be provided with take-ups for field adjustments of at least four (4) inch or 2 percent of the conveyor bed length, whichever is greater. Take-ups shall be an integral part of the drive frames on all intermediate-drive conveyors.

(b.) All take-up pulleys and shaft assemblies shall have a concentricity of 0.020 inch TIR/inch of shaft length measured from the pulley hub.

(c.) All pulleys shall be dynamically balanced and aligned for straightness and have a maximum T.I.R. of 0.010 inches.

(d.) All conveyor sections in excess of 60 feet in length subject to extreme temperature and humidity changes shall be equipped with automatic take-up devices.

(e.) The Baggage System Contractor shall adjust the position of all take-up pulley devices after System Testing prior to Substantial Completion of the system so that no more than 50% of the take-up device adjustment has been used.

3. Head and Tail Pulleys



(a.) All non-powered head and tail pulleys shall be of steel, crown-faced, equipped with taper-lock type hubs and 1-7/16 inch minimum diameter, designed to and in compliance with AISI 1018 steel and in accordance to CEMA standard No. 402-1992 as revised, shafts mounted in precision-and-ground-flange-type ball bearing units. All head and tail pulleys shall be 6 inch in diameter minimum x 10 gage wall. Pulleys shall be of a single piece steel construction and have steel and discs attached to the rim by continuous welding. Slider bed shall be arranged to keep the gap between the end section and the end pulley to a minimum. All head and tail pulleys used for belt tracking shall be equipped with jack bolts to facilitate adjustment.

(b.) All head and tail pulleys and shaft assemblies shall have a concentricity of 0.020 inch Total Indicated Run-out (TIR) minimum. The shaft run out of each assembly shall not exceed 0.004 inch TIR/inch of shaft length measured from the pulley hub.

(c.) All other head and tail pulleys for units not covered above shall be the same as described under Power Pulleys. Conveyors may be driven by a power pulley in the head pulley location if the length is less than 25’.

4. Roller Assemblies

(a.) Return Idler Rollers

(1) The return idler rollers shall be a minimum of 2-1/2 inch diameter, 12 gage steel equipped with an 11/16 inch hex axle and rated for the operating RPM.

(2) All hex shaft return idler rollers shall be equipped with sealed, permanently lubricated, cages, semi-precision type ball bearings. Return idler rollers shall be located on centers not to exceed 10 feet, with spacing being reduced in areas where belting may drag against the floor or conveyor structure. The shafts shall be mounted to the conveyor bed with adjustable retainers for proper belt tracking.

(3) Return Belt Rollers: Shall hang no lower than the bottom of the conveyor frame.

(b.) Snub Pulleys

(1) All snub pulleys shall be a minimum of four (4) inch in diameter equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16 inch minimum diameter shafts, designed to and in compliance with AISI 1018 steel and in accordance to CEMA standard No. 402-1992 as revised, mounted in precision-and-ground flange-type ball bearing units. All snub pulleys used for belt tracking shall be equipped with jacking bolts to facilitate adjustment.



(2) All snub pulleys and shaft assemblies shall have a concentricity of 0.020 inch TIR minimum. The shaft run out of each assembly shall not exceed 0.0004 inch TIR/inch of shaft length measured from the pulley hub.

M. Bearings

1. All bearings shall be pre-lubricated, be easily greased, self-aligning and, anti-friction. All bearings shall have a minimum B-10 life of 70,000 hours based on service and loading of conveyors and on the manufacturer’s published data showing load rating of each bearing used. All exposed bearings in workstation areas shall have bearing covers or meet minimum OSHA enclosure requirements for employee safety. All bearings shall be surface-mounted flange bearings attached to the outside of the conveyor bed, unless otherwise specified herein.

2. All bearings shall be easily greased or fitted with grease lines extended to an easily reached access point, approved by the Engineer.

3. Lubrication points on conveyors within public view shall be located under the stainless steel shroud and accessible after removal of shroud as approved by the Engineer.

4. Grease fittings shall have threaded connections.

5. Fill all bearings to the level (of lubricant) recommended by the manufacturer.

N. Conveyor Bed Frame

1. Reinforce conveyor frame, with minimum of 1/8-inch thick steel, in the area of attachment of the motor/gear reducer assembly, to prevent metal fatigue of the conveyor frame.

2. The bed should provide a low-friction sliding surface for the belt.

3. Conveyor sections shall not exceed a maximum of eighty (80’) feet in length.

4. Bed lengths noted on the drawings are approximate. Field-cut the conveyors to exact lengths where required. Total bed length shall be components of 10 foot (max) bed sections that bolt together.

5. All joints shall be smooth, with no protruding, rough or sharp edges on fasteners, corners, joints or seams which could cause injury to persons, damage to baggage or baggage tags, or otherwise cause the system to jam. All edges shall be formed, 90 degree edges, turned away from the conveyor.

6. All transitions from horizontal to downward slope or transitions from upward slope to horizontal to downward slope or transitions from upward slope to horizontal shall be “smooth” transitions utilizing the standard “break-over” section. “Break-over” section shall have a minimum 5’-0” radius break over; however a 10’-0” radius break-over shall be uses wherever possible. In general, slopes shall be as indicated on drawings. For return belt idling, vertical bends shall be equipped with a pulley.



7. An Identification Number is to be neatly painted onto the conveyor side guard, adjacent to the motor. Each Identification Number shall be carefully and neatly painted in white, 6 inch in height. The conveyor I.D. is as indicated on the drawings.

8. The outside edge of all floor-mounted conveyor sections shall have smooth, continuous surfaces with no sharp edges.

O. Side Guards

1. Side guards shall be minimum of 12 gage hot-rolled steel, integral to the slider bed, and with a formed 90 degree turned away from the conveyor and a formed 90 degree edge turned down to eliminate sharp edges. Side guards shall be reinforced with 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch x 3/16 inch vertical angle stiffeners on not more than three (3) feet four (4) inch centers on transport conveyors and not more than two (2) feet six (6) inch centers on load conveyors. All joints between conveyor bed sections shall be smooth to insure a non-snagging surface. Unless otherwise noted on drawings side guard height (in inches) shall be 12 inches.

2. Guards adjacent to power turns shall be in alignment with the effective belt width of the turn to prevent interference with baggage movement. Side guards shall provide a continuous, uninterrupted surface. Side guards of different heights shall have 30° transition panels.

3. Baggage Contractor shall take special care in manufacturing and installation to insure smooth, snag-free butt joints without use of epoxy fillers. Baggage Contractor shall apply epoxy on an exception basis only, where joint cannot be otherwise aligned using acceptable methods.

4. The guards shall be removable, where required for installation and maintenance.

5. If side guards are not an integral part of the frame and are attached separately, they shall be secured to the frame at a maximum of 1.5 inches on each side of the stiffeners and at a minimum of one point midway between the stiffeners. Bolt all side guards together at a maximum of 6-inch vertical spacing.

6. Holes for photocell beams shall be 1-1/2” diameter and shall be “punched” not burned, in metal side guards.

7. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, side guard heights shall be as follows:

(a.) Check-in Take-away Back Guards shall be 21"

(b.) Transport Conveyors shall be 12"

(c.) Incline/Decline conveyor Side Guards shall be 12"

(d.) Decline-fed Power Turns (flat or spiral) shall be 21"

(e.) Power Turns (flat) shall be 12"

(f.) Power Turns (spiral) shall be 21"

(g.) Inbound Load Conveyor Back Guards shall be 21"



(h.) Take Away Conveyor Side Guard directly opposite a diverter or 45 degree merge shall be 21"

(i.) 45 Degree Merge Side Guards shall be 12"

(j.) EDS Device In-Feed and Exit Conveyor (operator side) shall be 9" hinged side guards

P. Protective Guarding

1. Provide and install removable guarding beneath conveyor beds and around conveyor drives for all inclines and declines from reference grade to seven 7’-6” above.

(a.) Paint all such guarding, including the pipe guard around load areas, with yellow enamel.

(b.) Guarding shall be sheet metal or expanded metal of a type and with opening sizes in accordance with ANSI B 20.1.

(c.) The guard shall extend such a distance that a person cannot reach behind it and become caught in the nip point between the belt and pulley.

2. Provide and install protective cushioning material where conveyors pass one walkway, maintenance access areas, and other locations to prevent injury to operations and maintenance personnel.

3. Provide finger guards at end rolls for all loading and unloading conveyor.

Q. Stainless Steel Trim

1. Contractor shall provide stainless steel shrouding and hardware, on all conveyors located in public areas or conveyors that are visible to the public as indicated on drawings.

2. Stainless steel shall be Type 304 14 gage, with #4 brushed finished.

3. Trim shall be fabricated from single sheets of material without open space between joints that can catch bag tags, straps, etc. All joints to be shop welded ground smooth and polished to match untouched adjacent surfaces.

R. Draft Curtains

1. Draft curtains shall be provided at wall and floor penetrations that separate air conditioned and non air conditioned space.

2. Draft curtains shall be flexible strip doors with two staggered layers of four (4) inch x 1/8” inch vinyl strips - color “Black”.

3. In public areas the vinyl strips shall be attached to stainless steel angle, #4 brush finish.

S. Fire Door

1. BHS Contractor is responsible for acquirement, control and power design and installation of electric operated, automatic closing, overhead rolling insulated fire doors including a minimum of the following properties:



(a.) SmokeShield® UL leakage rated assembly label

(b.) Control Station, Smoke/heat detectors, Annunciator

(c.) Electrical wiring and conduit, fuses, disconnect switches, connection of operator to power supply, installation of control station and wiring, and connection to alarm systems

(d.) Proximity or limit switches linked to the PLC input. Switch shall mount to sense the “full open” position of the door. The associated conveyor shall stop running if the door is not in the “full open” position.

(e.) A photo eye or proximity switch shall be used with a bottom strip (for return to open position on contact) for detecting a bag below the door edge.

(f.) 160° F fusible link which will cause the door to close and report the door position status to the fire/security system when the fuse is broken. Provide appropriate wiring between the BHS MCP and central fire/security alarm system as required in the Fire Alarm System Specification.

(g.) Electrical operator with 480 VAC, 3 phase, 60 hertz motor provided by the door manufacturer

(h.) Ability for manual operation

(i.) Coordinate installation and framing, including required steel trim, with the Architect, Owner and other contractors.

(j.) Provide doors with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. label for the fire rating classification, 2 hr or UL rating for wall (whichever is greater).

(k.) Provide doors with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. label for "Leakage Rated Assembly" or "S" label.

(l.) Comply with NFPA 105 air leakage requirements.

(m.) Pass UL test procedure 1784.

(n.) Insulation to have a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 0 as tested per ASTM E84.

(o.) Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 27 as tested per ASTM E90.

(p.) Minimum R-value of 5.3 (U-factor of 0.189) as calculated using the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.

(q.) For doors in public view, the BHS contractor shall provide stainless steel trim as coordinated with Architect, owner or his representative.

T. Impact Protection

1. At minimum, provide impact protection as shown on the contract drawings. Adequately protect belt conveyor and make-up devices.



Construct the impact protection and supports of structural steel, heavy walled sections in shapes as indicated.

2. Securely fasten all impact protection components to each other and to the floor.

3. Design impact protection to withstand the impact of a tug and fully loaded cart at a speed of 2 miles per hour (minimum).

4. Maintenance access to the protected equipment shall not be restricted by the impact protection.

U. 45 Degree Merge Unit

1. Merge conveyors shall be designed as typical slider bed construction. The drive/take-up unit shall be located 90 degrees to the baggage flow.

2. The merge conveyors shall be designed and installed so that belt tracking can be accomplished with a minimum effort and skill.

3. The merge conveyors shall be designed and installed so that belts can be replaced with minimum effort and skill.

4. Merge conveyors shall be installed approximately two (2) inches higher than the receiving conveyor to ensure smooth and reliable baggage transfer. Installer to adjust transition between merge and receiving conveyor so that baggage will not hang on guard rails, plow guards, transition material and tags straps, lose items do not jam at the merge point.

5. The gap shall provide a “smooth” transition from merge belt to main line belt.

6. The side guard on the conveyor immediately downstream of the merge shall have a deflector, on the merge side, to move bags over approximately three (3) inches from side guard.

7. The alignment of the photo–eye at the discharge end of the merge conveyor shall be positioned to maximize the bag length on the belt. BHS contractor shall also install photo eyes on the existing flat plate conveyor as required to ensure proper merge functions.

V. High Speed Diverter (HSD)

1. High speed diverters shall be capable of sorting all types of normal baggage, including but not limited to golf bags, at a sustained rate of 40 bags per minute without.

2. The high speed diverter shall be designed to withstand high volume BHS operation over a 10 year life cycle (minimum).

3. The return motion of the HSD paddle shall not affect the bag travel on the adjacent downstream conveyor or cause a loss of tracking.

4. Powered faced paddle belts shall be easily replaceable for maintenance personnel.

5. Provide adequate sway bracing in both directions and vibration isolation.



6. Provide each HSD with one Safety Disconnect switch to control the drive components.

7. Provide safety guards for each HSD between manned areas and moving parts. The HSD safety guards shall be easily removable.

8. A high speed, dual paddle diverter is preferred over the single paddle currently shown; the double paddle will improve the performance of the system.

W. Conveyor Turns (Power Turns)

1. The maximum angle of any single powered turn shall be 180 degrees. To facilitate parts procurement, a copy of the “Packing List” which accompanies each power turn shall be included in the spare parts section of the Operations/Maintenance Manual.

2. Spiral power turns shall have a maximum elevation change of 12” per 45° of turn.

3. Frame shall be a minimum of 12-gauge Hrs.

4. End Roll Shaft: To be turned ground and polished shafting for reduced run-out, shafting to be keyed with industry standard keyways. Shafts shall be minimum 1-7/16” diameter.

5. Provide steel bar stock material between the inside radius side-guard of the curve and the adjacent straight conveyor or side-guard as required to eliminate any gap.

X. Queue Conveyor

1. The queue conveyor shall be constructed of 12 gage steel with integral bed and stiffeners. The belt shall be fabricated with a longitudinal high-friction top surface to allow minimal bag slippage on stopping and starting. The conveyor shall be powered lagged drive roller on the head end. The drive shall be sized with a minimum of 1.2 service factor and shall be capable of 30 cycles (start/stop) per minute. The motor shall be a minimum of one and one half (1-1/2) HP @ 1800 RPM. All pulleys shall be mounted in externally mounted ball bearings and adjustable by means of jack screws to allow for proper positioning and tensioning.

2. The queue shall be a self tracking conveyor utilizing slider bed type construction. The bed shall be designed with guide slots, on the outer edges, for belt tracking. Guide slots shall be centered a maximum of one (1) 1/2 inches from the edge of the slider bed and include lead in taper to assist the belt attachment guides into the bed guides. The belting shall have guides attached to the bottom of the belt that will align with and travel through the conveyor bed guide slots. The width of end rolls, drive rolls, snub rollers, etc. shall be sized as required so they are between the belt bushings and do not interfere with the travel of the belt.

Y. Floor Supports

1. The Contractor shall provide new supports up to 7’-6” in height of the floor or mezzanine below.



2. Floor-type supports shall be vertically adjustable of at least three (3) inches in either direction and of sturdy design.

3. Provide bracing between the vertical support legs and the conveyor bed frame to ensure rigidity of the installed conveyor.

4. Supports shall be removable for ease of installation. Supports on removable conveyor shall use heavy duty casters.

5. Supports shall be within one 1’ of each component connection and at a maximum of five 5’ centers on load/unload conveyors and a maximum of ten 10’ centers elsewhere.

6. Anchor supports to the floor using fastening methods that are in keeping with the floor construction and approved by the Engineer.

7. Construct supports from 10-gage or heavier material.

8. Support curves as recommended by the manufacturer.

9. Design and installation of floor supports shall not prevent access to existing floor vaults for mechanical and electrical equipment.

10. Contractor shall provide calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer (in the state of the work) showing that the floor supports have been designed in accordance with local and state codes, especially with regard to seismic events.

11. Where bridge-type supporting structures are required in lieu of vertical hanger rods, such structures shall be provided by Baggage System Contractor.

Z. Transfer Plates

1. Gaps between conveyors at HSDs or any parallel transfer shall be filled with a transfer plate. The transfer plate between mainline and adjacent conveyors shall not be more than 12”.

2. Transfer plates must have a smooth surface where they bag makes contact, may be bolted or welded to adjacent conveyors and must maintain uninterrupted side guards.

AA. Roller Conveyor

1. Heavy duty plastic rollers, as manufactured by Smith Detection, will need to be added to the hinged door. No springs will be needed for this access door/roller.

2. A stainless steel shroud on the bottom and sides of the hinged roller bed will be used to provide a clean appearance at the ticket counter side of the opening.

3. A latch and locking hardware is needed on the bag screening sided of the door/roller. Un-locking of this door will be under TSA’s control. TSA will develop a proposed-drawing of the hinged roller panel-door.

BB. Directional Input Device

1. Prior to each EDS device the BHS Contractor shall provide a DID. The DID shall position or rotate baggage so that the bag jam rate at the EDS



device is less than 0.2% as compared to the total number of originating bags entered into the system.

2. The DID shall be capable of sustaining a rate equal to that of the EDS machine without damage to the bag or losing tracking on the bag being centered.

3. DID devices and designs shall be approved by the owner or his representative.

2 .05 EXPLOSIVE DETECTION SYSTEM

A. The EDS equipment will be supplied and installed by the others. The BHS contractor shall coordinate the placement of the EDS equipment, in its final location, with the EDS supplier and ensure proper alignment/positioning with the adjoining conveyors.

B. The BHS Contractor shall coordinate with the EDS device provider for interface details between the BHS and EDS required accomplish the intended operation. The BHS Contractor shall be responsible for any wiring between the BHS and EDS and assume responsibility for the EDS integration with the BHS.

C. The BHS contractor shall perform the site acceptance testing of the integrated system with the TSA’s EDS provider.

D. Conveyor Speeds: Set adjoining conveyor speeds per the EDS manufacturer’s recommendations to achieve the desired throughput rate.

E. The BHS contractor shall be required to provide a means of centering/positioning bags prior to entrance into the EDS. The centering/positioning method shall be clearly illustrated and identified in the design submittal.

2 .06 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS

A. Supply, install and program Touch Screen Terminal HMI such as an “Allen Bradley”, family of “PanelView” terminals (or approved equivalent).

B. A Touch Screen Terminal shall be installed on the MCP (as one location).

C. The Touch Screen Terminal(s) shall be capable of accurately and clearly depict the BHS subsystems that are controlled by the associated MCP. The terminal shall be configured to display system status as described below, in both text and pictorial format. Submit to the Owner or his representative their functional design for approval. The graphics portion of the terminal shall display, in real time, dynamic pictorial format, the operational status of the conveyors and make up devices that are connected to the system PLCs.

D. The Touch Screen Terminal(s) shall dynamically show all tracked bags shall in relation to their position on the BHS system and color coded according to the bag status (unscreened, suspect, alarmed, out-of-gauge and cleared).

E. Contractor Warranty Period shall include 24/7 on-call troubleshooting/problem resolution with a 2 hour response time.

F. A web-integrated system, with secure dial-in capabilities to MCP for analysis and updates, shall be provided by baggage handling system manufacturer.



2 .07 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Supply power shall be 480 volt, 3-phase 60 hertz. The BHS contractor shall be responsible for all electrical work and equipment downstream of the power distribution points.

B. Start/Warning

1. Provide low profile, weather and corrosion resistant, amber, UL listed, polycarbonate industrial strobe beacons for start/warning.

2. Beacons shall be amber colored and UL listed.

2 .08 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A. General Requirements

1. Changes to the baggage flow shall be possible by using the computer keyboard or mouse for such conditions as: jams, equipment failure and conveyor(s) at maximum capacity.

2. Contract drawings show power distribution and location for MCPs. 3. BHS contractor shall provide control system software in accordance with

the sequence of operations (in addition to standard BHS controls) for the BHS system as described in the contract documents.

4. BHS contractor shall provide a dry contact to link with the building fire alarm so all conveyors will shut down in the event of a fire.

B. Outbound System

1. General: Status and fault warnings shall be displayed graphically and with text on the HMI(s).

2. Control Equipment Components (a.) A minimum of three (3) control stations shall be provided for

Start/Stop control of each ticket counter line (consisting of conveyors TC-01, TC-02 & TC-03). The location of the control stations shall be coordinated with the Owner or his Representative. The control stations located on conveyors TC-01 & TC-02 shall include the following devices:

(1) Lighted “Start” Pushbutton

(2) “System Stop” Pushbutton

(3) Lighted, Lockable, Push-Pull E-Stop

(4) Audible Alarm warning device

(b.) The control stations located on conveyors TC-03 shall include the following devices:

(1) Lighted “Start” Pushbutton

(2) “System Stop” Pushbutton

(3) Lighted, Lockable, Push-Pull E-Stop

(4) Lighted Out of Gauge Indicator

(5) Audible Alarm warning device



(c.) Provide HMIs at five (5) separate locations. One HMI shall be on the MCP. Two (2) additional locations shall be provided and locations shall be coordinated with a local TSA representative.

(d.) Provide a push button control station at the CT-80 reviewer screen to activate and control the power turn conveyor preceding the EDS machine (alternate).

(e.) Conveyor Start Sequence: The ticket counter system shall be started with a wall mounted keypad. Activation from the keypad shall supply power to the respective control station(s). The start/warning alarm(s) and beacons located in the public and airport operations areas shall operate for ten (10) seconds. The fire/security door(s) shall commence opening during the alarm period. After the ten (10) second start/warning period the ticket counter conveyors shall start and the remaining transport conveyors and make-up unit shall cascade start with an adequate delay between conveyors to limit the surge in power draw.

(f.) Conveyor Stop Sequence: An auto-stop sequence shall halt the ticket counter conveyors whenever the tail end photo eye has not detected a bag for an adjustable time period (from 5 to 30 minutes). Conveyors that are shut down from an auto-stop sequence shall start have auto-start if the same photo eye detects a bag.

(g.) Manual Stop: The “Stop” button on any ticket counter control station shall stop all ticket counter conveyors and close the Fire/Security door (if the door jamb photo eye is not blocked).

(h.) In the event the conveyor system times out before all bags have been removed from the make-up unit, activation of any start button located by the make-up until shall allow it to run for an additional fifteen (15) minutes.

(i.) Start warning and fault warning alarms shall be located as required along the conveyors and make-up unit.

(j.) Cascade Stop: The green ticket counter start pushbutton shall flash when the downstream conveyors have cascaded back to the ticket counter load belt. HMI(s) shall also reflect this condition graphically and with text.

C. EDS Security Screening System

1. Two EDS machines shall be integrated into the BHS, one CT-80 and one L3 Communications machine.

2. The BHS contractor shall be responsible for acquiring any required documentation from the EDS manufacturer(s).

3. The control sequence of operation and functionality of the EDS shall comply with TSA current PGDS version at the time of NTP.

4. BHS contractor shall assist the TSA in the Integrated System Acceptance Test for the outbound system(s). The BHS contractor shall obtain the current copy of the ISAT test procedure and conduct a “dry run” prior to actual testing

5. This project consists of the following three (3) screening levels:



(a.) Level 1 – EDS screening in “Automatic” mode: All originating checked bags shall be transported to and EDS device for security screening. After scanning by the EDS a statues of “clear” or “unclear” will be provided (based on the scan image)

(b.) Level 2 – Remote Operator Screening: The image for bags with an “unclear” status from the EDS device will be delivered by a secure network to monitoring area and displayed on the On Screen Resolution device. The OSR operator will review the display image for and adjustable time duration using Threat Resolution Tools to determine the bag status (“clear” or “unclear”). If no decision is made in the time duration the bag will be assigned “un-clear” status. All unclear bags shall be routed to the CBRA screening station while clear bags shall be routed to the make-up device.

(c.) Level 3 – Explosive Trace Detection operation: Unclear bags shall be transported to the level 3 offload conveyors for ETD inspection. Level 3 bags that are cleared will be routed to the make-up device. Failed level 3 bags shall be treated according to the local EOD protocol.

6. Level 1 Screening (a.) Level 1 screening equipment consists of the L3 and CT80 EDS

machines. (b.) Bags entering the L3 machine shall have a unique bag ID

assigned when tracking begins and passed to the EDS by the interface so tracking is continued and status updates are transferred back to the BHS.

(c.) The EDS machine/software will scan each bag and assign a bag status of “clear” or “rejected” based on the analysis of the san images and transfer that status to the BHS. (1) Clear bags will be routed to the make-up device. (2) “Rejected” or “no decision” bags will be routed to the

ETD area. 7. Level 2 Screening

(a.) Bags assigned a “rejected” status will have the scanned image sent to the monitors in the EDS OSR station.

(b.) The operator has configurable time duration to analyze the scanned image. If no decision is made by the operator the bag is assigned a “reject” status.

(c.) The operator will assign a “clear” status for resolved alarms that will transfer to the BHS. The BHS will update the status assigned to the bag ID and track the bag to the decision point where it will be routed to the make-up device.

(d.) If the bag is assigned a clear status after it is routed to the level 3 area then the status shall not update to “clear”.

(e.) The operator will assign a “reject” status for unresolved alarms that will transfer to the BHS. The BHS will update the status assigned to the bag ID and track the bag to the decision point where it will be routed to the Level 3 off load area. The bag shall be tracked to the level 3 off load area.

8. Level 3 Screening



(a.) Bags with a “reject” status past level 2 screening will be routed to the bag screening area for manual removal.

(b.) The BHS contractor shall provide a bag tag printer to print suspect bags ID tags to link the bag with the image.

(c.) Cleared level 3 bags will be placed on to the make-up device. (d.) Failed level 3 bags shall be treated according to the local EOD

protocol. 9. Unknown Bags: All unknown, lost-tracked and no-decision bags shall

be routed to the bag screening area. 10. Suspect bags shall have one digital image available to TSA personnel. 11. Activating any EDS E-stop will cause the EDS machine and adjacent

conveyors to stop. A control station shall be placed at the discharge end of each EDS machine and include the following devices: (a.) Lighted “Start” Pushbutton

(b.) Lighted, Lockable, Push-Pull E-Stop

(c.) Jam Indicator

(d.) Normal/Test switch

12. A Bag Insert control station shall be placed at the queue conveyor preceding the EDS device and include the following devices: (a.) Lighted “Start” Pushbutton


(c.) Jam Indicator

(d.) Normal/Test switch 13. A control station shall be placed at the discharge end of the suspect bag

removal conveyor and include the following devices: (a.) Lighted “Start” Pushbutton


(c.) Clear indicator light (white)

(d.) Suspect indicator light (red)

(e.) Fault indicator light (amber)

(f.) Pending indicator light (amber)

(g.) Failsafe indicator light (blue)

(h.) Print Tag pushbutton

14. Coordinate speed and programming of the queue prior to the L-3 EDS machine to work with the L-3 machines reversible sensor.

15. Belts downstream of the L-3 shall be coordinated with speed of L-3 and bag diverter. If no bags immediately behind subject bag, conveyors downstream from L-3 will be set to add more time to diverter decision process.

D. BHS contractor shall provide a laptop computer loaded with all PLC manufacturer software programs required to maintain the BHS system. Laptop manufacturers shall be approved by the owner or his representative.



E. System Programming: The Programming of the proposed in-line baggage screening system will be accomplished as part of the Contractor’s/Baggage Handling-Trade Contractor’s work, since this is dependant and integral to the components being provided by the Contractor. The controls description will need to be submitted by the Contractor prior to the finalization of the shop drawings for the equipment. The Controls description must be finalized and submitted by the Contractor, and approved by TSA before the programming process can be finalized.

F. EDS Reporting: BHS reporting shall reflect EDS daily activity containing a log of all bags processed with the capability to sort by bag ID and tracking specifics. The BHS operator shall have workstation access to monitor all EDS/BHS communication signals in real time including but not limited to: lost bag IDs, loss of EDS/BHS communication, multiple unknown status bags. System reporting shall be done by USB connection. An additional USB connection shall be at a remote HMI.

G. BHS contractor shall be responsible for the control design, detailed design, functionality and architecture. The BHS contractor’s responsibility includes but is not limited to the EDS to BHS interface. The BHS contractor shall design the system, including but not limited to controls and equipment, shall meet the requirements of the EDS system to ensure proper functionality. The Owner or his representative will review and approve the design and architecture.

H. BHS contractor shall coordinate with the EDS manufacturer for the necessary interface(s) between the BHS and EDS system for proper operation. Conduit, Wiring and communication between the BHS and EDS shall be the responsibility of the BHS manufacturer.

I. The BHS shall receive an “active” or “inactive” status from the EDS device(s) on a real time basis so the BHS can route bags as required. When the EDS device is active the bags shall be transported to the EDS device. If an EDS device is inactive bags shall be stopped on the queues preceding the EDS machine and conveyors will cascade stop as necessary. The HMI(s) shall show an alarm during this situation.

J. Baggage tracking shall start at the over-height/length photo eyes (located at all load areas on the BHS system). A bag ID will be assigned when tracking begins. The disruption of the BHS by adding a bag is not acceptable. The BHS system shall be capable of bag re-insertion in front of the L-3 before manual re-inspection is implemented.

K. Head and tail photo eyes are required (at a minimum). Photo eyes placement is the responsibility of the system integrator / programmer and must comply with the TSA PGDS.

L. Out of Gauge bags shall be manually inspected by TSA personnel in the CBRA area.

M. BHS-EDS control interface: The BHS shall transfer a bag to the EDS by providing a bag ID number and track each bag. The BHS contractor shall coordinate with the EDS manufacturer for any interface protocols. After receiving a signal from the EDS acknowledging acceptance of the ID, the BHS shall advance the bag onto the EDS device. After scanning by the EDS the bag shall be transferred back to the BHS system by sending the appropriate status



with the ID. The BHS shall send a message back to the EDS machine to confirm receipt of the bag status.

N. The queue conveyors prior to the EDS machine shall provide proper spacing and throughput of the bags into the EDS machine. When the EDS and associated queue conveyors are full the preceding conveyors shall cascade stop as they become full. Tracking shall be maintained while bags are in the EDS device.

O. The EDS devices shall be set so they operate in an automated mode with the BHS system or in a manual mode where the image is reviewed by an operator on screen without a decision by the EDS machine.

P. The control system shall not contain a single point of failure and also be easily upgradeable.

Q. When the pass through door located at the middle of the ticket counter for the roller conveyor is open only the ticket counter conveyor to the side of the roller conveyor nearest the CT-80 machine shall operate. The operating ticket counter conveyor shall have belt travel in the direction toward the CT-80.

2 .09 OVER-SIZE DETECTION

A. Provide over height photo-eye(s) at all load area(s) on the system and prior to EDS machines. Photo eye height above the belt shall match the maximum height for the EDS machine when placed upstream of the EDS machine. Photo eyes downstream of the EDS machine shall be placed at a height equal to the bag clearance of the conveyor system. When the photo eye is interrupted the bag shall proceed on the system and stop at a queue preceding the EDS machine. A jam indicator shall be activated when the bag is stopped.

B. Provide over length photo-eye(s) at all load area(s) on the system. Photo eye shall measure bag length. If the bag length is greater than a preset value (normally the maximum bag length accepted by the EDS machine) the bag shall proceed on the system and stop at a queue preceding the EDS machine. A jam indicator shall be activated when the bag is stopped.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the conveyor equipment true and properly aligned, complete in all details, in accordance with the specifications and manufacturers’ recommendations, and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Finish all joints smooth and free from snags and protrusions which, in the opinion of the Engineer, could damage baggage, catch skis or otherwise cause the system to jam.

C. All rollers and greasable bearings shall be easily accessible for removal. Assemble all equipment in a manner to facilitate routine maintenance.

D. Prior to startup of the belt conveyors, polish and buff the bed surface smooth and free of sharp edges, dirt, paint and grease. Apply a coating of talc powder between the surfaces of the bed and the belt.

E. All stairways, catwalks, cross-overs, handrails, fences, guardrails, working platforms, etc., shall be painted OSHA yellow.

F. Clearance above the conveyor bed shall be 36 inch minimum unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Clearance between the conveyor bed frame and adjacent walls or obstructions shall be one (1) foot minimum or as noted on the drawings. Maximum slope for all incline and decline conveyor shall be 18 degrees, unless indicated otherwise.

G. Conveyor contractor shall reinstall any airline owned equipment that may have been removed during the installation of the new conveyor system. This includes, but is not limited to, such items as work benches, desks, lockers, planning sheet stands, load sheet stands, writing tablet stands, and any other equipment that was present prior to the installation of the new equipment. It is the contractor’s responsibility to field verify existing conditions prior to bidding this work.

H. Gaps between end rolls, including power turns, shall not exceed one (1) inch with 1/2 inch being a design objective.

I. Uneven joints in side guards shall be epoxy filled and ground smooth to eliminate all snag points, except in areas where stainless shrouding is installed. In these areas joints must be tight without gaps and smooth without field rework.

J. Provide welded connections for fabrication and installation of work wherever bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

3 .02 TESTS AND RECORDS

A. No-Load Test

1. Run the conveyor without load for eight continuous hours; measure the speed of each section at 20 minute intervals during the first and last hours. During this time also inspect conveyor for abnormal noises, fluid leaks or any signs of poor operation. If the speed does not meet required



speed (+/-5%), modify/adjust the drive unit as required to comply and repeat the test.

B. Load Test

1. Test the conveyor system under actual operating conditions. On two separate occasions send baggage over the conveyor during a peak rush period lasting about 60 minutes.

C. Alignment

1. Check for proper belt track. Make adjustments for accurate track as required.

D. Run Test

1. After at least 40 hours operation under normal load conditions, inspect System(s) for necessary corrections and adjustments. Belt tension shall be tight enough to pull full load capacity without slipping. Do not “over-tighten” belts.

E. TEST OPERATION

1. Record the test data on the Test Record Forms and furnish two (2) copies to the Engineer prior to final acceptance.

2. All tracking sortation of baggage shall continue without interruption.

3 .03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Provide descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data, and parts lists for each item of mechanical equipment furnished in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section 01785 of these specifications. Each copy of all literature shall be bound in a three-ring, loose-leaf binder. The manual shall contain the items included in this section of the specification.

B. Introduction

1. General (purpose and scope of the manual)

2. Field Return (warranty) Procedure

3. Weight and Size Limitations

C. System Description and Operation

1. Physical Description: (A concise physical description of the overall conveyor system, identifying each conveyor subsystem, its location and primary components, operator controls, and accessory components required for efficient operation of the total system. The overall system shall be illustrated on an 11 inch x 17 inch fold-out. Reference to manufacturers’ literature shall be made where such descriptive material is presented by the manufacturer, such as for power turns, etc.)

2. Electrical Description: (A concise description of the control panels, each operator control, special switches, photo-detectors, audio visual alarms, and drive motors. Electrical installation shall be referenced by drawing



number. The drawings referenced shall be included in a “Drawing Book” separate from the manual.)

3. Functional Description: (A functional description of each conveyor subsystem shall be given. Specific drawings for each electrical control schematic shall be referenced. The drawings shall be included in a “Drawing Book,” separate from the manual.)

D. Operating Instructions

1. (Safety precautions to be followed by operating personnel, specific operating procedures, and operating procedures (to include start-up, shutdown, special maintenance, procedures, and emergency procedures). Reference each operator control to a specific drawing that illustrates the control. The drawings shall be included in a “Drawing Book” separate from the manual.)

E. Preventative Maintenance

1. Include procedures for periodic inspection, lubrication, oil change, cleaning, conveyor-belt checking, tensioning and tracking, and component adjustment in this chapter.

F. Troubleshooting

1. Troubleshooting procedures to aid maintenance personnel in diagnosing conveyor system or subsystem malfunctions, and isolating the trouble to a replaceable component or assembly.

2. Removal and Installation Procedures

(a.) Safety Precautions: List pertinent safety precautions to be followed by maintenance personnel. An additional statement shall inform personnel that … “when a possibility exists that personnel could be injured when performing a procedural step, a warning shall precede the procedural step wherein the injury could occur. If a possibility exists that equipment could be damaged when performing a procedural step, a caution shall be included preceding the step. A note shall call attention to special information that should be considered when performing a procedural step.

(b.) Special Tools and Equipment: List any special tools or equipment required for maintenance of the conveyor system by nomenclature and part number. The purpose of each tool or equipment shall also be given. Include information on how the tool is used in the procedure where the tool is required.

(c.) Component Removal and Installation: Include procedures for removing and installing motors, brakes, reducers, pulleys, taper-lock bushings, sheaves, sprockets, and other components, together with any special disassembly and testing on reassembly before installation.

G. Parts List/Recommended Spares List



1. This chapter shall be an indentured parts listing of major mechanical, electrical, and electronic parts used in the system. Included exploded views of prime equipment. List recommended spare parts in numerical order following the indentured parts list. The suggested minimum stock quantity for each part spared shall also be given. Include the Federal Supply Code Identification Number of the firm from which replacement or maintenance parts may be obtained.

H. Glossary of Terms and Symbols Manufacturers’ Literature

1. Include descriptive literature covering assemblies and major components not manufactured by the contractor.



PART 4 PAYMENT AND REQUIREMENTS

4 .01 PAYMENT

A. Baggage Conveyors and Dispensers will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price stated in the Schedule of Unit Prices. The price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to provide the system in place and ready for use.

4 .02 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Conditions

1. Section 107 of the Act requires that it shall be a condition of each contract which is entered into under legislation subject to Reorganization Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), as defined in 1926.12, and is for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting and decorating, that no contractor or subcontractor for any part of the contract work shall require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health or safety.

B. Accident Prevention

1. It shall be the responsibility of the employer to initiate and maintain such programs as may be necessary to comply with this part. Such programs shall provide for frequent and regular inspections of the job sites, materials, and equipment to be made by competent persons designated by the employers.

2. The use of any machinery, tool, material, or equipment which is not in compliance with any applicable requirement of this part is prohibited. Such machine, tool, material, or equipment shall either be identified as unsafe by tagging or locking the controls to render them inoperable or shall be physically removed from its place of operation.

3. The employer shall permit only those employees qualified by training or experience to operate equipment and machinery.

4. If a particular standard is specifically applicable to a condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process, it shall prevail over any different general standard which might otherwise be applicable to the same condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process.

5. In the event a standard protects on its face a class of persons larger than employees, the standard shall be applicable under this part only to employees and their employment and places of employment.

6. The employer shall instruct each employee in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions and the regulations applicable to his work environment to control or eliminate any hazards or other exposure to illness or injury.



7. Employees handling or using poisons, caustics, and other harmful substances shall be instructed regarding the safe handling and use, and be made aware of the potential hazards, personal hygiene, and personal protective measures required.

End of Section

ST. PETERSBURG-CLEARWATER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LPA PN: AR178017



MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 1

SECTION 15000 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions Division 1 and

of Section 15000 shall apply to the Mechanical work shown on the drawings and specified

hereinafter under this Division 15.

B. Coordinate work specified herein with that of other trades affecting, or affected by work of this

Division 15. Cooperate with those trades to assure steady progress of work under contract.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide the labor, materials and equipment for the installation and testing of the mechanical,

plumbing and fire protection systems shown on the drawings and herein specified.

B. All systems shall be complete, tested and ready for operation at time of Substantial Completion.

Refer to Specification Sections 15001 and 15002.


A. The following sections of the specifications are included hereinafter:

15001 Project Close Out

15002 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

15010 Electrical Power and Auxiliaries

15020 Vibration and Noise Isolation

15030 Painting and Identification

15200 Piping General

15220 Piping for HVAC Systems

15222 Flow, Pressure and Temperature Measuring Devices

15230 Pre-Insulated Piping

15300 Air Handling Mechanical Equipment

15301 Corrosion Protection

15320 Pumps - HVAC

15322 Water Chillers

15325 Water Treatment

15340 Fans and Vents

15341 Heaters

15400 Air Distribution Systems

15500 Insulation - HVAC

15700 Test and Balance





15900 Direct Digital Controls

1.4 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS DIVISION

A. Refer to related Sections of the Contract Documents for work to be provided by others such as

but not limited to:

Finish Painting

Electrical Work - Refer to Division 16

Equipment foundations: Masonry, concrete or structural steel

Access doors

Cutting and patching

Wall Louvers

Test and Balance

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Specific items of terminology, as used herein, shall have the following meanings:

1. BY OTHER TRADES: Shall mean work that is to be provided by persons or parties

responsible for work at the project other than the party or parties who have been awarded a

contract for work under this Division15. In the event that this document is used to acquire

work as part of a general construction contract, the words "by other trades" shall mean by

persons or parties who are not anticipated to be the installers for the work shown under

this Division 15. In this context, the words "by other trades" shall not be interpreted to

mean, “not included” in the overall contract.

2. CONCEALED: Shall mean work is embedded in masonry or other: construction, installed

behind walls, above hung ceilings, in crawl and attic spaces or shafts.

3. DEMOLITION: Shall mean the removal of any existing equipment, piping, ducts, etc.

and the temporary or permanent capping or plugging of indicated existing services

4. DUCTWORK: Shall mean ducts, fittings, dampers, controls, hangers, insulation, and any

other items customarily required in connection with the installation of systems for the

movement and or distribution of air. Include all tests and the test and balance of such

systems.

5. EXPOSED: Shall mean work is not concealed.

6. FURNISH: Shall mean purchase and deliver to the project site indicated equipment

and/or materials complete with necessary rigging, appurtenance and supports.

7. INSTALL: Shall mean unload equipment and materials at site delivery point; store in a

dry safe protected location at site and perform every operation necessary to establish

secure mounting and correct operation at proper location in the project. Include necessary

connections to required services.

8. PIPING: Shall mean pipe, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, hangers, traps, drains,

insulation, vents, and any other items customarily required in connection with the

installation of systems for the transfer of fluids. Include all tests and the test and balance of

such systems.

9. PROVIDE: Shall mean FURNISH and INSTALL.

10. WORK: Shall mean to include all materials, labor, equipment, tests and test and balance





required for a complete and operable installation.

B. Except where modified by specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the

indication and/or description of any item, in drawings or specifications or both, carries with it

the instruction to furnish and install item, regardless of whether or not this instruction is

explicitly stated as part of indication or description.


A. General

1. It is the intent of the drawings and specifications to obtain a complete, operable and

satisfactory installation.

2. All materials shall be new, properly labeled and/or identified, and in full compliance with

the contract documents and applicable Codes and Standards.

3. All work shall comply with applicable Codes and Standards at the time the project is bid.

4. Manufacturer's model names and numbers used in this Division 15 are subject to change

per manufacturer's action. Contractor shall therefore verify that information with

manufacturer's representative before ordering any product or equipment. Immediately

notify Architect / Engineer of any changes and submit information on new or replacement

product. Any changes shall be done at no cost to the contract.

B. Installer's Qualifications

1. Installers performing work under this Division 15 shall be both a State and local licensed

firm regularly engaged in providing the work specified under these sections. Provide copy

of license upon request.

2. Installer shall provide, upon request, a list of at least five similar jobs he has completed in

the last two (2) years.

C. Drawings And Specifications

1. Drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the

building and the work of other trades will permit.

2. The specifications and drawings are complementary and are to be taken together for a

complete interpretation of the work. Notes or details on drawings which refer to an

individual element of work and that may conflict with the specifications shall be brought

up to the attention of the Architect / Engineer for clarification before any equipment or

materials are purchased or work is installed. Failure to follow these guidelines may cause

the contractor to replace / correct the work at no cost to the contract.

3. The separate divisional drawings and specifications do not relieve the contractor from the

responsibility to provide the work, which is indicated on any of the drawings or division of

the specifications.

4. The drawings of necessity utilize notes, details, symbols and schematic diagrams to

indicate various items of work. Therefore, no interpretation shall be made from the

limitations of such notes, details, symbols and diagrams that any elements of work

necessary for a complete installation are excluded. Any discrepancies shall be brought to

the attention of the Architect / Engineer for clarification before bid time and the





purchasing and installation of any equipment or materials. Failure to follow these

guidelines may cause the contractor to replace/correct the work at no cost to the contract.

5. Certain details, sections and enlarged plans that appear on the drawings are intended only

for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not supersede field

coordination of the indicated work among the various trades working in that area.

6. Examine existing site conditions, the architectural, structural, electrical and mechanical

drawings and specifications prior to submitting bid. Existing site conditions, architectural

and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to

building construction, reflected ceiling plans, and any other similar fixed items. Any

discrepancies shall be brought up to the attention of the Architect / Engineer.

7. The Architect shall be notified of any discrepancies, omissions, conflicts or interferences,

which occur between drawings and specifications. If such notification is received in

adequate time prior to bid time additional data or clarifications will be issued by

addendum to all bidders. Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the contractor to

replace/correct the work at no cost to the contract.

8. When extra work involving Division 15 trades is authorized, the work as shown on

drawings, sketches, described by Addendum or Change Order is subject to this

specification in all respects.

D. Standards

1. Certain materials and installation procedures are described by reference to industry

standards published by nationally recognized organizations such as, but not limited to,

those listed below:

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Code of Unfired Pressure Vessels

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA)

Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)

2. Additional standards may be listed in other Sections of the Specifications.

3. Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation and materials shall comply with

the latest adopted and published edition of the Standard at the time project is bid.

E. Requirements of Government Agencies

1. The work under this contract shall comply with the standards and requirements of Pinellas

County, Aviation Department.

2. The contractor, at no cost to the contract, shall correct any work found to be in

noncompliance with these Standards.





F. All products shall have standard twenty-four (24) months warranty.

1.7 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS

A. Contractor shall give the necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees, sales

taxes and other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with this work.

B. Obtain all required certificates of inspection for work and deliver them to the Architect /

Engineer before requesting acceptance and final payment for the work.

1.8 CODES AND RULES

A. All work specified and installed under Division 15 shall comply with the Florida Building Code,

2004 and approved Amendments.

B. Applicable codes shall be those adopted by the authority having jurisdiction at the time project is

bid.

C. Installer shall include in the work, without extra cost to the contract the labor, materials,

services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules and

regulations before submitting his bid.

D. Installer shall inform the Architect / Engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any

of the applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid.

E. Local authorities may require that all field changes that deviate from the contract documents be

submitted for their review. Contractor shall notify the design professional of such changes

before proceeding with work and provide justification for the change. Failure to follow this

procedure will make the contractor responsible for all costs associated with the change including

design professional’s time and other expenses.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials or products specified herein and/or indicated on drawings by trade name,

manufacturer's name and/or catalog number represent a standard of quality or performance on

which the design of this project is based.

B. Since manufacturers reserve the right to change, at anytime, the design and quality of their

products, installers shall verify all dimensions, performance data, etc. for each piece of

equipment submitted to assure compliance with the intent of the drawings and specifications.

Any required changes shall be made at no cost to the contract.





C. For consideration of manufacturers' and/or products other than those used as the basis of design

or listed on the contract documents, bidders shall submit a request in writing as indicated on the

General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. Include all required information,

requests transmitted via facsimile will not be considered. Acceptance, when granted, will be in

the form of an addendum and subject to the review of complete shop drawings proving

compliance with the contract documents.

D. Requests shall clearly define and describe the manufacturers and product for which acceptance is

requested. Requests shall be accompanied by manufacturer's literature, specifications, drawings,

performance data, list of references and other information necessary to completely describe the

product and prove compliance with the contract documents.

E. Accepted substitution and listed manufacturers, other than those used as the basis of design, may

have different requirements regarding the characteristics, quantity or arrangement of items such

as foundations, supports, ductwork and piping connections, electrical characteristics and power

demand and any other equipment or accessories that are standard or required for the proper

installation and operation of the product. Contractor shall furnish said changes and additions at

no additional cost to the contract including all costs for all changes and additions to his work and

the work of others, including design professionals, affected by the substitution or deviation.

F. A list of all materials and equipment, which the installer proposes to furnish, shall be submitted

for approval within then (10) days after the contract has been awarded. Data shall be complete

in all respects.

2.2 SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

A. Submit required and/or requested performance data, fabrication and installation drawings, for

review by Architect / Engineer. Equipment or materials ordered or installed before Architect /

Engineer reviews the information may have to be removed from the project and replaced at

contractor’s expense if submitted information is found unacceptable.

B. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's scale drawings, copies of catalogs, and other

descriptive literature which clearly indicates performance, construction materials, physical

dimensions, utility requirements, wiring diagrams, operating data clearly marked for each item.

Data of general nature is not acceptable. Contractor shall verify equipment dimensions with

available clearances in the area where the equipment is to be installed prior to ordering

equipment.

C. Submittals for equipment shall include detailed and itemized schedules in the same format as

shown on the drawings. Failure to provide required schedule will result in rejection of the

complete submittal.

D. All manufacturers, whether named in the specifications or listed by addendum, are subject to full

compliance with the specifications, schedules, and drawings. Therefore it is the contractor’s

responsibility to submit for review only products that meet the intent of the Contract Documents.

When submitted and reviewed products and materials fail to perform within the specified

parameters, contractor shall modify and/or replace such products and materials at no additional

cost to the contract.





E. Shop drawings for equipment or materials that deviate from the contract documents shall list all

differences in a cover letter attached to the submittal. Any unlisted deviations found during

review or installation will result in the rejection of the entire submittal and installation.

F. Submit shop drawings assembled together in a 3-ring hard cover binder. Provide an index for

ease of processing and record keeping. Index shall correspond to specification section numbers.

G. Erection drawings shall be provided for all air handler rooms, chiller plants and similar

mechanical spaces including foundations in plan and elevation. Provide drawings for other areas

when requested by the Architect / Engineer. Drawings shall clearly indicate service clearances

as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and required by Code.

H. All these drawings shall become part of the final as-built records. Refer to Specifications

Section 15002.

I. When requested, submit samples for review. The samples shall be properly tagged and will

remain in the Architect's possession until final acceptance of the work.

J. The Architect's/Engineer review does not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to comply

with all requirements of the contract documents.

2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND/OR PANELS

A. Access doors/panels are required for access to service valves, dampers, filters, fire and smoke

dampers, disconnects and equipment concealed in or behind walls, above ceilings, others than

lay-in tile, and where it may be necessary for test and balance and service of equipment.

B. Access doors/panels shall conform to the finish of adjacent construction as indicated on the

Architectural construction documents. Access doors/panels shall be as specified in another

section of the specifications and be provided by the contractor for general construction.

C. Access doors/panels installed in fire rated assemblies shall meet all the requirements of the

assembly.

D. Each installer providing work under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for

determining the size of each door/panel required for access to his work. Dimensions shall be

determined in the field prior to ordering them.

E. All doors/panels shall be of the hinged type with easy to open locking devices. Provide locks

when security or fire rated considerations so require and as directed by Owner and Architect /

Engineer.

F. Submit shop drawings for review by Architect / Engineer.

2.4 FIRE STOPPING





A. Unless otherwise noted on drawings; modified by Architect and/or authorities having

jurisdiction, the following materials may be used to seal penetrations of fire rated assembly by

work installed under this Division 15.

1. Rock wool: Minimum four pounds for cubic foot density; flame spread 15, smoke

developed 0, fuel distribution 0 by ASTM E84; minimum melting point 2000 degrees F.

2. Concrete and masonry are also approved firestop materials by NFPA 90A.

3. UL approved products such as Dow-Corning and 3M.

B. When using any of these products, UL, NFPA and manufacturer's recommendations shall be

followed.

C. Submit shop drawing data on fire stopping materials and construction methods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK

A. At all times a competent superintendent shall be on site in charge of the work. Replace if

performance is unsatisfactory to the Owner and/or Architect / Engineer.

B. Maintain a complete file of all contract and shop drawings at the site available for inspection by

Owner's representatives and Architect / Engineer.

C. Upon installation of equipment, shop drawings shall be initialed and dated. This procedure will

ensure proper scheduling and allow Owner's representatives to check the work in progress.

3.2 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Coordinate work to be installed under Division 15 with other trades and existing field conditions

to avoid interferences and delays. Assist in working out space requirements to make a

satisfactory installation. Notify the Architect / Engineer of any major conflicts that cannot be

resolved through normal field coordination with other trades.

B. When work is installed before it is coordinated with the work of other trades, and as a result

interferes with the other trades work, the installer responsible for causing the conflict shall make

the necessary changes in his work to correct the condition at no cost to the contract.

C. Furnish to other trades all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and shop details for the

proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.

D. All work outside buildings shall be coordinated with site contractor. Verify grade and invert

elevations before proceeding with any work.





3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Do trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, including shoring,

bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property. Follow the Owner's and

State/Local environmental regulations.

B. The drawings for this project may not show all the existing underground utilities at locations

where they may interfere with proposed construction. Proceed with caution and verify locations,

invert elevations, etc. before proceeding with construction work. Contact local utilities. Should

existing facilities be damaged, repair to Owner's and/or utility satisfaction at no additional cost to

the Contract.

3.4 ACCESS DOORS AND/OR PANELS

A. Each installer shall be responsible for coordinating with the project superintendent the number,

size and location of the access doors/panels required by his work. When field conditions allow it,

one single, larger door/panel shall be used when several items furnished by different trades are

located in the same area.

C. Doors/panels that are found to be of inadequate size to allow proper removal, access to service

equipment and other concealed devices shall be replaced with larger doors/panels at no cost to

the contract.

D. Doors/panels that are found to be improperly located with relation to the equipment or concealed

devices they serve, shall be relocated at no cost to the contract. Climbing above ceilings to reach

concealed devices or equipment is not an acceptable option.

E. Access doors/panels are to be furnished and installed under another section the specification.

3.5 FIRE STOPPING

A. Duct and pipe penetrations of fire rated walls and/or floors shall be sealed to maintain integrity

of construction and prevent the passage of flame and hot gases.

B. The opening in the construction around air ducts shall not exceed 1" average clearance on all

sides prior to application of sealant. Where fire dampers are installed, proper clearance for

expansion shall be maintained as required by the fire damper installation instructions.

C. All products, materials and methods of installation shall be UL labeled and approved and meet

NFPA 251 requirements.

D. Fire rated construction assemblies are specified under architectural section of the contract

documents.





3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The cutting and patching of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors necessary for reception of this

trade's work or caused by his failure to provide or properly locate sleeves, forms and inserts, or

caused by incorrect location of his work shall be the installer’s responsibility.

B. When it becomes necessary to cut finished materials, submit for the Architect approval,

drawings showing the work required and obtain approval before doing such cutting.

C. Chases and openings in walls/roofs and floors may be provided under the work of other sections.

Furnish exact dimensions and locations of these openings to suit the apparatus to be used before

such walls are built.

D. No structural members shall be cut without the previous written approval of the Structural

Engineer and the Architect.

3.7 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Contractors shall visit the site and examine those areas of the existing buildings affected by this

work. Contractors shall become familiar with existing conditions and difficulties that may affect

the execution of the work before submitting proposals.

B. Submission of a proposal shall therefore be construed as evidence that such examination has

been made and later claims for labor, equipment or materials required because of difficulties

encountered, which could have been foreseen had such examination been made, will not be

recognized.

C. Upon completion of his site visit contractor may submit a list of questions requesting the

clarification of items noted during his visit.

3.8 DEMOLITION

A. Demolition shall be as shown on drawings and/or specified.

B. Schedule all demolition work with Owner/Architect to cause minimum downtime of any

building service or function. No extra cost to the contract will be allowed for overtime work

unless authorized in writing by the Owner/Architect.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic and show only major obstructions; coordinate with other trades for

removal or relocation of pipes, conduits, hangers, etc., in path new of work.

D. Caps on insulated ductwork or piping shall be insulated.

E. At each location where work is to be performed, the Contractor shall examine the existing

conditions to determine the nature and extend to which the existing systems must be removed,





modified or rearranged to accomplish the work of this contract. In addition, the Contractor shall

determine the extent to which portions of the existing building must be cut, altered and restored

to accommodate the project modifications. In every instance, the Contractor shall be responsible

for the correctness, adequacy, fit and alignment of new work with existing conditions, and for

the satisfactory restoration of affected building work as approved by the Owner.

F. The Contractor shall protect existing building contents, equipment, fixtures, the building

structure and its finishes from damage due to dust, falling debris, or any other work operations.

Repair or replace any damage to existing facilities at no extra cost to the contract.

G. Equipment or other items to be modified or relocated shall be carefully dismantled or

disconnected in a manner to avoid damage. Items damaged by the contractor's operations shall

be replaced or repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. Items not to be re-used shall be

removed from the site by the Contractor. Those items that are identified to be turned over to

the Owner shall be stored on the site at a location designated by the Owner.

H. In each area where work is performed, the work area shall be kept in a neat, clean condition.

Rubbish and debris shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be removed daily if necessary

to maintain clean conditions satisfactory to the Owner.

3.9 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The operation of air conditioning equipment during construction is prohibited unless the

following procedures are strictly followed and required records are kept.

B. Contractor shall notify the owner in writing of his intent to use the equipment to cool and/or

dehumidify the building and control air borne contaminants while building is under construction.

C. For each piece of equipment a record log shall be maintained which indicates starting date and

every day of operation. Log shall indicate all service and maintenance work done on the

equipment.

D. Filters shall be in place and replaced periodically (daily in the case of high dust loads). Maintain

a record of filter changes at each filter location.

E. Filter media shall be installed on all return air grilles and be secured on all four sides to protect

air distribution system and equipment against dust contamination.

F. Upon completion of the work, and prior to substantial completion, the interior of air handling

equipment used during construction shall be vacuum cleaned, coils and drain pans washed and

disinfected.

G. Lined ducts shall be cleaned and access doors left open for inspection.

H. Ducts showing high dust concentrations shall be cleaned under the supervision of an approved

indoor air quality testing company at no cost to the contract. Upon completion of cleaning, test

for airborne dust concentrations. Submit report to Architect / Engineer.





I. Substantial completion will not proceed unless information and records required under this

section are submitted to the owner, architect and engineer.

J. Failure to follow these procedures and keep the required records will mandate that all air moving

equipment and ductwork be opened and cleaned in the presence of the Owner and Architect /

Engineer representative. Contractor will be liable for the cost of the personnel assigned by the

owner and Architect / Engineer to witness the cleaning process.

3.10 FIRE PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION SITE

A. At all times, the Contractor shall conduct his operations in a manner to prevent fire hazards.

Such conduct shall include, but is not limited to, the provision of adequate housekeeping

measures and the regular removal of debris and rubbish from the premises.

B. During all welding and burning operations, and during such periods when alarm systems, smoke

detectors, etc. are not in service, fire control measures shall be provided in accordance with

insurance company regulations. During welding and burning operations, the Contractor shall

provide approved fire extinguisher(s) in good operating condition at each location.

3.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. All work to be performed under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with an approved

construction sequence and schedule. Upon award of the contract, and prior to commencing

work at the building, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed schedule of his proposed

sequence of work and the dates of completion of the various portions of the work.

B. Work shall be sequenced and scheduled to maintain comfort conditions in occupied areas to the

extent possible, and to minimize downtime and disruption of active HVAC systems.

C. Where existing active building systems and services must be disrupted to permit modification,

relocation or connection of new work, the work shall be carefully planned to minimize

downtime. In each instance, preparatory work shall be completed to the maximum extent

possible, and required tests completed where feasible, before the particular system or service is

shut down to permit final connection or switch over.

D. Certain operating areas may be available to the Contractor on a restricted time basis each day or

at night. Schedule work so that such areas are fully functional during the periods they are in use

by the Owner. Contractor shall insure that all temporary barricades, access ways, protection and

related items are satisfactorily in place during the periods that these areas are in use by the

Owner.

3.12 AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT REFRIGERANT REMOVAL

A. The scope of work for this project includes the removal of air conditioning equipment

containing CFC or HCFC based refrigerants. Venting of these refrigerants to the atmosphere is

prohibited.





B. Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and disposal of the refrigerants prior to

commencing any demolition work. This shall prevent the release of such refrigerants through

the accidental rupture of any pipe or vessel by the work of other trades.

C. Contractor shall follow EPA regulations and recommended procedures by recognized trade

associations such as ARI and RACCA. Submit copy of procedures before commencing work.

D. Refrigerants shall be stored in DOE approved pressure vessels and shall be properly labeled.

All vessels shall be ASME stamped for the allowed pressure.

E. Storing of different types of refrigerants in same container is prohibited.

F. Contractor shall provide, upon request, proof of their qualifications and any other required

government certifications as to their ability to perform these services.

G. Contractor shall dispose of removed refrigerant in accordance with EPA regulations.

3.13 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WORK

A. Plan installation of new work and connections to existing work to insure minimum interference

with regular operation of existing facilities.

B. Submit to the Owner for approval, a schedule of necessary temporary shut-downs of existing

services. All shutdowns shall be made at such times as will not interfere with regular operating

of existing facilities and only after written approval of the Owner.

C. To insure continuous operation, make necessary temporary connections between new and

existing work.

D. Connect new work to existing work in neat and approved manner. Restore existing work

disturbed to original condition.

E. After connections to existing work are completed, remove all existing work such as ductwork,

piping, conduit, wiring, etc., which is no longer, required as part of the new work.

3.14 STORAGE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All equipment and materials stored on site shall be located in a dry location where they are

properly protected from the weather, injury or deterioration. Materials shall not be stored in

contact with the ground or floor.

B. Do not remove manufacturer's packing materials until ready to install. Materials showing signs

of corrosion or damage due to improper handling or storage shall be replaced at no cost to the

contract.

C. Provide continuous protection for all equipment and materials already installed.





3.15 WATERPROOFING

A. Where any work pierces waterproofing including waterproof concrete, the method of installation

shall be as approved by the Architect before work is done.

B. Provide all necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make openings absolutely

watertight. Waterproof flashing materials shall be compatible with base materials.

3.16 TESTS

A. Include all tests specified and/or required under applicable codes, laws, rules and regulations.

Additional tests shall also be performed as indicated herein and other sections of the

specifications.

B. Notify the Architect / Engineer at least 72 hours in advance of all tests. Furnish all necessary

instruments, gauges and other equipment required for tests. Make preliminary tests prior to

giving notice of final tests.

C. All parts of the work and associated equipment shall be tested and adjusted to work properly and

be left in perfect operating condition.

D. Correct defects disclosed by these tests without any additional cost to the Owner. Repeat tests on

repaired or replaced work.

E. Maintain a log of all tests being conducted and have it available for review by the Architect /

Engineer. Log to indicate date, type of tests, duration, and defects noted and when corrected.

3.17 EQUIPMENT SERVICE

A. Provide clearances around equipment as required by Code and equipment manufacturer for the

proper maintenance or removal of equipment.

B. Coordinate with other trades so no conduit, pipes, ceiling hangers, etc. interfere with the

required clearances.

C. Notify contractor for general construction when work by other trades needs to be relocated.





AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 1

SECTION 15400 - AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Section 15000 are part of this Section.

B. Examine other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work of this Section

whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.

C. Coordinate work with that of other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.

Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of work under the contract.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Work under this section includes providing the following:

1. Outside air ducts of galvanized sheet metal construction.

2. Galvanized sheet metal supply and return air ducts, round, oval or rectangular from air

handling unit(s) to each terminal air device.

3. Double wall, internally insulated supply and return air ducts at the AHU’s for sound

attenuation. Internal duct to be perforated. Length of lined duct to be as shown on plans.

4. Internally insulated supply and return air ducts at the AHU’s for sound attenuation.

Length of lined duct to be as shown on plans.

5. Terminal air distribution devices including but nor limited to diffusers, grilles, registers

and all special air flow control and directing devices. Provide frame for ceiling

construction type shown on architectural plans.

6. Hangers and supports for all duct systems and duct mounted equipment.

7. Air volume control devices, reheat coils, heating coils, fire dampers, smoke dampers,

sound attenuators, balancing dampers and flexible connections to all air moving

equipment. Attach to the handle of each balancing damper a two-foot long strip of a

bright color tape to facilitate location by Test and Balance technician.

8. Exhaust air systems including inlet air grilles; galvanized sheet metal ducts and fans.

9. Install duct mounted devices being provided under other Sections of the contract

documents, such as control dampers, temperature control devices, smoke detectors, etc.

Assist in the coordination of such work. Meet and fully comply with manufacturers

installation instructions.

10. Labor to pressure test air distribution systems prior to application of insulation. Work

shall be done in cooperation with Test and Balance Agency. Refer to Specifications

Section 15700 and SMACNA Standards.

11. Labor to operate air distribution systems and make adjustments to achieve complete test

and balance in cooperation with work performed under Test and Balance Section 15700 of

this specification. Provide dampers, duct extensions and air devices as needed to achieve

final comfort conditions as directed by Test and Balance Agency.





12. Assist in the development of coordination drawings for ceiling spaces. Locate air

distribution devices and duct systems sharing ceiling space.

13. Access doors in ductwork for access to fire dampers, controls, smoke detectors and as

hereinafter specified or indicated on drawings. Demonstrate to owner that such devices

can be reached and serviced from the doors as installed. Refer to Specifications Section

15000 Access Doors / Panels.

14. Ductwork indicated on drawings is schematic and shall not be scaled. Duct installer may

make changes in duct sizes and/or location as necessary to conform to space conditions

without additional cost to the contract. Duct dimensions shown on plans are clear inside

dimensions. All field changes shall be noted on as-built record drawings kept at the site.

15. Prepare for field painting all ductwork, related hangers, air devices, etc. as required by the

contract documents. Apply primer and/or treatment as specified. Refer to Specifications

Section 15030.

16. When indicated on drawings, reuse existing ductwork and air devices. All new work

associated with existing ductwork shall match existing materials and installation.


A. The following sections of the specifications are included hereinafter:

15000 Mechanical General Requirements










15301 Corrosion Protection

15320 Pumps - HVAC



15341 Heaters



15700 Test and Balance



A. The following codes and standards are to be considered a part of this specification to establish

quality of materials and labor.

Florida Building Code 2004 with current Amendments.

NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.





NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Guide.

SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

SMACNA HVAC System Duct Design.

UL-181 Air Duct Materials and Air Conditioning.

B. Reference made to the "Manual" shall mean applicable SMACNA Standards (Construction and

Design) as published by The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association, Inc. latest edition.

C. Tables, descriptions and drawings in the Manual show methods of fabrication of items such as

ductwork, dampers, louvers and air intakes. These methods shall be followed unless

manufactured products are specified for these items.

D. Manufacturer's model names and numbers used in the construction documents are subject to

change per manufacturer's action. Contractor shall therefore verify such information with the

manufacturer's representative before ordering any product or equipment. When changes have

occurred, contractor / installer shall secure the latest product information from the equipment or

material supplier and immediately notify Architect / Engineer. Shop drawing submittals shall

reflect that information.

E. Pressure testing of duct systems in accordance with SMACNA Standards is a requirement of

these specifications. Refer to Section 15700, Test and Balance for coordination of tests. Submit

reports to Architect / Engineer as soon as tests are completed.

F. All products shall have standard twenty-four (24) months warranty.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Prepare and submit shop drawings for all ductwork and air distribution system components and

materials in accordance with the requirements of the General conditions and the manner

described therein.

B. Shop drawings shall indicate Specification Section and Paragraph applicable to product.

C. Include description of manufacturers recommended application and installation procedures if

different from these specifications.

D. Fabrication and Erection Drawings

1. Contractor is responsible for the preparation and submission of Fabrication and Erection

Ductwork Drawings. Drawings shall be 1/4" scale layouts of all duct systems. Drawings

shall indicate dimensions and elevations of complete systems.

Include dimensions and location of other building systems such as structural members,

light fixtures, plumbing lines, pipe mains, cable trays, etc. that may interfere with the

installation of ducts.

2. Drawings shall include sectional views of congested areas and complete mechanical room





layouts of air handling equipment and duct connections. Show flexible connections to

equipment and typical hanger details.

3. Drawings shall reflect the dimensions of the equipment being provided by the contractor.

Indicate manufacturers requirements and clearances for servicing the equipment.

4. For equipment attached to ducts indicate methods of support.

5. For ducts running between trusses, bar joists and other structural members, contractor to

verify clearances before fabricating ducts. Adjust duct dimensions as required.

Coordinate with Architect and Structural Engineer and steel frame installer in the event

that changes to the cross bracing of bar joist is required for the installation of ducts.

E. Submit catalog cuts and specification sheets for the following items whenever they are indicated

on the contract documents.

Fire Dampers

Smoke Dampers

Flexible Duct

Manufactured Round and Oval Ducts

Acoustical Flexible Duct Liner

Flexible Connections

Duct Construction Standards

Manual Balancing Dampers

Motorized Dampers

Turning Vanes

Operating and Maintenance Data

Guarantees

Pressure Sensitive Tape

Constant Volume Control

Duct Sealing Materials

Grilles, Registers and Diffusers

F. Submit installation instructions and certified test data for the following devices, whenever they

are specified on plans:

Fire Dampers

Smoke Dampers

Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers

Treatment of galvanized metals to be painted

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS GENERAL

A. Ductwork

1. Galvanized Steel ASTM - A93

2. Flexible Duct





B. Duct Sealer

1. Hardcast #601 or approved equal.

2. Flame spread 25 or lower in dry state.

3. Smoke development 50 or lower in dry state.

4. Refer to TABLE 1-2, Standard Duct Sealing Requirements, of the SMACNA Manual.

2.2 SHEET METAL DUCT SYSTEM

A. Sheet metal ductwork includes but is not limited to:

1. Supply, exhaust, return, and outside air ducts as shown on plans.

2. Construct duct systems in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction

Standards, Metal and Flexible, (1995) hereinafter referred to as the "Manual." Tables and

figures referenced in these specifications are listed in the 1995 Second Edition of the

Manual and may be superseded by a later Edition (3rd

Edition, 2005). Most current or

restrictive data shall apply.

3. Use the Manual Duct Construction Tables for metal gage, reinforcing type, spacing, and

method of fabrication. Indicate on shop drawings.

4. Seal all joints as per Table 1-2. All transverse joints and fitting connections shall be

sealed. All "Snaplock" seams to be sealed. Longitudinal seam on the perimeter to be

sealed. All screw penetrations shall be sealed. Use sealant as specified under Sealants.

5. Duct connections to supply air devices may be flexible ducts where shown on plans; refer

to Flexible Ducts section of this specification. Duct connections to exhaust and return air

devices to be hard sheet metal ducts.

6. Ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with Table 1-15 duct Pressure class ratings

from 1/2” w.g., 1” w.g., 1” w.g., 2” w.g. 3” w.g., 4” w.g. based upon duct operating

pressure obtained from the Equipment Schedule.

7. Rectangular ducts shall be reinforced in accordance with Tables 1-3 through 1-13 of the

manual.

B. Round and oval ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter

Three of the Manual.

1. Single wall round ducts shall be spiral seam construction. When indicated on the contract

documents, smooth longitudinal seam round ducts may be provided.

2. Double wall-internally insulated round and oval supply and return air ducts shall be

provided whenever indicated on the contract documents as acoustically lined, at the AHU,

for sound attenuation.

a. Internal galvanized sheet metal liner shall be of the perforated type unless otherwise

noted on the contract documents.

b. Perforations in the liner walls shall be 3/32 inch in diameter with an overall open

area of 23 percent.

c. Provide certified data on acoustical performance of double wall ductwork upon

request.

3. Round and oval ducts, single and double wall, shall be the product of an acceptable





manufacturer such as: United McGill, SEMCO and Lindab.

C. Hangers and Supports

1. Hangers and supports shall be provided in accordance with Chapter 4 IV of the Manual.

2. Hanger attachment to structure shall be as shown by Fig. 4-1 through Fig. 4-4.

3. Hanger size and spacing shall be as shown by tables 4-1 through 4-3.

4. No power driven anchors shall be used.

D. Fittings and Other Construction

1. Fittings and other construction shall be fabricated in accordance with Chapter 2 of the

Manual.

2. Supply, return and exhaust air ducts shall be installed with fittings, dampers, etc. as

indicated on Figure 2-1.

3. Radius elbows shall be constructed with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the duct width.

Where a smaller radius or square elbows are used provide turning vanes to produce a

pressure drop less than that of an elbow with a 1.5 radius.

4. Transitions shall be constructed with no side at a greater angle than 30 degrees from duct

centerline on contracting flow, and 22.5 degrees maximum diverging flow. See Fig. 2-7 of

the Manual.

5. Connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with collars secured to duct and air

devices. Branch ducts shall be fabricated in accordance with Table 2-15 of the Manual.

6. Branch connections shall be constructed as shown by Figure 2-6 "Spin-In" connections.

E. Volume Control Dampers

1. Volume dampers shall be installed on all branch lines and as shown on details on

drawings.

2. Dampers shall be fabricated as shown by Figures 2-12 and 2-13 of the Manual. On multi-

blade dampers, blades shall be a maximum of 6” wide.

3. Two foot long bright color ribbons shall be attached by the contractor to the damper

handle for easy visual location.

F. Turning and Splitter Vanes

1. Turning vanes shall be provided in all square elbows. Splitter vanes shall be provided in

all duct offsets larger than 15o and radius elbows.

2. Turning vanes shall be constructed as shown by Figures 2-3 and 2-4 of the Manual.

3. Vanes shall be double thickness "airfoil" design, except in ducts 10" or less in depth

where single thickness vanes with trailing edges may be used. When elbow inlet-outlet

dimensions are not equal provide 1.5-radius elbow.

4. Deleting of turning vanes from an elbow is not allowed.

5. Runners with missing vanes are not acceptable

2.3 OUTDOORS DUCTWORK SYSTEM

A. All ducts installed exposed to the weather, such as rooftop, shall be galvanized sheet metal





construction. Duct construction standards shall be in accordance with Chapter 5 of the Manual.

B. All seams and joints shall be sealed watertight.

C. Rectangular gooseneck shall be fabricated in accordance with Figure 5-5 of the Manual.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS

A. In ductwork use the largest door size that can be installed up to size 24"x 24" maximum to

permit the inspection and servicing of duct mounted devices. Doors shall be as per Figures 2-10

and 2-11 of the Manual.

B. Insulated doors shall be hollow metal type with insulation of same thickness as for adjacent

ductwork.

C. Since the purpose of the access doors/panels is to facilitate access to concealed equipment and

other devices, the size of each door/panel shall be determined in the field prior to ordering them.

Access door for fire damper service shall allow servicing the damper and fusible link with both

hands. Demonstrate to owner that doors as installed provide adequate and safe access to each

device / equipment it serves.

D. All doors/panels shall be of the hinged type with easily opened locking devices, unless safety or

fire rated considerations require otherwise.

E. Doors/panels that are found by the Architect / Engineer or Owner to be of inadequate size to

allow proper access to equipment and other concealed devices shall be promptly replaced at no

cost to the contract.

F. Doors/panels that are found by the Architect / Engineer or Owner to be improperly located with

relation to the equipment or concealed devices they serve, shall be relocated at no cost to the

contract.

G. Refer to Section 15000 for requirements related to ceiling / wall access door for access to

concealed equipment and or devices installed under this Section of the Specifications.

2.5 DAMPER OPERATORS

A. Single blade manual volume damper operators shall be provided with quadrant regulator,

damper position indicator and locking device.

B. Multi-leafs volume dampers operators shall be self-locking regulator with damper position

indicator.

C. On externally insulated ducts, stand-off brackets on all damper handle shafts to be 2” minimum

from duct surface.

D. Acceptable manufacturers are: Ventfabrics and Durodyne.





2.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. The intake duct to each fan and the discharge fan duct from each fan, except as noted, shall be

broken by a minimum two inch space. Provide a flexible connection of coated 30 oz. glass

fabric at least 6" long, which will be inserted in this gap and securely attached to the ductwork

so as to make air-tight connection. These flexible connections shall be slack and shall not be

painted.

B Prefabricated insulated flexible duct connector similar to Insulfab may be used in lieu of field-

fabricated connector.

C. Where vibration occurs in ductwork while the system is in operation, the installer shall provide

such additional stiffening members as are necessary to overcome this vibration. All ductwork

where vibration occurs shall be isolated at points of contact with the building by felt pads neatly

and securely held in place.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Flexible ducts shall be provided where indicated on drawings. Ducts must comply with the

latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 Air Duct, Standard 181.

B. Liner shall be made from dead soft aluminum sheet, spiral wound into a tube and spiral

corrugated to provide strength and flexibility. Construction shall be a triple mechanical lock to

form a continuous secure air tight joint. The use of adhesives is prohibited.

C. Ducts shall be factory insulated with glass fiber insulation having an installed “R” value of 6;

aluminum foil vapor barrier jacket; a flame spread rating of 25, and smoke density factor of 50.

D. Ducts shall be rated for 12 inches water gage static pressure applications.

E. The maximum length of flexible ducts to air devices shall be limited to six (6) feet and shall be

limited to one (1) foot to variable volume boxes or similar airflow control devices. Provide

externally insulated round sheet metal ducts of same internal diameter whenever a longer run of

duct is required.

F. Acceptable flexible duct manufacturers are: Thermaflex, Genflex and Flexmaster.

2.8 TAKE-OFF FITTINGS

A. Prefabricated take-off fittings shall be provided at the point of connection of all duct branches

and flexible ducts.

B. Fittings shall be 45° entry tap types. They shall be galvanized steel, welded construction,

designed to meet system pressures. Fittings shall have integral dampers with lockable handle to

indicate position on damper quadrant. On insulated ducts provide damper extension.

C. Damper components shall be factory assembled, using spring loaded, retractable bearing and





positive locking regulator damper hardware.

D. When flexible or round duct diameter equals or exceeds available duct dimensions at point of

connection, use eccentric take-off fittings similar to Flexmaster Type STO, Sheet Metal

Connectors, Inc. Series H.E.T., or Crown Series 3300. For other applications refer to Crown

Models 305, 306, 308 and 309.

E. Straight tap fittings are not acceptable. Use of bell mouth fittings is subject to engineers review

and approval prior to bid time.

2.9 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. By "register" is meant a face together with the box and dampers. By "grille" is meant the face

only. All dampers in supply air registers shall be opposed blade type.

B. All air distribution devices shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless otherwise

noted.

C. Maximum permissible sound level of all air supply, return or exhaust air devices shall not

exceed those of the air devices used as the basis of design. Air devices producing objectionable

sound levels shall be replaced at no cost to the contract.

D. Ceiling supply diffusers shall have dampers, distribution grids and, where necessary, approved

type baffles. Provide square to round adapters when required for connection to round flexible

ducts.

E. The size and airflow capacities of air distribution devices are indicated on the drawings.

F. Select each air distribution devices to meet the indicated sound level criteria, air velocities and

distribution pattern for every area.

G. Where a transfer air duct is specified a register shall be installed at the inlet side and a grille at

the outlet side.

H. The mounting height of wall registers, linear diffusers and/or grilles measured from the floor and

its exact location shall be coordinated with the Architect. The bottom elevation of all air

handling devices installed on exposed ducts shall be as directed by the Architect.

I. Provide frames as required for the installation of the air devices on the ceiling or wall

construction indicated on the architectural plans.

J. Do not support air devices connected to flexible ducts from ceiling tiles. Provide additional

supports from building structure attached directly to the ceiling grid.

K. Acceptable manufacturers are: Titus, Carnes, Metalaire and Price.





2.10 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fire dampers shall be installed where shown on drawings and as required by the authorities

having jurisdiction. Dampers shall be UL labeled and tested in accordance with ASTM E-152

and NFPA 252.

B. All dampers shall have the blades out of air stream. Fusible links shall be rated for 165ºF unless

otherwise noted.

C. Horizontally mounted dampers in vertical ducts shall be spring-loaded for horizontal installation.

D. Dampers shall be installed as per instructions provided by the damper manufacturer that comply

with their list log and as shown in the SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Guide.

E. Acceptable manufacturers are: Nailor, Prefco, Greenheck, Ruskin, Advanced Air and Air

Balance.

2.11 ACOUSTICAL FLEXIBLE DUCT LINER

A. Install on the first twenty feet of supply and return air ducts from each air-handling unit, and

where indicated on plans, internal acoustical flexible duct lining as herein specified. Refer to

other sections of the specifications for additional requirements related to double wall

construction ducts.

B. Acoustical lining installation shall comply with Section II of the Manual, pages 2-25 through 2-

31.

C. Acoustical lining shall be a minimum of one inch (1") thick or as required to meet the thermal

value of equivalent external insulation. Liner shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and

90B. Liner thermal conductivity shall not be greater than 0.25 at 75oF and shall conform to the

requirements of ASTM C 1071 with a NCR not less than .70 as tested per ASTM C423 using a

type "A" mounting.

D. The surface exposed to the air stream shall be faced with a non-abrasive, tough, smooth black

acrylic polymer coating formulated with an immobilized, EPA approved anti-microbial agent

which offers minimum resistance to air flow. Facing material shall be environmentally safe and

be suitable for field cleaning.

E. Dimensions of lined ducts shown on drawings are the clear inside dimensions of the duct after

the lining has been installed.

F. Liner shall be adhered with 100% coverage of Benjamin Foster 85-20 and impaled on

mechanical fasteners, which do not pierce the sheet metal.

G. All exposed leading edges shall be neatly butted without gaps and be coated with Super Seal

Edge Treatment and shall be covered with metal nosing.





H. Lined ducts exposed in mechanical rooms shall also be externally insulated with one-inch (1")

thick rigid fiberboard insulation as hereinbefore specified for exposed ductwork.

I. Lining shall be Schuller Permacote Linacoustic R-300 rigid fiber glass liner board with a black

acrylic polymer coating and an EPA registered anti-microbial agent. Other products shall be

approved prior to bid time

2.12 COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS

A. Leakage rated, re-openable, combination fire/smoke dampers shall be installed where shown on

drawings and as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Dampers shall be UL labeled

and tested in accordance with UL Standards 555 and 555S.

B. Damper frame shall consist of reinforced sections of galvanized steel channels. Blades shall be

of galvanized steel construction, airfoil shaped with single lock seam, and 6" wide including

edge seals. Compression type seals shall be used to control leakage at the jambs. Axles shall

solid steel, mechanically fastened to the blades. Bearings shall be bronze oilite. Linkage shall

be injamb type, located outside of the air stream. Closure springs shall be stainless steel.

C. Damper shall be factory-installed in a galvanized steel sleeve. Each damper assembly shall be

equipped with a reopenable temperature sensing system to allow the damper to be reopened and

operated. The system shall include two blade position indicator switches, each controlling the

120-VAC signal to remote indicating lamps of a control panel, to enable it to positively indicate

the status of the damper as being full open or full closed.

D. Each damper section shall be equipped with an electric actuator, as an integral part of the

damper assembly.

Electric actuators shall be Ruskin Series MP2781 for duct sizes up to three square feet and

Series MA418 for ducts above three square feet. Actuators shall be capable of operating against

the ductwork system pressures.

All other damper actuators whose electrical power requirements exceed those of the specified

dampers are not acceptable.

E. Firestat assembly shall be rated for 165o F.

F. Damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper

sizes covering all those indicated on this project. Damper shall be Ruskin FSD60, Air Balance

Inc. Model 124AJ or as approved.

2.13 SMOKE DAMPER (HALON CONTROL)

A. Furnish and install, where required, leakage rated smoke dampers. Each damper shall be

classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control

systems, with a Class 1/250oF leakage/temperature rating, per U.L. Standard 555S. Each

damper shall bear a U.L. label verifying this rating.





B. Damper frame shall consist of a galvanized steel hat channel at head, sill, and jambs. Dampers

less than 17" in height may have a galvanized steel flat head and/or sill. Blades shall be roll-

formed single-thickness galvanized steel equivalent construction 7 1/4" maximum width.

Dampers less than 12" in height shall be supplied with a single blade. Axles shall be plated steel

stub type. Bearings shall be heavy-duty self-lubricating molded nylon, press-fit into frame.

Linkage shall consist of plated steel blade brackets and pivots with a galvanized steel angle

interconnect, and shall be fastened to the blades within the air stream. Double linkage shall be

supplied on damper panels exceeding 42" in width. Blade edge seals shall be high-temperature

silicone rubber, and aluminum compression seals shall be used to control leakage at the jambs.

Frame caulking shall consist of Hardcast Irongrip 601 U. L.-classified sealant. Each damper

assembly shall be equipped with U.L. approved electric actuator designed and installed for fail-

close operation upon loss of power.

C. Damper shall be Air Balance Inc. Model 621, Ruskin or as approved.

2.14 OUTSIDE AIR FLOW MEASURING STATION

A. Provide dedicated airflow measuring station(s) to control the operation of motorized outside air

dampers. Stations to be installed at locations shown in the contract documents. Coordinate with

installer of Energy Management System, Specifications Section 15900.

B. Controller outputs shall be true analog output signals. Pulse width modulation outputs are not

acceptable. The CU’s shall include the capability to control via simple proportional (P) control,

proportional plus integral (PL), proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID), and on-off. The

airflow control programs shall be standard factory tested programs that must be fully coordinated

with the project control’s installer; refer to Section 15900 and control diagrams in the contract

documents.

C. Station(s) shall measure airflow by the Pitot tube traverse method. Each station shall consist of

a network of static and total pressure sensors, positioned to produce an equalized velocity

pressure. The measured velocity pressure when converted to air flow (CFM) shall have accuracy

within 2 percent of the full scale throughout the velocity range form 700 to 4000 fpm. Refer to

Section 15700 for coordination with Test and Balance Agency.

D. Station(s) installation shall meet the manufacturer’s minimum requirements and shall not

amplify the sound level within the duct. The maximum resistance to air flow shall to exceed 0.3

times the velocity head for the duct stations and 0.6 times the velocity head for the fan stations.

The station(s) shall be suitable for continuous operation up to a temperature of 250ºF.

E. Air flow measuring stations casing shall be 16 gauge sheet metal with an aluminum finish. The

air straightening section to have an open face of not less than 97 percent and a total and static

pressure sensing manifold made of copper. All inter connecting tubing shall be internal to the

unit with the exception of one total pressure and one static pressure meter connection.

F. Basis of design is Air Monitor. Option: Combination damper/air monitor similar to Ruskin

Model I AW50 is acceptable.





2.15 MOTORIZED OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE DAMPER

A. Provide at indicated outside air intake ducts a motorized low leakage damper to control the amount of

outside air as scheduled on contract documents.

B. Damper(s) shall consist of an aluminum frame designed to provide maximum area for lowest pressure

drop performance. The damper blades shall be heavy gauge aluminum airfoil type with neoprene blade

edge seals. Jamb seals shall be flexible metal compression type. Linkage shall be concealed out of the

air stream and located within the damper frame to reduce pressure drop and noise.

C. Damper motors shall be low voltage or DDC as required by the air conditioning system control’s

installer. Damper motors by BELIMO are preferred; submit other manufacturers for review prior to bid

time.

D. Outside air dampers to be controlled through a control program depending on the air conditioning system

control’s and sequence of operations. Refer to Section 15900 and contract documents. When indicated

for VAV systems, provide an Air Monitor to modulate outside air damper.

E. Dampers shall be AMCA tested for leakage. Submit test data with shop drawing.

F. Submit shop drawings for review.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.0 COORDINATION

A. Installation of ductwork shall commence as soon as building roof installation is completed and

no water intrusion is expected. Ducts subject to water intrusions shall be covered with plastic

sheeting. Ducts that are found to be holding water, show signs of corrosion or develop mold

shall be promptly replaced at no cost to the contract; cleaning is not an option. Contractor shall

be responsible for any testing and cleaning of such ducts if so directed by the Owner and the

Architect / Engineer.

B. Contractor’s failure to commence duct installation in a timely manner may result in changes to

duct routing, dimensions and configuration due to conflicts with the work of other trades.

Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with those changes including engineering

costs incurred by the Design Professional and resubmittal of contract documents to the authority

having jurisdiction.

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install all system components such as air devices, dampers, boxes, electric duct heaters, etc. in

accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install duct mounted devices furnished by owner and other trades, such as smoke detectors,

control dampers, instrumentation, etc. Comply with manufacturers installation instructions.





C. Ductwork, diffusers, registers, grilles and other components of the air distribution system shall

not be supported by the ceiling or from its suspension system.

D. Air handling equipment and fans shall not support the weight of the ductwork and its

accessories. Provide additional supports to the floor and/or building structure to relieve such

weight.

E. Set air-handling equipment level and aligned with associated ductwork. Do not use the flexible

connectors as a method to correct misalignments. Provide additional duct hangers / supports as

needed.

F. Provide suitable duct transition(s) for proper installation of electric duct heaters. Transitions

must be gradual (150) and not acute. Follow duct heater installation instructions.

G. Coordinate location of air distribution devices, wall caps, roof caps, louvers and with electrical,

architectural and plumbing work. The bottom elevation of exposed ducts shall be coordinated

with lights and the Architect.

H. All damper motors or actuators shall be mounted to be fully accessible. Provide extension shafts

if required. Provide access doors on ducts to observe operation of motorized dampers.

I. Surface of ducts and accessories that need to be field painted must be left clean, free of oil and

grease and properly prepared to accept paint. Failure to properly prepare duct surface may cause

paint to peel and this installer will be responsible for repainting at no additional cost to the

contract.

J. Paint inside of ducts visible through air distribution devices with one coat of flat black paint.

3.2 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install all ductwork in accordance with applicable SMACNA Manual.

B. Provide hangers, reinforcing and supports in accordance with applicable SMACNA Manual.

C. Unless otherwise noted duct dimensions shown on drawings are clear inside dimensions.

Overall dimensions of installed ducts shall reflect allowances for acoustical lining, fiberglass

boards, etc.

D. Contractor may change duct dimensions to meet field conditions. Verify clearances allowed by

roof trusses, bar joists and other structural elements before fabricating ducts. Record changes on

as-built record documents. Maximum width to height ratio shall be 4 to 1.

E. Drawings do not show all transitions and offsets which may be required to meet field conditions.

Provide them as required for a complete system.

F. Conceal all ductwork in finished spaces unless otherwise indicated.





G. Duct turns located near a fan discharge shall always be in the direction of fan rotation.

Coordinate fan section with equipment supplier to assure this condition is met. Improperly

selected fan configurations shall be replaced or rotated in the field at no cost to the contract.

H. Field assemble rectangular, round and flat-oval ductwork as follows:

1. Use approved duct sealer applied to slip joints, couplings, etc.

2. Isolate dissimilar metals with elastomeric sealant tape or fiber gaskets, and gaskets and

washers for bolts.

I. Make all duct connections from hoods, openings, etc.

J. Blank-off with 20-gage galvanized sheet metal all unused portions of louvers. If visible through

louver, sheet metal plate shall be painted; color to be flat black. Blank-off plates shall be

insulated to prevent condensation.

3.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Flexible duct installation shall follow requirements shown on pages 3-15 through 3-22 and

figures 3-7, 3-8, 3-9 and 3-10 of the Manual.

B. In order not to exceed the maximum length of flexible duct allowed by this specification,

installer shall provide the necessary length of equivalent diameter round sheet metal duct

required for the installation.

C. Duct shall be installed with an inside bending radius equal to its inside diameter. Provide

minimum of one hanger for short sections of duct less than 5 feet.

D. All flexible duct terminations to be secured with galvanized metal bolted draw band. Secure

with a minimum of three sheet metal screws after band is tight. Seal cut ends of insulation with

approved tape.

E. Terminal devices connected by flexible ducts shall be supported independently of the flexible

duct.

3.4 TAKE-OFF FITTINGS

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Provide a bead of duct sealer compound around duct opening before installation of fittings.

C. Fittings shall not be installed back-to-back or adjacent to each other. Provide a minimum of four

feet (4') between branch take offs.





3.5 PERFORMANCE LEAK TESTS

A. All ducts regardless of operating pressures shall be leak tested as per SMACNA HVAC Air

Duct Leakage Test Manual. Tests shall be conducted under the supervision of the project’s Test

and Balance Agency, refer to Specifications Section 15700. The tabulated test results shall be

submitted to the Architect / Engineer.

B. Air flow leakage limits:

1. For square and rectangular ducts up to 2” “ ESP – 2% leakage.

a. above 2”ESP – 1.6% leakage.

2. For round or oval duct up to 2” ESP – 1% leakage.

a. above 2” ESP – 1.6% leakage.

C. When required to facilitate progress of work, sections of ductwork may be tested. Each section

shall overlap previous one by at least one duct joint. Do a final test when ductwork system

installation is completed.

D. Use portable pressure blower to supply air for tests.

E. Coordinate with duct insulator. Insulation of ducts cannot proceed until pressure test has been

satisfactorily completed.

3.6 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. All ducts shall be hung and supported in accordance with Chapter 5 of the Manual. Spacing

between hangers shall not exceed the maximum values shown on indicated tables.

B. Provide additional hangers as necessary for the proper support of inline fans, fan power boxes,

duct heaters, variable volume boxes, control dampers, and similar equipment.

C. Installer shall be familiar with building structure and provide additional steel members as

required for the proper support of ducts, fan power or VAV boxes, in-line fans, duct heaters or

and similar equipment.

D. Welding or cutting of building structural members is prohibited unless contractor has the written

approval of a structural engineer.

E. All supports shall be from the building structure. Supports connected to a metal deck system are

not acceptable. On concrete structures, drill and set in place expansion anchors for duct hangers

such as Red Head or Tappcons. The use of impact driven anchors is not acceptable.

F. Provide additional hangers on both sides of ducts penetrating fire rated walls. Hangers shall be

located within 18" of wall. No ductwork shall be supported from any fire rated wall.

G. On insulated ducts, hangers attached directly to the ducts shall be covered by insulation.





3.7 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Penetrations of fire rated assemblies shall be protected as indicated on Section 15000 and as

shown on drawings.

B. Install fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers in strict accordance with manufacturers

published instructions. Installation shall meet requirements of the UL test and listing.

C. The perimeter of smoke damper sleeves angles shall be sealed with an approved, listed caulking.

3.8 DUCT OPENING

A. Provide 20 gauge galvanized sheet steel flange section attached to duct so that no exposed cut

section of wall or ceiling is visible after ductwork is in place. Where ducts are externally

insulated attach metal flanges after insulation is applied.

B. Coordinate the location and size of all floor, wall and roof openings with other trades.

3.9 DRAFT STOPS

A. Install draft stops to seal openings in floors around the ductwork. Draft stops shall be fabricated

of 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel, neatly and securely fastened to the ductwork and building

construction.

B. Pack opening between duct and opening with fire safing insulation before angle frame is

installed on both sides of opening.

3.10 DUCT LINING

A. Fiberglass duct lining is specified for the purpose of minimizing transmission of sound generated

by air moving equipment.

B. Lining shall be protected from dust and humidity at all times during construction.

C. Provide access doors in all lined ducts for the purpose of inspection and service. Doors shall be

spaced at not more than 10'- 0" on center. Doors shall be as herein specified in this section of

the specifications.

D. Lining that has accumulated dust during construction must be thoroughly vacuum cleaned prior

to starting air-moving equipment.

3.11 CLEANING

A. As installation of ductwork progresses, remove temporary interior braces put in place during

erection.





B. All scraps of metal and insulation and other debris shall also be removed from interior of ducts.

C. Remove all grease and dust from exterior of ducts prior to installation of insulation.

D. Paint inside of ducts visible through grilles and registers with one coat of flat black paint.

E. At completion of work prior to final acceptance, clean interior of all work installed under this

section.

F. Provide temporary covers wherever open ends of ducts are going to be exposed during extended

period of time during construction. Provide disposable filter media over return and exhaust

outlets when used during construction.

G. Refer to Section 15000 for protection and cleaning requirements applicable to the use of air

conditioning systems during construction.

3.12 EQUIPMENT SERVICE

A. Provide clearances around equipment as required by Code and recommended by manufacturer

for the proper maintenance or removal of equipment.

B. Coordinate with other trades so no conduit, pipes, ceiling hangers, etc. interfere with the

required clearances.

C. Notify contractor for general construction when work by other trades needs to be relocated.





TEST AND BALANCE 15700 - 1

SECTION 15700 - TEST AND BALANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL



Section 15000 are part of this Section.

B. Examine other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work of this Section

whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.

C. Coordinate work with that of other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.

Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of work under the contract.

1.2 SCOPE

A. The contractor shall procure the services of an independent Test and Balance Agency,

hereinafter referred as the Agency, approved by the Architect / Engineer, which specializes in

the testing and balancing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.

B. The Agency shall test, balance and adjust all water, and air systems and temperature control

equipment specified in this Division of the Specifications. Include testing and balancing during

heating and cooling seasons at design conditions.

C. The Contractor shall award the test and balance contract to the Agency as soon as possible to

allow them to schedule their work in cooperation with other trades and meet the completion date.

D. The Agency shall assist and witness the Contractor’s duct leakage test as described in Section

15400 of these Specifications and as per SMACNA Standards.

E. A certified Test and Balance Report shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer at least one

week prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion. Refer to Specifications Section 15001. If

the report is not available, the Substantial Completion will be re-scheduled.

F. The Agency shall be in attendance at the Substantial Completion for a random test of the values

contained in their report. Refer to Specifications Section 15001.


A. Work covered under other sections of the specifications related to testing and balancing includes

but is not limited to the following:

15000 Mechanical General Requirements













15230 Pre-Insulated Piping


15320 Pumps - HVAC



15340 Fans and Vents

15341 Heaters




B. Work performed under the above sections is herein referred to as the Installer. Refer to specific

items of work provided by each Installer. Installers shall cooperate with test and balance agency

as required during execution of the work under this Section.

C. Prior to commencing the work under this Section, The Agency shall visit the construction site to

review the work under the above Sections as it relates to work under this Section. Report to the

Architect / Engineer and Contractor any deviations from plans and specifications that may affect

the performance of the system(s).


A. The Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar

size and scope. Agency shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council

(AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) and use their approved test

and balance procedures.

B. All instruments used for test and balance shall be accurately calibrated within six months of

commencing work on this project and maintained in good working order. Provide proof of

calibration upon request.

C. When requested, submit qualifications of test and balance agency to Architect for review and

approval. Submit proposed test and balance procedures, list of equipment to be used and any

other information that will allow the Architect to properly evaluate Agency's capabilities.

D. All readings shall be within +10%/-5% of the values shown on the plans and specifications, shop

drawings and manufacturer's literature.

E. Acceptable agencies are to perform the test and balance procedures at this project:





General Air Balance

Southern Independent Testing, Inc.

Test and Balance Corporation

The Phoenix Agency

Bay-to-Bay Balancing

Pro-Tech Diversified Services, Inc.

F. Prior to commencing its work the Test and Balance Agency shall meet with the contractor and

installers to review and obtain copies of the latest construction documents, addenda, shop

drawings, change orders, field changes and any other information necessary for their thorough

and complete understanding of the scope of the project. If required information is not readily

available, Agency may request it directly from the Architect / Engineer.

G. The Agency shall be represented at the time of substantial completion for a random check of the

values contained in the test and balance report. If report values cannot be verified, Agency shall

re-test the entire system, prepare a new report and submit to the Architect / Engineer. Refer to

Specifications Section 15001.

H. Building will not be considered substantially complete until Test and Balance Report can be

reviewed and verified.

I. All products shall have standard twenty-four (24) months warranty.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. During the first year after completion of test and balance work, the Owner may request a

recheck, or resetting of any component of the air conditioning and heating system(s) listed in the

test and balance report.

1.6 REPORTS

A. At the end of each workday, the Agency technician shall furnish the Contractor with a list of

items that must be repaired or adjusted. Provide a copy to the Architect / Engineer.

B. All test and balance information shall be compiled in a neat, orderly, itemized format on

standard AABC or NEBB Forms. All test data shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer for

review.

C. After review comments are satisfied furnish three (3) final sets of the complete final report. A

report is deemed to be final when all outstanding items listed on previous reports have been

corrected and are no longer listed on the report.

D. Included in the report shall be the following minimum information. Identify each equipment (air

handler, condensing unit, chiller, boiler etc.) with project tag number, model number and serial

number. Serial number on exhaust fan and VAV box may be omitted.

1. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and return. These readings





shall be related to fan curves for CFM handled. Provide pressure readings to indicate

pressure drops across all components of air handling system, e.g., filter, coils, fan

dampers, etc.

2. Motor current readings at each fan, compressor, pump and other system components that

use electrical power. The voltage at the time of readings shall be listed.

3. Current and temperature data on each electric heater.

4. Entering and leaving water pressure at each coil, pump, chiller and similar devices.

5. Entering and leaving air temperature at each coil, chiller, and similar devices.

6. If dehumidification is included in the scope of work:

a. Tabulation of the relative humidity of the control zone and the outside air temperature

at the time of measurement.

b. Test control sequence of operation of dehumidification equipment.

7. Test control sequence of operations of all HVAC equipment.

F. Submit three (3) copies of the final complete report one week prior to substantial completion.

Substantial Completion must be rescheduled if the report is not received at least one week prior

to the scheduled Substantial Completion date.

1.7 COORDINATION WITH CONTRACTOR AND INSTALLERS

A. The Agency shall visit the construction site to review and become familiar with the installation

of pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other components and parts of the

heating, air conditioning, and ventilating systems. Verify that adequate provisions have been

made for the testing and balancing of the systems and equipment.

B. The Agency will not instruct or direct the Contractor in any work, but will provide him with

daily reports of his findings with copy to the Architect / Engineer.

C. The Contract Documents indicate valves, dampers and miscellaneous flow adjustment devices

for the purpose of obtaining optimum operating conditions. When additional dampers are

required by the Agency to achieve design airflows, the contractor, at no additional cost to the

contract, shall provide them. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to install these devices

in a manner that leaves them accessible and adjustable. The Agency should be consulted if there

are any questions concerning the arrangement and access to any control devices.

D. The controls installer shall initially set, adjust, relocate (if necessary), and calibrate all controls.

The Agency shall verify proper operation of controls. Include in the report one week prior to the

Substantial Completion a statement that all controls have been tested for proper operation in

accordance with the Sequence of Operation and design intent.

1.8 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY

A. The Owner's Agency will independently verify the accuracy of the Contractor's test and balance

report. Reinspection by the Owner (or their representative) of systems not properly balanced or

calibrated shall be at the Contractor's expense.

B. The Contractor shall provide the same assistance to the Owner's Agency as is herein specified





between the Contractor and his own Agency.

C. The Contractor's test and balance agency shall cooperate with and promptly respond to any

requests from the Owner's Test and Balance Agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Installer shall make all preliminary tests and adjustments and place all systems and equipment in

full operation and promptly notify the Test and Balance Agency to start their work. Installer

shall maintain all systems in operation during each working day of testing and balancing.

B. Installer shall promptly correct all deficiencies noted by the Agency so as not to delay the

completion of the test and balance work.

C. Contractor shall clean or replace air filters and strainers before test and balance work starts and

thereafter as required by the Agency.

D. The Agency shall be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the data on the

performance of fans, dampers, air distribution devices and the airflows through all coils. The

Contractor and equipment supplier shall cooperate to provide all necessary data regarding the

design and proper application of the system components, and shall furnish all labor and material

required to eliminate deficiencies identified during the test and balance process.

E. During balancing, the temperature controls shall be adjusted and calibrated by the control’s

installer. Prove the accuracy of the final setting by taking hourly readings in a typical zone.

The total variation shall not exceed 2 degrees from the median temperature.

F. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the Drawings may be varied as required to secure

a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each controlled space, but the total air

quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained.

G. It shall be the obligation of the Air Handling Equipment Installer to replace fan drives, sheaves,

belts and/or motors as recommended by the Agency (without cost to the contract) to attain the

specified air volumes.

H. Systems installed with self-contained pressure independent control valves shall not require

hydronic system balancing. Test and Balance to check flow and/or temperature differential.



SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 1

SECTION 16010 - SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements described in Division 1 of these specifications, apply to the work specified in this section.

B. Quality Assurance

1. Supervisory qualifications:

A. The electrical work on the project shall be under the direct supervision of a licensed journeyman.

2. Qualifications of installers:

A. For the actual fabrication, installation, and testing of the work of this section, use

only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and with the installation recommendations of the manufacturers of the specified items.

B. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems no allowance will be made

for lack of skill on the part of the installers. C. Drawings

1. The intent of the drawings and specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactory installation. An attempt to separate and completely define the work of Division 16000 has been made. Separate divisional drawings and specifications shall not relieve the electrical contractor from full compliance of the work of his trade indicated on any drawings or in any section of the specifications.

2. Examine all drawings and specifications carefully prior to submitting a bid. The electrical

contractor will be required to furnish, install and/or connect with appropriate services all items shown on any of the drawings without additional expense to the owner.

3. Architectural drawings take precedence over mechanical or electrical drawings with reference

to building construction. Mechanical and electrical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades permit.

4. Changes from drawings necessary to make the work of the electrical contractor conform to the

building as constructed, or to fit work of other trades, or to comply with the rules of bodies having jurisdiction, shall be made by the electrical contractor at his own expense.

5. Field coordinate with other trades in ample time to build all chases and openings, set all

sleeves, inserts and concealed materials and provide clearances that may be required.



6. The term "provide" used in this section of the specifications shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install any item or system indicated on either plans or specifications, including items called for, implied or normally part of the equipment or system. The finished installation shall be complete and fully operational before final acceptance.

7. The architect or engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes (approximately

three (3) feet) in the location of outlets, fixtures, switches, receptacles or equipment prior to the rough-in of such without any additional cost to the owner.

8. The electrical contractor is responsible for and shall pay for all lockable access panels

required in the architectural finishes or surfaces to provide access to junction boxes, strip heaters, ballasts or other devices provided and located by the electrical contractor or low voltage sub-contractor. The access panel shall be installed by the trade constructing the base to which the access panel will be installed. Refer to Section 083113 - Access Doors.

9. The electrical contractor is responsible for design, fabrication and erection of all

supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices to support electrical equipment.

A. Framing members shall be designed for their actual loads, with allowable stresses set

forth in AISC specifications and the AISC code, without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vibration. Supplementary framing including design loads, member size and location shall be clearly shown on the shop drawings.

B. No cutting or drilling of holes in structural members or precast concrete slabs will be

permitted except where written permission has been obtained from the architect or structural engineer.

10. Where there is a contradiction between the drawings and specifications, the more expensive

method of the two shall be used. D. Explanation to Bidders

1. No oral explanations in regard to the meaning of drawings and specifications will be made and no oral instructions will be given before the award of the contract. Discrepancies, omissions or doubts as to the meaning of drawings and specifications should be communicated in writing to the engineer for interpretation. Bidders should act promptly and allow sufficient time for a reply to reach them before the submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications which will be forwarded to all bidders. Receipt of the addendum shall be acknowledged by the bidder on his bid form.

E. Bid Requirements

1. Before submitting his proposal, the bidder is required to visit the site of the proposed work and familiarize himself with the nature and extent of the work and any local conditions that may in any manner affect the work to be done or the equipment, materials and labor required. He is also required to carefully examine the plans and specifications and to inform himself



thoroughly regarding any and all conditions and requirements that may in any manner affect the work to be performed under the contract. Ignorance on the part of the contractor will in no way relieve him of the obligations and responsibilities assumed under the contract.

2. In assembling his bid, the contractor, shall assemble a price based on these specifications and

drawings, as shown, and with all materials and equipment exactly as specified. This figure shall be known as the "base bid". All prices must have this base bid clearly stated to be considered. Alternate equipment may be quoted as an "add" or "deduct" item from the base bid in accordance with the specifications on substitutions.

3. If asked, the contractors bidding on this project shall show evidence of having recently

completed a similar job of like size and complexity. If the low bid contractor does not have sufficient financial resources, skilled labor, technical competence or experience, he shall not be awarded the contract.

4. The contractor is expected to provide a finished product in accordance with the plans and

specifications. All interpretations of the electrical plans and electrical specifications shall be made by Project Engineer or the Principal Engineer.

F. Substitutions

1. Materials and equipment are specified by single or multiple manufacturers to indicate quality, material and type of construction desired. One manufacturer's product is shown on the drawings and has been used as a basis for design. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products meet detailed specifications, and that size and arrangement of equipment is suitable for installation. The contractor may then bid the substituted products as a voluntary alternate with the price clearly indicated as an "add" or "deduct" from the base bid.

2. Products of alternate manufacturers will be considered for use if, the item requested for

substitution is equivalent to that specified. The final decision as to equivalency shall be that of the architect/engineer.

3. All requests for substitution shall clearly and specifically indicate any and all differences or

omissions between the product specified as the basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include, but shall not be limited to the data as follows:

A. Principle of operation

B. Materials of construction or finishes C. Thickness or gauge of materials

D. Weight of item

E. Deleted features or items

F. Added features or items



G. Changes in other contractor's work caused by the substitution. If a substitution does not clearly indicate the differences, it will be rejected.

H. All submittals requiring calculations, coordination studies, CAD files etc. will require

one copy of the submittal in electronic format on a disk.

4. If the substitution is reviewed and accepted but contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the attention of the architect/engineer, the architect/engineer reserves the right to require equal or similar features to be added to the substituted product at the contractor's expense.

5. The contractor making the substitution shall assume responsibility and expense for any

changes or damages to his or any other contractor's work caused by the substitution.

G. Submittals

1. Submit items for this division as follow:

A. Submit all Division 16000 submittals at one time and in one integral group. Piece-by-piece submission of individual items will not be acceptable. The architect/engineer may check the contents of each submittal set upon initial delivery and if not complete as set forth herein, submittal sets may be returned to the contractor without review and may not be accepted until made complete.

B. Division 16000 submittals must be delivered to the architect/engineer within thirty

(30) days from official notice to proceed. Any delays arising directly or indirectly from deliverance of submittals after this time shall be the contractor's responsibility. Allow ten (10) working days from date of receipt for architect/engineer's review.

2. Submittal items shall be submitted on materials, apparatus and equipment as indicated under

each section of this division and in compliance with the general conditions.

3. Shop drawings shall comply with Section 01300 and shall include sufficient information to indicate compliance with specifications. Data shall include illustrations, catalog sheets, drawings, and certifications. Each sheet shall show the manufacturer's name or trademark.

4. At the time of each submission, the contractor shall call the architect/engineer's attention to

any deviations from the contract documents and shall plainly mark the deviations on the submittals. Submittals not marked-up in this manner will be rejected.

5. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers: in some instances, specific references have been

made to one or more manufacturers' names and catalog numbers. It should be noted that such use does not indicate that the material and equipment specified is necessarily an "off the shelf" item. Variances may be due to the requirement of a desired finish, material or other modification. The electrical contractor shall ascertain that such modifications are fully considered.



6. A copy of the construction drawings can be obtained from the engineer for creation of shop drawings and as-builts Fax all requests specifying format type (i.e. ACAD .DWG OR .DXF) to (813) 855-2721.

7. The engineer will review submittals for each specification section or where required in the

plans a total of twice at no additional charge to contractor. Where the engineer is required to review a submittal for a third time, the contractor shall make arrangements for extra services to the engineer prior to 3rd submission. All submittals shall be sent in hard copy format.

H. Familiarity with laws and codes

A. The bidder is assumed to be familiar with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, that in any manner affect the work. Ignorances on the part of the bidder will in no way relieve the bidder from responsibility to meet these requirements.

I. Ordinances and regulations

1. All work shall conform with all federal, FAA, DOL, EPA, state and local laws, ordinances or

regulations governing the installation of the specified equipment. If the work as laid out, indicated or specified is contrary to or conflicts with local laws, ordinances or regulations, the contractor shall report these conflicts to the architect/engineer before submitting a bid. The architect/engineer will then issue instructions to clarify the conflict.

2. If the contractor fails to notify the architect/engineer of conflicts or omissions as noted above,

all changes required to comply with local ordinances and regulations shall be made without additional expense to the owner.

J. Permits and fees

1. The electrical contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and inspections required for the electrical portion of the work and shall pay all charges incidental thereto.

2. The electrical contractor shall deliver to the architect/engineer all certificates of inspection

issued by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Codes and inspections

1. The installation shall comply with all laws applicable to the electrical installations which are enforced by the authority having jurisdiction. The following codes shall apply to this project: NFPA - 70 (2005) National Electrical Code NFPA - 72 (2002) National Fire Alarm Code NFPA - 90A(2002) Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA - 101(2002) Life Safety Code ANSI-A117.1(1984) Handicap Code Florida Building Code - 2004 NFPA 20 (1999) Standard for the installation of stationary pumps for fire protection. NFPA 20 (1999) Standard for the installation



NFPA 37 (2002) Standard for the installation and use of stationary combustion engines and gas engines. NFPA 30 (2000) Flammable and Combustible liquids code NFPA 80 Standard for fire doors and fire windows NFPA 105 (2003) Recommended practice for the installation of smoke control door assemblies NFPA 92A (2000) Recommended practice for smoke control systems NFPA 92B (2000) Guide for smoke management systems in malls, atria, and large areas

2. In any specific case, where, different sections of any of the aforementioned codes or these

plans and specifications specify different materials, methods of construction or other requirements, the most restrictive shall govern. In the case of any conflict between a general provision and a special provision, the special provision shall govern.

3. All materials shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated, as conforming to

its standards, where such a standard has been established for the particular type of material in question.

4. Where contract document requirements are in excess of code requirements and are permitted

under the code, the contract documents shall govern. L. Singular & Plural References

1. Singular references in specifications shall not be construed as requiring one (1) device if multiple devices are indicated on the drawings.

M. Materials

1. Materials and equipment shall be new and in good condition. The commercially standard items of equipment and the specific names mentioned herein are intended to fix the standards of quality and performance necessary for the proper functioning of the electrical work.

2. Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor equipment variations are expected;

however, performance and material requirements for the specified equipment are the minimum acceptable standards. The architect/engineer retains the right to judge equality of equipment that deviates from the specifications.

N. Identification of Equipment

1. All electrical equipment and motor controllers shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic with letters at least 1/4" high.

2. Nameplate designations shall correspond to the identifications on the "record drawings". 3. All device trims shall be engraved and clearly show the panel and circuit the device is fed

from.



O. Operating Instructions

1. The electrical contractor shall provide the services of a competent operating engineer to supervise the operation of all equipment specified herein and to instruct the owner's operators during an eight (8) hour period. The operating instruction period shall be defined as straight time working hours and shall not include nights, weekends, or travel time to and/or from the project.

2. The architect/engineer shall be notified in writing at least five days before each operating

instruction period begins. The contractor shall not commence any instruction period until the owner has issued his written acceptance of the starting time.

P. Operating and Maintenance Books

1. The electrical contractor shall provide the owner, through the architect/engineer, with operating instructions and maintenance data books for all equipment and materials furnished under this division.

2. The electrical contractor shall submit four copies of operating and maintenance data books to

the architect/engineer for review a minimum of four weeks before final inspection of the project. All data shall be assembled in a single completely indexed volume and shall identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item.

3. The following information shall be included where applicable:

A. Identifying name and mark number. B. Locations (where several similar items are used,

Provide a list). C. Complete nameplate data. D. Certified record drawings and shop drawings. E. Parts lists. F. Wiring diagrams. G. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance instructions with all non-applicable

information deleted. H. Warranty paperwork for equipment where guaranty shall last longer then one year.

Q. Date of Completion and Testing of Mechanical/Electrical Systems.

1. The date for the final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of the contract completion date. To permit the execution of any adjustments and/or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment. Any such modifications shall be completed within the number of days allotted for completion of the contract. Retests shall not relieve the contractor for this division of completion date responsibility.

R. Guarantee and Service

1. In addition to the guarantee of equipment by the manufacturer of each piece of equipment specified herein, the electrical contractor shall also guarantee such equipment and shall be



held for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance test for necessary adjustments and/or replacements of all defective equipment, materials and workmanship without expense to the owner.

2. The contractor shall furnish maintenance and service for one (1) year from final acceptance of

the contract for all portions of the system. Such service for the one year period includes the following:

A. Necessary adjustment and/or replacement of all defective equipment and materials

furnished.

3. Service and replacement of light bulbs shall be limited to thirty (30) days after final acceptance of the job.

4. Upon expiration of each of these limits noted herein, the maintenance, including labor and

material costs, shall be at the owner's expense. S. Acceptance

1. As a precedent to requesting a final inspection and release of retained monies, the electrical contractor shall:

A. Complete all work required under the electrical section of the specifications and

drawings.

B. Submit four (4) certified copies of final test data, system and equipment certificates etc. to the architect/engineer.

C. Furnish a complete set of "as built" reproducible tracings of the contractor's work to

the architect/ engineer. END OF SECTION 16010


RACEWAYS 16110 - 1

SECTION - 16110 RACEWAYS PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all materials and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the system of conduits for power and lighting service, including all related system and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

D. All conduit shall be installed in accordance with FAA Circular AC 150/5370-10B. A copy of this

circular may be obtained online at the following address: http://www.faa.gov/airports_airtraffic/airports/resources/advisory_circulars/index.cfm?template=Document_Listing&Keyword=150/5370-10&DocumentSelected=1

E. Where there is a conflict between the FAA circular requirements and these specifications, the FAA

circular shall govern. PART II - PRODUCTS A. Bushings, Locknuts and Connectors.

1. Where rigid conduit enters a box of any description, the conduit shall be secured to the box with a locknut on the outside and a similar nut and bushings on the inside.

2. Where electric metallic tubing enters such boxes the connection between the connector and

the box shall be made tight by an approved manner both on the inside and the outside of the box.

3. Conduit terminations at the boxes shall be provided with bushings. Bushings for conductors

through #8 AWG shall be galvanized, non-insulating type; for #6 AWG through #600 MCM AWG conductors, bushings shall be insulated and selected for the size conduit involved.

4. Conductors in vertical runs must be supported if the vertical rise exceeds values in table

300.19(A) of the NEC. Provide properly sized support bushing at the top of the vertical raceway. Intermediate supports shall be provided as necessary to limit supported conductor length to not exceed values specified in table 300.19(A) of the NEC.

B. Conduit

1. All conduit installed in concrete floor slabs shall be underwriter's approved hot dipped rigid galvanized steel conduit or schedule 40 PVC conduit.

2. All conduit installed underground shall be schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or hot

dipped rigid galvanized steel conduit coated with an asphaltum paint approved by the


RACEWAYS 16110 - 2

architect. 3. All conduit installed exposed in exterior areas above finished grade shall be underwriter's

approved rigid hot dipped galvanized steel. Conduit installed exposed in interior areas above finished floor shall be Underwriter's approved hot dipped rigid galvanized steel or electrical metallic tubing unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

4. All conduit installed in or above ceilings or stud partitions shall be rigid galvanized steel

conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

5. PVC schedule 40 conduit shall not be used above grade anywhere on the project. PVC conduit may not be used within the building.

6. Electrical metallic tubing: all electrical metallic tubing shall be galvanized and conform to all

pertinent requirements of the National Electrical Code.

7. All flexible metallic conduit installed in wet or damp locations shall be liquid-tight (PVC extruded cover) and all installations in dry locations shall be flexible steel conduit (no cover), unless specifically noted otherwise.

8. PVC conduit: all polyvinyl chloride conduit shall be heavy-wall schedule 40, with factory

made bends, couplings, and fittings.

9. Connectors and couplings: for electrical metallic tubing, compression fittings shall be used. For rigid steel conduit, threaded couplings and locknuts and bushings shall be used. For PVC, PVC couplings and fittings shall be used. Where PVC underground conduit connects to steel conduit, suitable threaded conduit adapter fittings shall be used. For flexible conduit, liquid-tight fittings shall be used with liquid-tight flexible conduit and compression fittings shall be used with flexible steel conduit.

10. Conduit in duct banks or underground shall not be less than 2” inside diameter or comply with the NEC based on the cable installed. The larger conduit of the two shall apply.

PART III - EXECUTION A. Inspection

1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify the electrical installation may be made in complete accordance with all pertinent codes

and regulations and the original design.

B. Discrepancies

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the architect/engineer.

2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.


RACEWAYS 16110 - 3

C. Preparation

1. Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the work schedules of other trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the total work.

D. Installation of raceways and fittings:

1. Conduit shall be of the sizes required to accommodate the number of conductors in accordance with the National Electrical Code, or as noted on the drawings. The sizes shown on the plans may be increased if desired to facilitate the pulling of conductors. The minimum conduit size shall be one half inch (1/2").

2. All conduit shall be concealed unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Concealed conduit

run above the ceiling shall be supported independent of ceiling construction. Where a ceiling of the lay-in type is used, the conduit must be installed high enough to permit removal of ceiling panels. All conduit shall be run cleanly and ‘grouped’ in the corridors.

3. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the building walls and

supported from the walls or ceilings with straps or clamps secured with wood screws for wood construction, machine screws for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete slab construction. All exposed conduit runs shall be subject to approval.

4. Underground conduit shall be laid at a minimum depth below grade of 36 inches, unless

specifically noted otherwise.

5. Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlet to cabinet, junction or pull box. Conduits shall enter and be secured to all boxes in such a manner that each system shall be electrically continuous from point of service to all outlets.

6. Approved Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or O.Z. Manufacturing Company expansion fittings shall

be installed in all rigid conduit and E.M.T. runs, where such conduit runs extend across expansion joints in the building.

7. No conduit shall be trapped except where shown on the drawings.

8. Conduit connection to a box which has no threaded hub for its reception shall be double

locknutted with locknuts designed to bite into the metal. Provide an insulated bushing at each end of each conduit run. Use insulated bushings with separate locknuts on all conduit entering a panel cabinet. All conduits entering outlet boxes shall be provided with either insulated throat connectors or separate locknuts and insulated bushings. Bushings must be installed before any wire is pulled in.

9. At rigid steel couplings, conduits shall be threaded so that they meet in the coupling. Right

and left couplings shall not be used; conduit couplings of the Erickson type shall be used at locations requiring such joints.

10. All threaded joints shall be made up with joint compound applied to the male threads only.


RACEWAYS 16110 - 4

11. Conduit shall be secured in place and protected to prevent damage to work during

construction. The ends of all conduit runs shall be plugged to avoid filling with plaster, etc. All conduit shall be blown out and/or swabbed clear of water and trash prior to pulling wire.

12. Flexible conduit shall be used only where indicated on the drawings, or where specified

otherwise.

13. Conduit connections from outlet boxes, junction boxes, conduit, switch boxes, or motor controller to rotating or vibrating machinery or equipment shall be made with flexible conduit which shall be as short as possible with a maximum length of thirty-six (36) inches.

14. Conduit connections from outlet boxes to recessed lighting fixtures shall be made with 3/8"

flexible conduit which shall have a maximum length of 72 inches, unless otherwise noted.

15. PVC conduit installed underground shall be encased in concrete with a minimum thickness of six inches on all sides of the conduit in high traffic areas such as driveways, roads and other areas as indicated on the drawings.

16. Where underground PVC conduit turns up to run above grade, the elbow and all conduit from

the elbow up shall be rigid galvanized steel. Where the PVC conduit is encased in concrete, the transition to steel conduit shall be made within the concrete casing.

17. All telephone conduit routed to the telephone terminal wood backboard shall be terminated

with an end bushing within six (6) inches of the edge of the backboard.

18. All conduit penetrating a fire or smoke wall shall be sealed with Dow Corning silicone RTV foam #3-6548 to preserve the rating of the fire wall.

19. All conduit and junction boxes shall be spot painted for easy identification of systems. Use

the following color codes:

Blue – Low voltage power Orange- Medium voltage power (277V & above) Red – Fire Alarm systems Yellow – life safety systems Green – TV systems Purple – Communication systems



WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 1

SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all materials and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the system of conductors for power and lighting service, including all related system and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. All conductors #3 AWG and smaller shall be copper of 98% conductivity with 600 volt insulation.

All conductors #2 AWG and larger shall be electrical grade copper of 98% conductivity with 600 volt insulation unless noted otherwise on plans.

B. Conductors sizes specified are AWG up to No. 4/0 and circular mils above No. 4/0. C. Conductor sizes 10 AWG and 12 AWG shall be solid: conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be

stranded. D. Conductors No. 6 and smaller shall be NEC standard dual rated type "THWN," or "THW"

thermoplastic, approved for operation at 75oc in dry and wet locations and 90oc within electric discharge lighting equipment as permitted in NEC 410-31. Conductors No.4 and larger shall be NEC standard rated type "THWN," approved for operation at 75oc in dry and wet locations.

E. All wire and cable shall be of the same name brand, and shall be in the original wrapping. PART III - EXECUTION A. Minimum size conductors installed shall be No. 12 AWG for all applications except where specifically

noted otherwise for special system circuits. B. All lighting and receptacle branch circuit conductors shall be color coded. Feeder cables and service

entrance conductors shall be color coded by use of colored plastic tape applied within 6" of each conductor end. All color coding shall be with the same color being used with its respective phase or bus through the entire job as follows:

208/120 volts 480/277 volts Phase A - Black Phase A - Brown Phase B - Red Phase B - Orange Phase C - Blue Phase C - Yellow Neutral - White Neutral - Gray Ground - Green Ground - Green



C. No wires or cables shall be pulled into the conduit until the conduit system is complete and plastering is applied and dried. This does not refer to a white finish coat of plaster which may be applied after the wires are pulled in.

D. All wiring for lighting and receptacles branch circuits shall be run as single-phase, two-wire. A

common neutral is allowed for multi-wire circuits where the available electrical service is three-phase, provided the circuits are supplied from different phases. However, areas where non-linear loads are illustrated and a dedicated circuit is shown must be installed as a dedicated circuit. Lighting circuits powering fluorescent fixtures utilizing electronic ballasts must have dedicated neutrals. If it is necessary that more circuits be placed in any run, a separate neutral must be provided for additional two-wire, three-wire, or four-wire branches.

E. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlet to junction box or pull box. All

splices and joints shall be carefully and securely made to be mechanically and electrically solid with solderless pressure connectors and insulated with Scotch 33 tape and friction tape, if insulation is not provided in pressure type connector used. Where connection is made to any terminals of more than 30 amperes capacity and where conductors larger than No. 10 are connected to any terminal, CU/AL terminal lugs shall be bolted to the conductors. Where multiple connections are made to the same terminal, individual lugs for each conductor shall be used.

1. All conductors shall be properly terminated in accordance with torque requirements specified

in the National Electrical Code. Aluminum terminations (Where Applicable) shall be treated with an oxide inhibiting compound prior to torquing.

F. All wire and cables for power, lighting, control and signal shall be continuous from origin to

destination with proper splices as specified. At the end of these wires and cables only sufficient slack shall be left as may be required for making proper connections. There shall be no unnecessary slack.

G. Where conductors are to be connected directly to the devices without the use of lugs, such as occurs at

side connections of lighting switches and plug receptacles, the conductors shall be formed into suitable loops to fit around the terminal screws. No ‘stab-in’ device installations will be permitted.

H. Where wires and cables are connected to metallic surfaces, the coated surfaces of the metal shall be

polished before installing the mechanical connectors. The lacquer coating of conduits shall be removed where ground clamps are to be installed.

I. The conductors terminating at each wired outlet shall be left not less than six (6) inches long at their outlet

fitting to facilitate the installation of devices or fixtures. Where more than one pair of conductors enters an outlet, the several pairs of conductors shall be neatly spliced and made mechanically and electrically secure to conductors which shall be not less than six (6) inches long within the outlet.

J. Branch circuit wiring which supplies more than one fluorescent fixture through the wireway of other

fixtures shall be approved for use at 90oc. K. Wall switch outlets shall be wired to provide control of outlets indicated. All connections to single pole

switches shall be made so that the off operation of the switch opens the ungrounded leg. L. Each wire in a pull box, junction box or equipment wire chamber shall be labeled with the proper panel

letter and circuit number identification, and where two or more wires are spliced, each shall be labeled.



Labels shall be printed numbers and letters on suitable plastic tape. Wires and cables shall be identified by suitable Brady or approved equal adhesive label tapes. Each trim plate shall have engraved circuit numbers and panels names for easy identification of the power source.



JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16131 - 1

SECTION 16131 - JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the installation of junction and pull boxes, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Junction and pull boxes one hundred (100) cubic inches in volume or smaller shall be standard outlet

boxes. Those one hundred fifty (150) cubic inches or larger shall be constructed as specified for cabinet construction and shall be furnished with covers. Boxes shall be coated inside and out to prevent corrosion.

B. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, and junction

boxes not used for service entrance duty shall not be smaller than four (4) inches square and one and one-half (1-1/2) inches in depth with covers accessible at all times. Boxes on concealed conduit shall be set with covers flush with the finished plaster line unless otherwise shown.

PART III - EXECUTION A. Junction boxes and pull boxes made of code gauge steel shall be furnished and installed where such

boxes may be necessary to facilitate the pulling or splicing of cables. Boxes must be made accessible. Conduits shall enter these boxes through tight fitting clearance holes. Where required, suitable supports shall be provided in all pull boxes to support feeders passing through the boxes so that feeder conductors will not remain unsupported for a distance greater than three (3) feet.

B. Junction boxes shall have only the holes necessary to accommodate the conduits at point of

installation. All boxes shall have suitable provisions to secure covers. C. Junction boxes shall be securely attached to the building construction, using wood screws for wood

construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction. Boxes flush mounted in tile or masonry construction shall be secured in place with cement mortar. Boxes flush mounted in ceiling shall be supported from building structure independent of the ceiling construction. Provide stainless steel trims for all junction boxes.

D. Junction boxes installed in rated walls shall be covered on five sides with appropriate putty pads to

maintain the rating of the wall. E. Once ceiling is removed, existing junction boxes not properly supported shall be corrected as part of

this contract.


JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 16131 - 2

F. The inside of all junction boxes shall be spot painted to comply with Section 16110. END OF SECTION 16131


CABINETS 16133 - 1

SECTION 16133 - CABINETS PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the cabinets, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Cabinets shall be of code gauge steel with overlapped riveted or welded corners and with edges turned

to receive trim. Each trim shall be of the same size as that of its cabinet or one and one-half (1-1/2) inches oversize, according to whether the cabinet required is surface-mounted or flush-mounted. Trim shall be held in place by toggle bolts or other adjustable fasteners which will permit adjustment. Doors shall be provided with latches, locks and keys.

PART III - EXECUTION A. Cabinets shall be securely attached to the building construction, using wood screws for wood

construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction. Provide a painted wood backboard for all panels to be secured to gypsum board walls unless the panel is to be flush mounted.



OUTLET BOXES 16134 - 1

SECTION 16134 - OUTLET BOXES PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the installation of outlet boxes, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. At each outlet shown, furnish and install a box of suitable size and construction to serve the purpose

properly. Furnish and install plaster rings where required in connection with adjacent plaster finish where these occur. In unfinished masonry walls, furnish and install recessed handy boxes of such size as to permit their being completely covered by the stainless steel device plate. Boxes throughout shall be galvanized steel. All unused knockouts in boxes shall be filled or capped before plates or devices are installed.

B. Ceiling outlets shall be four (4) inch octagonal boxes of the appropriate depth and furnished with

three-eights (3/8) inch fixture studs fastened through from back of boxes. For plaster surfaces, furnish and install plaster rings and ears.

C. At each switch or receptacle outlet shown, provide an approved switch box or handy box of the

number of gangs indicated. D. Outlet boxes for all exposed work (where applicable) shall be of the cast type. E. Stamped steel outlet boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Company, Raco

Manufacturing Company or Steel City Electric Company. F. Cast metal outlet boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Company, Crouse-Hinds

Company, or Killark Electric Manufacturing Company. PART III - EXECUTION A. Boxes shall have only the holes necessary to accommodate the conduits at point of installation. All

boxes shall have suitable provisions to secure covers. B. Boxes shall be securely attached to the building construction, using wood screws for wood

construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction. Boxes flush mounted in tile or masonry construction shall be secured in place with cement mortar. Boxes flush mounted in ceiling shall be supported from building structure independent of the ceiling construction.


OUTLET BOXES 16134 - 2

C. All outlet boxes shall be flush mounted within the wall regardless of wall construction, unless they are specifically shown as being used with exposed conduit.

D. The edge of all outlet boxes shall be flush with the surface in which they are recessed. The contractor

shall be attentive to boxes set in masonry walls. The devices that fit into the outlet boxes shall be screwed tight before the cover plates are installed. The cover plates shall not be used as a means of tightening the devices in place.

E. Flush mounted outlet boxes in all exposed masonry walls shall be masonry boxes or shall be four (4)

inch square boxes with square cornered tile covers. The boxes or box covers shall have square edges and shall have the device holes inside the box.

F. Extra deep type concrete boxes shall be used in concrete walls and slabs to permit entering and leaving

of conduits and to avoid steel reinforcing rods. G. Wall switch outlets shown at door locations shall be installed on the lock side of the door, four (4)

inches from the jamb, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Door swings shall be verified from architectural drawings.

H. Outlet boxes for telephones shall be 4-11/16 inches square and shall have raised covers with

rectangular opening in center. I. Outlets shall be located approximately as shown on the plans. Exact mounting heights for all outlets

shall be determined at the building site and shall be verified by the contractor from architectural elevation drawings which indicate casework and other architectural conditions. Outlets shall be located so as not to split the top of wainscot, backsplashes, or to be obstructed by equipment of any type indicated or specified. Where outlets are shown on the drawings as being adjacent and different mounting heights are specified for each, they shall be mounted one directly over the other, on the centerline of the group or on the centerline of the room.

J. Where outlets are installed in waterproofed walls or columns, a 6" x 6" x 3" deep wood box shall be

placed in the forms before the concrete is poured. This box is to be removed before the waterproofing is applied. The contractor shall then waterproof the wall and the opening after which the outlet shall be installed. Grout around the box. Boxes to be set carefully so the cover plates will be flush.

K. Outlet boxes in conduit work which is exposed to the weather, and for vapor-tight lighting fixtures and

devices shall be cast corrosion resistant type with threaded conduit hubs to accommodate the conduit size entering.

L. Outlets for the attachment of lighting fixtures shall be provided with fixture studs securely anchored to

the boxes. Where outlet boxes are used to support lighting fixtures, the outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored to the structural members of the building.

M. Above Class I locations, underground wiring shall be installed in threaded rigid metal conduit. All these conduits shall be sealed within ten feet of the conduit emergence from below grade. Provide seal at the panelboard and at the load itself.

N. All coverplates for outlet boxes shall be stainless steel.



WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1

SECTION 16140 – WIRING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all materials and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the wiring devices, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Wall switches

1. Switches shall be totally enclosed, rated at 120/277 volts, white decorator style handles, of the quiet type, side wired full rated at 20 amperes as follows, unless otherwise noted:

Switch Pass & Seymour Single Pole 2621-W Double Pole 2622-W Three Way 2623-W Four-Way 2624-W Keyed-Switches PS20AC1-L Keyed Switches Double Pole PS20AC2-L 3-Way Keyed Switches PS20AC3-L 4-Way Keyed Switches PS20AC4-L 3 Position Momentary Contact (Center Off) 1251-W

Dimmer switches shall be linear slide type Lutron “NOVA-T” series and shall be appropriate for load being served. Other acceptable manufacturers: Hubbell, Arrow-Hart, Leviton. All switch device plates shall be stainless steel. All stainless steel device trims shall have power panel and circuit numbers engraved on the trim.

B. Receptacles

1. Single and duplex receptacles shall be decora style, 20 ampere, 125 volts, side wired, with grounded pole, of white plastic color as follows:



Receptacle Pass & Seymour Duplex 26352-W or PT26352-W* Single 26361-W GFCI 2095-W TVSS Duplex 5352-W Isolated Ground Duplex IG5362-W Tamperproof Duplex PTTR63-W*

*Plug tails shall have solid copper conductors.

Other acceptable manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, Arrow-Hart.

All receptacle device plates shall be stainless steel. All stainless steel device trims shall have power panel and circuit numbers engraved on the trim.

C. Special-purpose receptacles shall be of similar grade specification as single or duplex receptacles and

shall be as described in the legend of symbols and notes for electrical systems on the drawings. D. Provide device plates for each and every outlet box requiring same. Provide device plates of the type

required for the service and device involved; furnish in gangs as necessary. Plates and screws shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Finish of the plates shall be stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

E. Where necessary, receptacles shall be furnished with a matching cap. F. Prior to installation the wiring devices shall be stored on the job site in the original labeled cartons.

The devices shall be installed in the outlets as soon as possible after the wire is installed. The devices shall then be temporarily covered using the device packaging material, until finishing and painting operations are completed. Devices and device plates that are stained or paint splashed shall be replaced. A cleaned device or device plate will not be accepted.

G. Devices to be installed using set screws only. No ‘stab-in’ installations are permitted.. I. Time switches

1. Furnish and install where shown time switches of the twenty-four hour or seven day type, powered by a self-starting synchronous motor, capable of being set for different on-off times each day of the week, to an operating accuracy of plus or minus 15 minutes of the desired time and with day omitting device. Time switches controlling life safety lighting shall be of the astronomical type.

2. Time switch contacts shall be capable of switching 40 amperes per pole continuously at rated

voltage as indicated and shall have poles and switching arrangement as indicated on the drawings.

3. Removable on-off trippers shall make possible multiple on-off periods. Separate manual on

and off levers shall enable operation by hand without disturbing automatic settings.



4. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. NEMA 1

enclosure shall have combination 1/2"-3/4" knock-outs on bottom and both sides. Provision shall be made for positive padlocking and/or sealing.

5. Terminals shall be capable of receiving up to #8 AWG wire. 6. Time switches shall be as manufactured by Tork, Intermatic or Paragon. 7. Time switches shall be programmed to operate per the owner’s direction and manual override

switches shall be provided. PART III - EXECUTION A. Installation of wall switches.

1. Wall switches shall be installed in the vertical position unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings.

Maintain separation of emergency and normal devices, junction boxes, conduits, etc....

B. Vertically operated switches shall be "on" in the upper position, except for 3-way and 4-way switches.

If operated horizontally, they shall be "on" in the left position. C. Where more than one switch is shown at one outlet, they shall be installed under one plate in an order

appropriate to the location of the outlets controlled, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.



MOTOR STARTERS 16155 - 1

SECTION 16155 - MOTOR STARTERS PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the motor starters, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - GENERAL A. In general, motor starters for all mechanical and plumbing equipment will be furnished by the

mechanical and plumbing contractors respectively. The electrical contractor shall be required to install the motor starters and to furnish and install all electrical power wiring to the starter and equipment. The control wiring to operate the equipment shall be furnished and installed by the contractor furnishing the starter.

B. Where motor starters are shown on the electrical plans they are to be furnished by the electrical

contractor. Motor starters shall be full voltage, across-the-line magnetic motor starters, rated as required for equipment served, with 120 volt coil, hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover, and general purpose NEMA-1 (indoor) or rain tight NEMA-3R (outdoor) enclosure. The starters shall be equipped with thermal overloads in each ungrounded conductor. Thermal overloads shall be sized in accordance with nameplate rating of motor supplied. Motor starters shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Square "D" Company, Cutler Hammer or Siemens ITE may be submitted alternate to be considered by the owner.

C. Where the motor starters are shown to be supplied for the same piece of gear on both the electrical

documents and the mechanical documents, the mechanical documents will govern. PART III - EXECUTION

A. Where required, motor starters shall be securely attached to building construction, using wood screws for wood construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction.

B. Provide engraved white core bakelite nameplates for all motor starters. END OF SECTION 16155


PANELBOARDS 16160 - 1

SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work of this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the panelboards including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Panelboards shall be of the dead-front type incorporating switching and protective devices of the

number, rating and type specified herein or shown on the drawings. Panelboards shall have general purpose enclosures and shall be suitable for flush or surface mounting as indicated. All panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage and shall be in accordance with the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and shall be so labeled where procedures exist. Where panelboards are to be used as service entrance equipment, they shall be so labeled. Panelboards shall also comply with NEMA standard for panelboards, National Electrical Code and Federal Specification 115A (Power Distribution Panels) where applicable.

B. Interiors 1. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with switching and protective devices,

wire connectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the anti-turn solderless type and all shall be suitable for copper wire of the sizes indicated on the drawings.

2. Interiors shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be replaced without

disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping.

3. Bus bars for the mains shall be of copper, sized in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories

standards. Unless otherwise noted, full-size insulated neutral and ground bus bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Bussing shall be braced throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short circuit stresses in panelboards. Bracing shall be equivalent to, or compatible with, the rated interrupting capacity of the smallest overcurrent device in that panelboard. All panel boards shall be fully rated. Series rating of panels is not acceptable.

4. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be copper.

5. Insulated neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral

connection or shall utilize set-screws to bond the neutral wire to the neutral bus through holes drilled in the neutral bar. A neutral bus utilizing flat head screws to hold the neutral wires will



be acceptable provided that ring type crimp-on connectors are used on the conductors that are to be connected to the neutral bus. A ground bus, identical to the neutral bus, shall be provided and bolted to the interior.

6. All molded case main circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. All vertically mounted

molded case circuit breakers shall be mounted so the handle is up for "on" and down for "off", when viewed from the normal standing position. All panel circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.

7. Spaces for future installation of molded case circuit breakers on the job site may be permitted

if so required, to utilize the manufacturer's standard panelboard design. The spaces shall be complete with all bus and bus connectors such that future breakers can be installed without adding or changing bus on the main bus. Bus connectors connected to the energized main bus shall be rigidly anchored at the other end with insulating bus supports or dummy breakers or spare breakers.

C. Boxes

1. Boxes shall be made from unpainted galvanized code gauge steel having multiple knockouts except where noted. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of four (4) inches on all sides, and to have a minimum width of twenty (20) inches unless noted otherwise. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be so sized as to include this wiring space. This wiring space shall be in addition to the minimum gutter space specified above and the limiting width may be increased accordingly.

2. At least four (4) interior mounting studs shall be provided.

3. Box identification number shall be on box.

D. Trims

1. Hinged doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims, and shall not uncover any live parts in making switching device handles accessible. Doors shall have semi-flush-type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over forty-eight (48) inches in height shall have a vault handle and 3-point catch, complete with lock, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be keyed alike. A directory frame and typewritten directory card with all spares marked in pencil and having a transparent plastic cover shall be furnished on the inside face of each door.

2. The trims shall be fabricated from code gauge sheet steel.

3. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the panelboard trim shall be properly cleaned and

finished with grey ANSI-61 paint over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating.

4. Trims shall have the same width and height as the box. Trims shall be mountable by a screwdriver without the need for special tools.



5. Shop drawings for the panels shall show that all of the aforementioned requirements have been incorporated into each panel. Panels shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Siemens-ITE, Cutler Hammer, or Square D Company. The branch circuit breaker arrangement in each respective panel shall be as indicated in the panel schedules on the drawings.

PART III - EXECUTION

A. Panelboards shall be secured to wood backboards with wood screws. B. Provide a white core bakelite nameplate for each panelboard. Nameplates shall be installed in a

suitable location and fastened with sheet metal screws. C. Rough-in of panelboards and load centers must be field verified with the engineer for compliance with

article 110 of the National Electric Code.



MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 16170 - 1

SECTION 16170 - MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general


equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the motor and circuit disconnects, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. All motor disconnect switches shall be rated at 480 Volts in NEMA-1 (indoor) or rain-tight NEMA-3R

(outdoor) enclosures unless noted otherwise. 240 Volt rated switches shall be used for all 120/208 Volt motor and circuit disconnects. Switches shall be fusible or non-fusible as indicated on the drawings in ratings as required for the equipment served. Disconnect switches shall be of the general duty type as manufactured by General Electric Company, Siemens ITE, Square D Company, or Cutler Hammer.

B. Any and all fused or unfused safety switches which may be required shall be furnished and installed

under this section of the work; no switches of any kind or type will be provided under other sections of the specifications. Switches shall be provided with quick-make, quick-break mechanisms and shall be general duty type and of the appropriate ampere rating. Those employed for motors and their feeders shall be horsepower rated switches. Switches for outdoor installation shall be provided with weathertight cabinets. Those utilized for service entrance duty shall bear the UL label of approval for such service.

PART III - EXECUTION A. Where required, motor and circuit disconnects shall be securely attached to the building construction,

using wood screws for wood construction, bolts for metal construction, and expansion anchors with bolts for masonry or concrete construction.

B. Motor circuit disconnects furnished and installed by the electrical contractor shall not be mounted to

mechanical equipment unless otherwise noted. The motor and circuit disconnects shall be supported by the building structure or by independent supports. If motor starters are specified by Division 15 and Division 16, the division 15 starters will be used and the Division 16 starters / disconnects will be deleted.

C. Provide an engraved bakelite nameplate for each disconnect switch. END OF SECTION 16170


FUSES 16181 - 1

SECTION 16181 – FUSES PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and

equipment and performing of all labor and services necessary for the installation of the fuses, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussman, Gould-Shawmut or Littelfuse and shall be dual-element

and current limiting as specified on the drawings. B. For each such fuse installed, this contractor shall furnish to the owner at the completion of the work a

fuse cabinet with three (3) spare fuses of each type used. PART III - EXECUTION A. Motor circuit fuses shall be dual element, time delay type rated between 125 and 150 percent of

nameplate rating. Bussman Fusetron UL Class RK5 type FRN or FRS as required. B. Where required panelboard feeders at 120 volts AC to ground shall be fused as follows:

0 to 600 amperes Bussman Lowpeak type LPN-UL class RK5 C. Where required panelboards and dry-type transformer feeders at 277 volts ac to ground shall be fused

as follows:

0 to 600 amperes Bussman Lowpeak type LPS-UL class RK5. D. Main switches and circuits exceeding 600 amperes capacity shall be fused with Bussman type KRP-C

Hi-Cap current limiting fuses, UL Class L. The exact type shall be as recommended by the manufacturer considering interrupting and coordination requirements.



CIRCUIT BREAKER 16182 - 1

SECTION 16182 - CIRCUIT BREAKER PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all materials and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the circuit breakers, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II -PRODUCTS

A. All branch circuit breakers shall be UL labeled and shall be thermal and magnetic, molded case type, quick-make and quick-break both on manual and on automatic operation and shall be bolted to the panel bus. Breakers shall be the over-the-center toggle operating type, with the handle going to a position between "on" and "off" to indicate automatic tripping. All multi-pole breakers shall be internal common trip. The breakers to be furnished shall, in each instance, be determined by the specifications, the Ampacity and poles as scheduled or as indicated, and by the minimum UL labeled RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at circuit voltage as indicated by the schedules, but in no case less than 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. NEMA ratings are not acceptable in lieu of UL ratings. Breakers shall be labeled as required by the NEC. Series rating of circuit breakers to meet or exceed the available fault current shall not be accepted.

B. Circuit breakers serving HVAC gear shall be HACR rated.

C. Circuit breakers to be used as a means of switching shall be switch rated.

D. Circuit breakers acting as a remote means of disconnecting hard wired connections shall be provided with circuit breaker ‘lock off’ handle hardware

E. Circuit breakers serving night lighting or emergency lighting circuits shall be provided with lockable ‘lock on’ handle hardware.

PART III - EXECUTION A. All molded case main circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. All vertically mounted molded case

circuit breakers shall be mounted so the handle is up for "on" and down for "off," when viewed from the normal standing position.



GROUNDING 16450 - 1

SECTION 16450 - Grounding PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general


equipment and performing all labor and services necessary to insure that the electrical service and electrical systems conform with the requirements of Article 250 of the NEC and as specified hereinafter.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. The products specified in Section 16120 apply to the work specified in this section. B. Ground rods shall be minimum of 5/8" x 10'-0" copperweld ground rods. C. Ground clamps shall be UL approved for the application. D. Ground bushings shall be used in the feeder conduit system PART III - EXECUTION A. The following systems and/or equipment shall be grounded in accordance with the rules of the

National Electrical Code, the local code, and as hereinafter specified.

1. Building power system

2. Raceway and conduit systems

3. Lighting fixtures

4. Noncurrent carrying metal parts of all motors, panels and other electrically operated equipment.

5. Telephone system

6. Fire alarm system 7. Above ground gas piping system upstream from the equipment shutoff valve.


GROUNDING 16450 - 2

B. The service equipment shall be bonded ahead of the main water service meter, building steel, steel in building footer and bonded to installed ground rods using bare copper wire in steel conduit. The grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-66 of the National Electrical Code. Copperclad ground rods shall be driven to a depth sufficient to provide a grounding electrode of 5 ohms maximum resistance to ground. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, additional ground rods shall be installed and bonded to the first electrode.

C. Made electrodes shall consist of copperclad ground rods. The rods shall be installed such that at least

8'-0" of length is in contact with the soil. The upper end of the electrode shall be flush with or below ground level unless the above ground end and the grounding wire attachment are protected against physical damage.

D. All metallic conduits entering the building service panel shall be bonded together and to the system

service ground. Metallic conduit systems shall be electrically continuous throughout. E. The system neutral conductor shall be identified throughout and shall be grounded at the building

service only. G. An equipment grounding wire sized as per NEC shall be installed inside all conduit, and shall be bare

or have green insulation. H. All grounding electrode connections shall be accessible for periodic inspection and testing. I. Isolated ground systems shall have a separate ground wire installed in the conduit which is run to the

building service ground with no other interconnections between normal ground and isolated ground. Isolated ground wires shall be sized in accordance with the equipment served and shall be identified by a colored stripe on the green insulation.

J. All grounding electrodes shall be tied together. K. The generator grounding system shall be a separately derived system. L. Provide building ground system as indicated on riser diagram.

M. All grounding electrode conductor bonds shall be accessible and easily inspected. Provide a bonding

inspection point for all grounding electrode conductor bonds. END OF SECTION 16450


DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 - 1

16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general

requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. B. Refer to Section 16010 for supplementary general conditions. C. The work included under this section of these specifications consists of furnishing all material and

equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the installation of the dry type transformers, including all related systems and accessories, as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Indoor transformers shall be general purpose dry type in an indoor enclosure. Outdoor transformers

shall be provided with a weatherproof (NEMA-3R) enclosure, pad mounted. Indoor and outdoor transformers shall have Class "H" or better insulation. Maximum coil rise temperature shall not exceed 150oc for the rated transformer capacity based on 40oc maximum ambient. The transformers shall conform to National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) Standard ST-1. Three-phase transformers shall have not less than two coils per phase. Full-capacity NEMA standard taps shall be provided in the high-voltage winding. Transformers 15 kva and below shall be provided with two 2-1/2 percent taps below and two 2-1/2 percent taps above the normal primary voltage.

B. Transformers rated more than 15 kva shall be provided with four 2-1/2 percent taps below and two

2-1/2 percent taps above the normal primary voltage. Transformers shall be quiet type with average sound level not exceeding the following:

Transformer rating Average Sound Level

(KVA) (Decibels) ------------------ ------------------------ 0-9 37 10-30 41 31-112 1/2 45 113-167 50 168-300 53

301-1000 60 C. Audible-sound-level tests shall be made in accordance with NEMA Standard TP-1. Transformers with

sound levels greater than 45 decibels shall be installed on resilient vibration-isolating mountings to prevent amplification of sound.

D. All. Transformer windings shall be copper. E. Provide a 4” high concrete housekeeping pad for all floor mounted transformers. F. Provide a steel transformer rack, where applicable, for stacking transformers. PART III - EXECUTION


DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 - 2

A. Dry type transformers shall be floor mounted unless noted otherwise, size as indicated on the

drawings. B. Provide a black finish, white core bakelite nameplate for each dry type transformer with engraved

letters three-eights (3/8) inches high. Nameplates shall be installed in a suitable visible location and fastened with sheet metal screws.



LIGHTING FIXTURES 16500 - 1

SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING FIXTURES PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general


equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the lighting fixtures, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Lighting fixtures shall be as specified in the lighting fixture schedule on the drawings and as specified

herein. B. The lighting fixture manufacturers and catalog numbers specified in the fixture schedule on the

drawings are used for the purpose of establishing required levels of product quality and performance. Substitute fixtures may be proposed for use in accordance with specification Section 16010, Part 1.6. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to fully substantiate, to the satisfaction of the architect/engineer, that the proposed substitute products are the same as or better than those specified.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for confirming all ceiling types before ordering lighting fixtures

shipped to the job. D. Each lighting fixture shall have been tested and certified for proper operation by the fixture

manufacturer for the type ceiling and mounting on or in which it is installed. E. All fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic type usable with T8 or T5 energy saving lamps, as approved

by the lamp manufacturer, High Power Factor (H.P.F.) Class "P", C.B.M. certified by E.T.L., internally protected with an automatic reset thermal protector, with Class "A" sound rating unless otherwise noted. Fluorescent ballasts shall be as manufactured by:

Manufacturer Model Advance Mark V General Electric Maximiser II Universal Watt Reducer

F. All fluorescent fixtures shall bear the UL label. G. All high intensity discharge lamp luminaire ballasts shall be constant wattage high power factory type

unless noted otherwise.


LIGHTING FIXTURES 16500 - 2

PART III - EXECUTION A. Lighting fixtures shall be installed as specified in the lighting fixture schedule on the drawings and as

specified herein.

1. Lighting fixtures shall be supported from the building structure. The ceiling or ceiling grid shall not bear any of the weight. The contractor shall coordinate this requirement with the ceiling trades.

2. Fixtures shall be supported in a manner that will insure the fixture weight being equally

distributed from each support and the fixture remaining in a level position.

3. Each ceiling anchor or support for fluorescent fixtures shall be tested with a weight of not less than 50 pounds or three times the weight of the installed fixtures, whichever is greater. Testing shall be done in the presence of the architect's representative on the job.

B. No wiring splice or tap shall be located within an arm, stem, etc., used for support of lighting fixture.

Wire shall be continuous from splice in outlet box of the building wiring system to lamp socket, or to ballast terminals in fluorescent luminaires.



LAMPS 16501 - 1

SECTION 16501 - LAMPS PART I - GENERAL A. The general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and general


equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the lamps, including all related systems and accessories as shown by the drawings and hereinafter specified.

PART II - PRODUCTS A. Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving preheat, rapid start, with a minimum rated life of 20,000

hours at three (3) hours per start unless indicated otherwise. B. Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, unless otherwise noted, with a minimum rated life of 1,000

hours, and rated for 120 volt operation. C. Metal halide lamps shall have a minimum rated life of 20,000 hours, and shall be operated through a

ballast designed to the lamp wattage and supply voltage indicated on the plans. D. Twin tube fluorescent lamps shall have a minimum rated life of 10,000 hours and shall be operated

through a ballast designed to the lamp wattage and supply voltage indicated on the plans. Lamps shall have single ended bi-pin base.

E. Lamps shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Phillips or Osram Sylvania. PART III -EXECUTION A. Lamps installed in lighting fixtures shall be as specified in the fixture schedule on the drawings and as

specified herein. All lamps shall be operating at the time of final inspection. END OF SECTION 16501


VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 -1

SECTION 16721 - VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART I – GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. This performance specification provides the minimum requirements for the Life Safety System. The system shall include, but not limited to all equipment, materials, labor, documentation and services necessary to furnish and install a complete, operational system to include but not limited to the following functions:

a. Smoke and fire detection.

b. Sprinkler suppression system monitoring and control (as applicable)

c. Deluge system monitoring (as applicable)

d. Off-premise notification.

e. Smoke control. (as applicable)

f. Releasing Service ( as applicable)

g. One-way voice communication notification system.

h. Two-way voice communication system.

i. Override of independent Muzak/PA system

2. Manufacturer

a. Acceptable fire alarm system device manufacturers include:

1. Notifier (existing FACP is by this manufacturer)

b. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises fire alarm protective signaling system and smoke control system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment, such as control panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system. The project shall consist of a major renovation in areas and upgrades to some devices outside of the major renovation areas.

3. Alternates

a. Strict conformance to this specification is required to ensure that the installed and programmed system will function as designed, and will accommodate the future requirements and operations of the building owner. All specified operational features must be met without exception.

b. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system.



c. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling system, and smoke control. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment, such as control panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system. This includes providing new wire for the existing devices to be upgraded. No existing wiring shall be re-used where a termination has been disturbed.

d. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. REFERENCES

1. Codes - Fire – Suppression

a. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current provisions of the following codes and standards:

1. NFPA 70 - 2002 National Electric Code

2. NFPA 72 - 2002 National Fire Alarm Code

3. NFPA 90A - 2002 Air Conditioning Systems

4. NFPA 92A - 2000 Smoke Control Systems

5. NFPA 92B - 2000 Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Areas

6. NFPA 101- 2002 Life Safety Code

7. NFPA 11 - 2002 Low Expansion Foam

8. NFPA 12 - 2000 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems

9. NFPA 12A - 1997 Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems

10. NFPA 13 - 2002 Installation of Sprinkler Systems

11. NFPA 15 - 2001 Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection

12. NFPA 16 - 2003 Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems

13. NFPA 17 - 2002 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems

14. NFPA 2001 - 2000 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

15. UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

16. UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

17. UL 268A - Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.



18. UL 217 - Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms

19. UL 521 - Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

20. UL 228 - Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors.

21. UL 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances.

22. UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems

23. UL 346 - Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

24. UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing-Impaired.

25. UL 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

26. UL 1711 - Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

27. UL 1635 - Digital Alarm Communicator System Units

28. AHJ – Pinellas County Fire Marshall

29. Florida Building Code 2004 (with revisions)

30. Federal Codes and Regulations

31. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

32. Factory Mutual (FM) approval

33. International Standards Organization (ISO)

34. ISO-9000

35. ISO-9001

36. Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements

37. Federal Aviation Administration

C. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General:

a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, services and materials necessary to furnish and install additions to the existing Notifier FACP in the Fire Command Room. Contractor to provide a complete, functional fire alarm system Voice Evacuation Fire Alarm System, upgrade some existing devices as indicated on the plans. The System shall comply in respects with all pertinent codes, rules, regulations and laws of the Authority, and local jurisdiction. The System shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications, manufacturer's recommendations and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (ULI) listings ( UL 864 9th edition).



b. It is further intended that upon completion of this work, the Owner be provided with:

1. Complete information and drawings describing and depicting the entire system as installed, including all information necessary for maintaining, troubleshooting, and/or expanding the system at a future date.

c. Complete documentation of system testing.

d. Certification that the entire system has been inspected and tested, is installed entirely in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, manufacturer's recommendations and ULI listings, and is in proper working order. Contractor shall use "Fire Alarm System Certification and Description" as required by Chapter 4, Section 4.5.2 of NFPA 72 - 2002 edition.

2. Description

a. Provide and install a new fire detection (as applicable) and alarm system (as applicable) consisting of:

b. Existing Fire command center shall be located as shown on the drawings.

c. Existing LCD annunciator shall be located as shown on the drawings.

d. Existing multi-channel one-way voice communication system.

e. Existing color graphic workstation and printer, as shown on the drawings. Color graphics shall be updated to include all upgraded fire alarm devices.

f. Manual pull stations shall be located as shown on the drawings.

g. Area smoke detection shall be provided as shown on drawings.

h. Area heat detection shall be provided as shown on drawings.

i. Duct smoke detection shall be provided as shown on the drawings.(as applicable)

j. Monitor the sprinkler system water flow(s) and valve supervisory switch(s). (as applicable)

k. Monitor the deluge system. (as applicable)

l. Provide audible appliances located throughout the building for the major renovation and upgrades to devices outside of the areas of major renovation, as shown on the drawings.

m. Provide synchronized visual appliances located throughout the building, as shown on the drawings.

n. Provide a two-way communication system with phone jack located at elevator lobbies and elevator cars as shown on drawings.

o. Provide relays for system interfaces with FACP.



p. Provide fan shutdown controls as shown on drawings. (as applicable)

q. Provide direct interface to the building automation system.(as applicable)

r. Provide elevator recall functions for primary and alternate floors and elevator power shunt trip activation.

s. Provide connection to a Central Station. There shall be two dedicated phone lines to be terminated as directed by the installing contractor.

t. Remove the existing fire detection and alarm system selectively as required by the electrical demolition plans. Maintain the circuit integrity of all existing fire alarm circuits where there is equipment and devices up/down stream of the area of demolition. Provide new wiring for devices to be upgraded as part of this contract. All new fire alarm wiring must be plenum rated. Where required, existing fire alarm system junction boxes shall be relocated to comply with ADA mounting heights of speaker strobes, strobes and manual pull stations. Walls shall be patched and painted to match surrounding architectural finishes.

u. New conduit penetrations shall be provided to maintain the integrity of the existing walls. Contractor to field verify existing conditions prior to bid proposal

v. All new rated wall penetrations required for this work shall be included on the fire alarm shop drawing floor plans.

D. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

1. General - Audio

a. Upon alarm activation of any area smoke detector, heat detector, manual pull station, sprinkler water flow, the following functions shall automatically occur:

b. The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center.

c. Display the alarm event on the graphical workstation.

d. The LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location and time/date.

e. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer.

f. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated.

g. The following audio messages and actions shall occur simultaneously:

h. A general evacuation message shall be sounded on fire zones immediately adjacent to the fire zone . It is the intent of this message to advise occupants hearing this message that they are near danger and should leave the building via the stairs (nearest exit) immediately.

i. Activate visual strobes on the fire zones immediately adjacent to the fire zone (general alarm evacuation). The visual strobe shall continue to flash until the



system has been reset. The visual strobe shall not stop operating when the "Alarm Silence" is pressed. An alert message shall be sounded on the remainder of building connected to the new voice evacuation FACP. It is the intent of this message to advise occupants to prepare for evacuation if necessary.

j. An instructional message shall be sounded in the elevator cabs. It is the intent of this message to advise elevator occupants that an emergency exists, the elevator has been directed to the ground floor, and that occupants should quickly exit the building.

k. An instructional message shall be sounded in the lobby. It is the intent of this message to advise lobby occupants to leave the lobby and clear the area for arriving firefighters.

l. An instructional message shall be sounded in the concourses connected to the building's lobby. It is the intent of this message to prevent new entries into the lobby by advising occupants not to attempt to enter the lobby of the affected building.

m. Provide selective paging to each individual zone. In addition to the message/channels detailed above, a dedicated page channel shall be capable of simultaneously providing live voice instructions without interrupting any of the messages listed above shall be provided. Transmit signal to the building automation system. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification. Activate automatic smoke control sequences. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. All stairwell/exit doors shall unlock or provide delayed egress throughout the building. All self-closing fire/smoke doors held open shall be released. Direct the closed circuit TV cameras to the alarm event and start video recording. Transmit alarm text messages to "alpha-numerical" display pagers. Provide a signal to the baggage handling system main controllers, provide a signal to the building paging system.

2. Duct Smoke Activation – Alarm

a. The alarm activation of any duct smoke detector, the following functions shall automatically occur:

1. The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel. Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image. The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated.

2. Transmit signals to remote annunciators. Transmit signal to the building automation system. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification. Shutdown the local air handling units within the zone. Transmit alarm text messages to "alpha-numerical" display pagers. All



automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated.

3. Duct Smoke Activation – Supervisory

a. The supervisory activation of any duct smoke detector, the following functions shall automatically occur:

1. The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel. Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image. The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated. Transmit signals to remote annunciators. Transmit signal to the building automation system. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification. Shutdown the local air handling unit.

2. Transmit alarm text messages to "alpha-numerical" display pagers. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated.

4. Supervisory Operation

a. Upon supervisory activation of any sprinkler valve supervisory switch, the following functions shall automatically occur:

1. The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel. Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image. The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the supervisory zone shall be illuminated. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification.

5. Trouble Operation

a. Upon activation of a trouble condition or signal from any device on the system, the following functions shall automatically occur:

1. The internal audible device shall sound at the control pane. Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image. The LCD keypad display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the trouble condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the trouble zone shall be illuminated. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification.

6. Graphic Workstation Functions



a. All Events

1. Display the address of the alarm or off normal point with type and description and time of the event in a prioritized color-coded event list. Highlighting an event in the event list shall automatically cause the other three quadrants (described below) to display information relating to the highlighted event. Display color graphical representation of the area in which the alarm or off normal device is located. It shall be possible for the operator to manually zoom down to any portion of a vector-based graphic without aliasing, artifacting, or pixilation of the image. Preset zoom levels shall not be considered equal.

2. Display a set of written operator instructions for each event, site programmability of the message must be provided allowing modification by the end user to suit occupancies and emergency plans. The Workstation must provide simple control via a two button mouse. Display a preset stored image of the device. Log operator's comments for each event to history with time and date. Log all events and operator actions to history for future review.

3. Fire alarms

4. Shall be capable of acknowledging, silencing, and resetting fire alarm functions.

5. Shall be capable of manually activating, deactivating, enabling, and disabling individual fire alarm points. Shall be capable of generating status, maintenance and sensitivity reports for all fire alarm components. Receipt of a fire alarm shall activate an audio WAV file over the workstation speakers alerting the operator to a fire alarm, and providing audible instructions.

E. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1. General

a. All Life Safety System equipment shall be arranged and programmed to provide the early detection of fire, the notification of building occupants, the automatic summoning of the local fire department, the override of the HVAC system operation, and the activation of other auxiliary systems to inhibit the spread of smoke and fire, and to facilitate the safe evacuation of building occupants.

2. Power Supply - Audio

a. Standby power supply shall be an electrical battery with capacity to operate the system under maximum supervisory load for 60 hours and capable of operating the system for fifteen (15) minutes of evacuation alarm on all devices, operating at maximum load. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery. The system shall automatically adjust the charging of the battery to compensate for temperature.

3. Display



a. The main display interface shall show the first and most recent highest priority system events without any operator intervention. All system events shall be directed to one of four message queues. Messages of different types shall never intermixed to eliminate operator confusion. A "Details" switch shall provide additional information about any device highlighted by the operator.

4. Initiating Device Circuits

a. Initiating device circuits monitoring manual fire alarm stations, smoke and heat detectors, water flow switches, valve supervisory switches shall be Class B ("B").

5. Notification Appliance Circuits

a. All notification appliance circuits shall be Class B (Style "Y"). All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of: 2 amps @ 24 vdc; 50 watts @ 25V audio, and 35 watts @ 70V audio. The notification circuits shall be power limited. Non-power limited circuits are not acceptable. Provide additional power supplies and amplifiers as required for a complete and fully functional voice evacuation fire alarm system.

6. Signaling Line Circuits

a. When a signaling line circuit covers more than one fire/smoke compartment, a wire-to-wire short shall not effect the operation of the circuit from the other fire/smoke compartments. The signaling line circuit connecting network panel/nodes, annunciators, command centers, shall Class B (style 4). The media shall be copper except where fiber optic cable is specified on the drawings.

b. The signaling line circuit connecting to addressable/analog devices including, detectors, monitor modules, control modules, isolation modules, intrusion detection modules and notification circuit modules shall be Class B (style 4).

c. The signaling line circuit connecting to the audio communications (pre-amp signal), amplifiers, and nodes shall be Class B (style 4). The circuit shall be power limited.

d. The signaling line circuit connecting to the two-way communications circuit (riser) shall be Class B (style 4).

e. The signaling line circuit connecting to access control card reader controller and keypads/displays shall be Class B (style 4).

7. Network Wiring

a. The system supplied under this specification shall utilize node to node, direct wired multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations. The system shall utilize independently addressed, smoke detectors and heat detectors as described in this specification. The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the command center, main controller, remote control panels, LCD/LED annunciation nodes, and workstations. Each node is an equal, active functional node of the network, which is capable of making all local decisions and



generating network tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communications failure between a nodes.

8. Network Nodes

a. The remote control panels shall meet the same requirements as described in control panel section and shall contain the following;

b. Integral power supply(s) with secondary stand-by power.

c. Signaling line circuits for communications with analog/addressable devices, as required.

d. Audio amplification, as required.

e. Notification appliance circuits, as required.

f. Auxiliary function circuits and operations, as required.

9. DACT

a. The system shall provide off premise communications capability (DACT) for transmitting system events to multiple Central Monitoring Station (CMS) receivers. The system shall provide the CMS(s) with point identification of system events using Contact ID or SIA DCS protocols. The system shall provide an individual CMS account for each tenant, and send the required signals to the one or more CMS(s) and account(s) specified by each tenant. In the event of a panel CPU failure during a fire alarm condition, the DACT degrade mode shall transmit a general fire alarm signal to the CMS. The system shall also transmit an alphanumeric system activity message, by event, to a commercial paging system of the owners choice, using TAP Pager protocol.

10. Two-Way Audio

a. The two-way telephone circuits shall be "Class B" (style D). The system shall provide a ring-tone.

F. SUBMITTALS

1. Project

a. The contractor shall purchase no equipment for the system specified herein until the owner has approved the project submittals in their entirety and has returned them to the contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor to meet the entire intent and functional performance detailed in these specifications. Approved submittals shall only allow the contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not be construed to mean that the contractor has satisfied the requirements of these specifications. The contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of documentation within 30 calendar days after award of purchase order.

b. Each submittal shall include a cover letter providing a list of each variation that the submittal may have from the requirements of the contract documents. In addition the Contractor shall provide specific notation on each shop drawing,



sample, catalog cut, data sheet, installation manual, etc. submitted for review and approval, of each such variation.

c. All drawings and diagrams shall include the contractor's title block, complete with drawing title, contractor's name, License number, address, date including revisions, and preparer's and reviewer's initials. All submitted drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in the State of Florida.

2. Product Data

a. Data sheets with the printed logo or trademark of the manufacturer for all equipment. Indicated in the documentation will be the type, size, rating, style, and catalog number for all items proposed to meet the system performance detailed in this specification. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.

3. Shop Drawings

a. A complete set of shop drawings shall be supplied. The shop drawings shall be reproduced electronically in digital format. This package shall include but not be limited to:

b. Control panel wiring and interconnection schematics. Complete point to point wiring diagrams. Riser diagrams. Complete floor plan drawing locating all system devices at 1/8”= 1'-0 scale plan and complete elevation of all equipment in the Fire Command Station. Including showing the placement of each individual item of fire alarm, security, and access control equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway. Detailed system operational description. Any Specification differences and deviations shall be clearly noted and marked.

c. Complete system bill of material (exclude quantities please). All drawings shall be reviewed and signed off by an individual having a minimum of a NICET certification in fire protection engineering technology, subfield of fire alarm systems. Provide a disk with the submittals in CAD format.

4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals

a. Installer's Certification

1. The engineered systems distributor must be licensed in the state of project location and have been incorporated in the business in that state for a minimum of 5 years. Submit a copy of the system supplier's training certification issued by the manufacturer of the integrated life safety system, and a copy of the installing technician's NICET certification.

b. System Calculations

1. Complete calculations shall be provided which show the electrical load on the following system components: Each system power supply, including stand alone booster supplies.



2. Each standby power supply (batteries). Each notification appliance circuit. Each auxiliary control circuit that draws power from any system power supply.

c. Close Out

1. Two (2) copies of the following documents shall be delivered to the building owner's representative at the time of system acceptance. The close out submittals shall include:

2. Project specific operating manuals covering the installed integrated life safety system. The manual shall contain a detailed narrative description of the system architecture, inputs, notification signaling, auxiliary functions, annunciation, sequence of operations, expansion capability, application considerations and limitations. Manufacturer's data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment supplied. A generic or typical owner's instruction and operation manual shall not be acceptable to fulfill this requirement.

3. As-Built drawings consisting of: a scaled plan of each building showing the placement of each individual item of the Integrated Life Safety System equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway. All drawings must reflect point to point wiring, device address and programmed characteristics as verified in the presence of the engineer and/or the end user unless device addressing is electronically generated, and automatically graphically self-documented by the system.

4. All drawings shall be provided in standard .CAD format. A vellum plot of each sheet shall also be provided.

5. The application program listing for the system as installed at the time of acceptance by the building owner and/or local AHJ (disk, hard copy printout, and all required passwords).

6. Provide the name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative.

7. A filled out Record of Completion similar to NFPA 72, 2002 edition section 4.5.2

G. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Qualifications of Contractor

a. The contractor shall have successfully installed similar system fire detection, evacuation voice and visual signaling control components on a previous project of comparable size and complexity. The owner reserves the right to reject any control components for which evidence of a successful prior installation performed by the contractor cannot be provided.



b. The contractor shall have in-house engineering and project management capability consistent with the requirements of this project. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall perform the detailed engineering design of central and remote control equipment. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall produce all panel and equipment drawings and submittals, operating manuals. The contractor is responsible for retaining qualified and approved representative(s) of those system manufacturers specified for detailed system design and documentation, coordination of system installation requirements, and final system testing and commissioning in accordance with these specifications.

H. PROJECT CONDITIONS

1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to inspect the job site and become familiar with the conditions under which the work will be performed. Inspection of the building may be made by appointment with the Owner. Contractors are requested to inspect the building prior to the pre-bid meeting.

2. All work for the major terminal renovation, except for selective device upgrades, may be conducted during normal working hours, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, by properly coordinating the work with the Owner. Noise restrictions do apply. The core drilling, testing of evacuation signals and other work disruptive to occupants will be prohibited between hours to be determined by the Airport Engineer, John Holt. All system switch over shall be done during unoccupied hours. Contractor is to include, in his base bid, all overtime necessary to complete his work. The Contractor shall be responsible for prior coordination of all work and demolition with the Owner.

I. WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

1. Spare Parts

a. The Contractor shall supply the following spare parts:

b. Automatic detection devices - Two (2) percent of the installed quantity of each type.

c. Manual fire alarm stations - Two (2) percent of the installed quantity of each type.

d. Glass rods or panels for break glass manual fire alarm stations (if used) - <Ten> percent of the installed quantity, but no less than two devices.

e. Audible and visible devices - One (1) percent of the installed quantity of each type, but no less than two (2) devices.

f. Keys - A minimum of three (3) sets of keys shall be provided and appropriately identified.

2. Warranty

a. The contractor shall warranty all materials, installation and workmanship for one (1) year from date of acceptance, unless otherwise specified. A copy of the



manufacturer's warranty shall be provided with close-out documentation and included with the operation and installation manuals.

b. The System Supplier shall maintain a service organization full staffed and operational with adequate spare parts stock within 50 miles of the installation. Any defects that render the system inoperative shall be repaired within 24 hours of the owner notifying the contractor.

J. TRAINING

1. The System Supplier shall schedule and present a minimum of 8 hours of documented formalized instruction for the building owner, detailing the proper operation of the installed System. The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by a person factory trained in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and who is also thoroughly familiar with the installation. The instruction shall cover the schedule of maintenance required by NFPA 72 and any additional maintenance recommended by the system manufacturer.

2. The local Fire Marshall shall be made aware of this instruction for required firefighter training, if any.

PART II – PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURER

1. Fire

a. The manufacturer of the system equipment shall be regularly involved in the design, manufacture, and distribution of all products specified in this document. These processes shall be monitored under a quality assurance program that meets the ISO 9000 requirements. All System components shall be the cataloged products of a single supplier. All products shall be listed by the manufacturer for their intended purpose. Edwards Systems Technology, Inc. products constitute the minimum type and quality of equipment to be installed.

b. All control panel assemblies and connected field appliances shall be both designed and manufactured by the same company, and shall be tested and cross-listed as to ensure that a fully functioning is designed and installed. The system supplied under this specification shall be a microprocessor-based direct wired, multi-priority peer-to-peer networked system. The system shall utilize independently addressed, microprocessor-based smoke detectors, heat detectors, and modules as described in this specification.

2. Operator's Interface

a. Annunciation – Audio

1. The system shall be designed and equipped to receive, monitor, and annunciate signals from devices and circuits installed throughout the building. Standard LED annunciators may be combined in common enclosures provided that the groups of LED's comprising each of the



required annunciators are separated from one another (Detection, supervisory, Status, and Security) and clearly labeled.

2. Manufacturers' standard control switches shall be acceptable if they provide the required operation, including performance, supervision and position indication. If the manufacturers' standard switches do not comply with these requirements, fabrication of custom manual controls acceptable to the Owner is required.

3. Receipt of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall activate integral audible devices at the control panel(s) and at each remote annunciation device. The integral audible devices shall produce a sound output upon activation of not less than 85 dBA at 10 feet.

4. The annunciator shall contain the following system status indicators:

a. 168 character Backlit Liquid Crystal Display , System Normal Indicator, System Common Alarm Indicator, System Common Trouble Indicator, System Common Supervisory Indicator, System Ground Fault Indicator, System Common Security Indicator, System Disabled Point(s) Indicator, System Reset Switch with Indicator.

b. System Alarm Silence Switch with Indicator , System Trouble Silence Switch with Indicator, System Message Queue Scroll Switches, 10-Digit Keypad to Enable/Disable System and Functions.

5. The LED Annunciator shall contain the following switches: Provide two-position switch to manually unlock all stairwell doors, Provide eight (8) two position switches for system by-pass functions. Actual switch function shall be determined by the owner.

6. Existing one-way emergency voice communication system annunciator with the following design: This standard LED annunciator shall incorporate the microphone for the one-way and telephone handset for the two-way voice communication systems, including all required zone select and manual override control switches and the following LED indicators:

7. 3-Position Switch

a. Provide 3-position switch for each evacuation signaling zone, with "Voice," "Auto" and "Evacuate" positions identified and two LED status indicators for each audio visual evacuation signaling "zone", one red and one yellow. These LED's shall illuminate to indicate respectively: 1) Evacuation signals activated (red), 2) Trouble in audio (speaker) or visual (strobe) circuit(s) (yellow).

8. 2-Position Switch



a. Existing 2-position switch for each evacuation signaling zone, with "Voice" and "Auto" positions identified and two LED status indicators for each audio visual evacuation signaling "zone", one red and one yellow. These LED's shall illuminate to indicate respectively: 1) Evacuation signals activated (red), 2) Trouble in audio (speaker) or visual (strobe) circuit(s) (yellow).

9. All Call Switch 2- Position

a. Existing 2-position switch for "All-Call" to activate all the evacuation signaling zones, with "Voice" and "Auto" positions identified and two LED status indicators for each audio visual evacuation signaling "zone", one red and one yellow. These LED's shall illuminate to indicate respectively: 1) Evacuation signals activated (red), 2) Trouble in audio (speaker) or visual (strobe) circuit(s) (yellow).

10. All Call Switch 3-Position

a. Existing 3-position switch for "All-Call" to activate all the evacuation signaling zones, with "Voice", "Off" and "Auto" positions identified and two LED status indicators for each audio visual evacuation signaling "zone", one red and one yellow. These LED's shall illuminate to indicate respectively: 1) Evacuation signals activated (red), 2) Trouble in audio (speaker) or visual (strobe) circuit(s) (yellow).

11. Emergency Two-Way Voice Communication

a. Existing two LED status indicators for each two telephone zone, one red and one yellow. These LED's shall illuminate to indicate respectively: 1) Telephone calling-in and call connected (red), 2) Trouble in circuit(s) (yellow).

3. Audio

a. The system shall be capable of delivering multi-channel audio messages simultaneously over copper and/or fiber media. All audio messages and live pages shall originate at the one-way audio control unit. The one-way audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally. These messages shall be automatically directed to various areas in a facility under program control. The system shall support remote cabinets with zoned amplifiers to receive, amplify and send messages through speakers over supervised circuits.

b. The one-way emergency audio control shall provide control switches to direct paging messages as follows:

c. "All Call" to direct the page messages to all areas in the facility, overriding all other messages and tones.

d. "Page to Evacuation Area" to direct the message to the evacuation area(s), overriding all other messages and tones.



e. "Page to Alert Area" to direct page messages to the area(s) receiving the alert message and tones, overriding all other messages and tones..

f. "Page to Balance Building" to direct page messages to the areas) in the facility NOT receiving either the evacuation area or alert area messages.

g. "Page by Phone" switch to select the firefighters telephone system as the source for paging.

h. The system shall be capable of delivering multiple audio messages simultaneously over copper and / or fiber media. All audio messages and live pages shall originate at the one-way emergency audio control unit. The one-way emergency audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally. These messages shall automatically directed to various areas in a facility under program control. The system shall support remote panels with zoned amplifiers to receive, amplify and distribute messages through speakers over supervised circuits.

i. The two-way voice communications control unit shall provide two-way communications between remotely located phones and the command center. The control unit shall provide the ability to individually select and display each two-way voice communication circuit support up to five (5) remote telephones in simultaneous two-way voice communications.

j. Audio Amplifiers (Multi-Channel)

k. Provide as minimum one twenty (20) watt audio amplifier per paging zone. The system software shall be capable of selecting the required audio source signal for amplification. To enhance system survivability, each audio amplifier shall automatically provide a local 3-3-3 1000 Hz temporal pattern output upon loss of the audio communications with the one-way audio control unit, during an alarm condition. Audio amplifiers shall be power limited and protected from short circuits conditions on the audio circuit wiring. Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, selectable 25/70 Vrms output. Provide a standby audio amplifier that will automatically sense the failure of a primary amplifier, and replace the function of the failed amplifier.

4. DACT Dialer

a. The system shall provide off premise communications capability using a digital alarm communications transmitter (DACT) for sending system events to multiple central monitoring station (CMS) receivers. The system shall provide the CMS(s) with point identification of system events using Contact ID or SIA DCS protocols. The system shall also transmit an alphanumeric system activity message, by event, to a commercial paging system of the owners choice, using TAP Pager protocol. The system shall provide an individual CMS account for each tenant, and send the required signals to the one or more CMS(s) and account(s) specified by each tenant. In the event of a panel CPU failure during a fire alarm condition, the DACT degrade mode shall transmit a general fire alarm signal to the CMS.



5. Power Supply

a. System power supply(s) shall provide multiple power limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel. Upon failure of normal (AC) power, the affected portion(s) of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition.

b. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected.

c. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 48 hours maximum.

d. All AC power connections shall be to the building's designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 - The AC power circuit shall be installed in conduit raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves.

6. Reports

a. The system shall provide the operator with system reports that give detailed description of the status of system parameters for corrective action, or for preventative maintenance programs. The system shall provide these reports via the main LCD, and shall be capable of being printed on any system printer.

b. The system shall provide a report that gives a sensitivity listing of all detectors that have less than 75% environmental compensation remaining. The system shall provide a report that provides a sensitivity (% Obscuration per foot) listing of any particular detector.

c. The system shall provide a report that gives a listing of the sensitivity of all of the detectors on any given panel in the system, or any given analog/addressable device loop within any given panel.

d. The system shall provide a report that gives a chronological listing of up to the last 1740 system events.

e. The system shall provide a listing of all of the firmware revision listings for all of the installed network components in the system.

7. System Printer

a. The event and status printer shall be a 9-pin, impact, dot matrix printer with a minimum print speed of 232 characters per second. The printer shall be capable of serial or parallel communications protocol. The communications speed for RS-



232 communications protocol shall be adjustable from 300 to 9600 Baud. The printer shall list the time, date, type and user defined message for each event printed.

8. Graphic & Smoke Control Annunciators

a. Firefighters Smoke Control Station

1. Provide a surface mounted graphic Firefighter's Smoke Control Station (FSCS) at the location(s) shown on the drawings. The FSCS shall provide a graphic representation of the facility HVAC system. Fan override and control switches and fan/damper status LEDs shall be provided as indicated on the shop drawings. The following system controls and indicators shall be provided on the FSCS: Power ON, Trouble, and Signal Silenced LEDs; System Reset, Silence, Trouble Silence, and Drill push buttons. It shall be possible to annunciate text messages via LCD display mounted in the FSCS enclosure. The FSCS shall provide an integral remote microphone for one-way audio system paging.

B. GRAPHIC COMMAND WORKSTATION

1. General

a. The command center shall function as the center point for all operational and administration functions required for the systems provided within the specification. The command center shall contain a console that will display and house any equipment necessary for system operation. Console space shall be provided for other equipment provided under other sections of the specifications. A single graphical workstation shall be provided that will enable primary control of the systems provided by this specification. An operator shall not have to operate multiple workstations to receive, view, process and record system events for each system provided. Equipment included in the command center shall include:

b. System annunciation and controls for: Fire detection, Deluge system, Firefighters smoke control, Emergency one-way voice communications, Standby generator status indication and controls, Automatic transfer switch status indication and controls, Radio Communications, Public intercom, Public telephone, Elevator monitor, status and controls.

c. As part of this contract, include required conduit and wiring from fire command room to elevator machinery spaces for Elevator monitor status and controls. Contractor to propose route of conduits in field.

2. Graphical Command Workstation

a. The graphical command workstation(s) shall display a different color text for each message type and color graphic diagrams/floor plans. The graphical command workstation shall simultaneously display the following system event views; system event display, graphical diagram display, detailed event message/instructions, and user event log. The workstation shall be an IBM-



compatible personal computer listed for UL Standards 864 (Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems) under categories UOJZ, APOU, and UUKL. The workstation(s) shall be capable of annunciation and control of all fire detection and smoke control points.

b. The computer shall be minimum of an Pentium Grade Pentium Processor 2.4 Ghz with a 533 Mhz front side bus, 512 MB RAM, 80 GB Hard Drive, and 18" LCD monitor. Installation of the computer or monitor can be either desktop or floor mounting or rack/panel mounting.

c. The software shall provide multitasking type environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The operating program shall run within a 32-bit operating system such as Windows® XP. These Windows applications shall run simultaneously with other programs. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel and other Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating on-line alarms and monitoring functions.

d. Graphic Workstation Operations

e. The graphic display screen shall organize and structure system events for easy user comprehension. The workstation display shall use four relational quadrants. When any event occurs:

f. The "list of events area" shall display the address of the alarm or off-normal point with type and description and time of the event in a prioritized color-coded event list. Highlighting an event in the event list area shall automatically cause the display of a graphical map and other three areas (described below) to display information relating to the highlighted event.

g. The "map area" shall display color graphical representation of the area location in which the alarm or off-normal device is located. It shall be possible for the operator to manually zoom down to any portion of a vector-based graphic without aliasing, artifacting, or pixilation of the image. Preset zoom levels shall not be considered equal.

h. The "event action area" shall display a customized set of written operator instructions for every state (alarm, trouble, restore, etc.) of each point. An event log shall record all events and operator actions to history for future review. An operator's log shall record operator's comments for each event in system history with time and date.

i. The "image area" shall display a stored image of the device relating to the event highlighted in the event list area.

j. When processing fire alarm events the graphic workstation: Shall be capable of acknowledging, silencing, and resetting all fire alarm functions. Shall be capable of manually activating, deactivating, enabling, and disabling individual fire alarm points.



k. Shall be capable of generating status, maintenance and sensitivity reports for fire alarm components.

l. Receipt of a fire alarm shall activate an audio WAV file over the workstation speakers alerting the operator to a fire alarm.

C. FIELD MOUNTED SYSTEM COMPONENTS

1. Fire Initiating Devices

a. Smoke Detectors & Accessories

1. Duct Detector Housing

a. FSD-751P

2. Smoke Detector - Photoelectric

a. FSP-851

3. Manual Station - Double Action Single Stage

a. NBG-12LX

b. Provide STI Stopper II

D. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

1. Speaker-Reentrant Surface

a. Provide 4" surface re-entrant speakers at the locations shown on the drawings. Speakers shall provide 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. The re-entrant speakers shall utilize a high efficiency compression drivers. Cone type drivers are not acceptable. At the 15 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 102 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Weatherproof boxes shall be provided for outdoor mounting.

b. Speakers shall be tapped to provide sound decibel levels as required by NFPA.

c. Speaker circuits shall have a minimum of 25% spare capacity

d. Strobe circuits shall have a minimum 25% spare capacity

2. Speaker-Strobes

a. Low Profile Speaker-Strobe

1. Provide low profile wall mount speaker/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile speaker/strobe shall not extend more than 1" (2.5cm) past the finished wall surface, and provide a switch selectable audible output of 2W (90dBA), 1W (87dBA), 1/2W (84dBA), or 1/4W (81dBA) at 10 ft. when measured in reverberation room per UL-464.



2. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash output, that shall be switch selectable for output values of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd & 110cd. Wattage and candela settings shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring. The low profile speaker/strobes shall mount in a North American 4" x 2 1/8" square electrical box, without trims or extension rings.

3. The low profile wall mount speaker/strobes shall be Notifier SP2R1224MC

4. Speakers shall be tapped to provide sound decibel levels as required by NFPA.

5. Speaker circuits shall have a minimum of 25% spare capacity

6. Strobe circuits shall have a minimum 25% spare capacity

b. Speaker-Strobe 4 inch

1. Provide 4" white speakers/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. Speakers shall have a 4" mylar cone, paper cones are not acceptable. The rear of the speakers shall be completely sealed protecting the cone during and after installation. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speakers shall provide 1/4w, 1/2w, 1w, and 2w power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. At the 2 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 87 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15/75cd, 30cd, & 110cd devices. Notifier SR



c. Speaker-Strobe Ceiling 8 inch

1. Provide 8" ceiling mounted speaker/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speaker baffles shall be round or square, steel with white finish as required. Provide square surface mount boxes with matching white finish as required. Speakers shall provide 1/2w, 1w, 2w, and 4W power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. At the 4 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 94 dBA sound output a frequency of 1000 Hz. when measured in an anechoic chamber at 10 ft. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash outputs. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, and 110cd devices.






d. Speaker-Strobe Reentrant

1. Provide 4" white red semi-flush re-entrant speaker/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. Weatherproof boxes shall be provided for outdoor mounting. Speakers shall provide 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. The re-entrant speakers shall utilize a high efficiency compression drivers. Cone type drivers are not acceptable. At the 15 watt setting, the speaker shall provide a 102 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz. when measured in reverberation room per UL-1480. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash. Strobe output shall be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, & 110cd devices.




5. Notifier SP2R12224MCK

e. Semi-Flush Speaker Strobes

1. At device locations where an existing horn strobe is installed, it shall be upgraded to a semi-flush speaker strobe capable of being mounted to a single gang plaster ring where indicated on the plans.


3. Initiation & Control Modules

a. Intelligent Modules -- General

1. It shall be possible to address each intelligent module without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. Modules requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or



jumper changes shall not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

a. Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)

b. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing

b. Control Relay Module

1. Provide intelligent control relay modules. The Control Relay Module shall provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers.

c. Dual Input Module

1. Provide intelligent dual input modules. The Dual Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types:

a. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)

b. Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Water flow Switches)

c. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)

d. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches

d. Dual Input Signal Module

1. Provide intelligent dual input signal modules. The Dual Input (Dual Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide a means to selectively connect one of two (2) signaling circuit power risers to one (1) supervised output circuit. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The dual input signal module shall support the following operation:



a. Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25 Vrms @ 50w or 70 Vrms @ 35w of Audio)

e. Isolator Module

1. Provide intelligent fault isolators modules. The Isolator Module shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault from a class A data circuit while allowing the remaining data loop to continue operating. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes.

f. Monitor Module

1. Provide intelligent monitor modules. The Monitor Module shall be factory set to support one (1) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Non-Latching Monitor circuit. The monitor module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers.

g. Single Input Module

1. Provide intelligent single input modules. The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. The single input module shall support the following circuit types:

a. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)

b. Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Water flow Switches)

c. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)

d. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)

h. Single Input Signal Module

1. Provide intelligent single input signal modules. The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its own "ring tone". The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The single input signal module shall support the following operations:



a. Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25Vrms @50w or 70 Vrms @ 35 Watts of Audio)

b. Telephone Power Selector with Ring Tone (Fire Fighter's Telephone)

i. Suppression System Releasing Module

1. Provide addressable suppression system releasing interface module(s) at the locations shown on the drawings. The interface shall be suitable for preaction and deluge sprinkler systems and clean extinguishing agent release. The interface shall provide supervised Class B circuits required for solenoid activation, manual release, system abort, and audible and visible notification of pending release. The interface shall provide all required release and abort timing functions. The interface shall be listed for use with solenoid releasing valves that has both ULI listing and FM approval. The solenoid release circuit shall be provided with a manual disconnect switch for system maintenance.

j. Universal Class AB Module

1. Provide intelligent class A/B modules. The Universal Class A/B Module shall be capable of a minimum of fifteen (15) distinct operations. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The universal class A/B module shall support the following circuit types:

a. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Alarm Latching.

b. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching.

c. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Non-Latching.

d. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Latching.

e. One (1) form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc.

f. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Alarm Latching.

g. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching.

h. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Active Non-Latching.

i. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Active Latching.

j. One (1) supervised Class A 2-wire Smoke Alarm Non-Verified.

k. One (1) supervised Class B 2-wire Smoke Alarm Non-Verified.



l. One (1) supervised Class A 2-wire Smoke Alarm Verified

m. One (1) supervised Class B 2-wire Smoke Alarm Verified

n. One (1) supervised Class A Signal Circuit, 24Vdc @ 2A.

o. One (1) supervised Class B Signal Circuit, 24Vdc @ 2A.

k. Waterflow-Tamper Module

1. Provide intelligent water flow/tamper modules. The Waterflow/Tamper Module shall be factory set to support two (2) supervised Class B input circuits. Channel A shall support a Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching Water flow Switch circuit. Channel B shall support a Normally-Open Active Latching Tamper Switch. The water flow/tamper module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers.

E. TWO-WAY AUDIO

1. Telephone Handsets

a. Provide four (4) firefighter's telephone handsets for use with the firefighter's telephone jack stations. The telephone handsets shall be red in color and have a 5 ft (1.3m) coiled cord.

2. Telephone Jacks

a. Provide stainless steel firefighter's telephone jack stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The jack station shall be clearly identified with the words "FIRE FIGHTER'S TELEPHONE" for use with portable fire fighter telephone handsets.

PART III - EXECUTION

A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Testing and Inspection

a. All intelligent analog addressable devices shall be tested for current address, sensitivity, and user defined message.

b. All wiring shall be tested for continuity, shorts, and grounds before the system is activated.

c. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the tests shall be made available by the installing contractor.

d. The system including all its sequence of operations shall be demonstrated to the Owner, his representative, and the local fire inspector. In the event the system does not operate properly, the test shall be terminated. Corrections shall be made



and the testing procedure shall be repeated until it is acceptable to the Owner, his representatives and the fire inspector.

e. At the final test and inspection, a factory trained representative of the system manufacturer shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in accordance with these specifications. The representative shall provide technical supervision, and participate during all of the testing for the system.

f. All fire alarm testing shall be in accordance with National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72 - 1999, Chapter 7.

2. A letter from the Contractor certifying that the system is installed entirely in accordance with the system manufacturer's recommendations and within the limitations of the required listings and approvals, that all system hardware and software has been visually inspected and functionally tested by a manufacturer's certified representative, and that the system is in proper working order.


D H SECURITY RANSPORTATION SECURITY ADMINISTRATION ... · american recovery & reinvestment act of...

Documents

Transcript of D H SECURITY RANSPORTATION SECURITY ADMINISTRATION ... · american recovery & reinvestment act of...